Agenda packet — Roseville City Council, April 16, 2025 (part 7 of 27)

3. Valves:
a. Insulate valves 3 inches in nominal size and larger with removable insulating blankets.
b. Size blanket to extend up to packing gland only so that replacement of packing does not require removal of insulating blanket.

4. Provide continuous insulation through and over pipe supports and provide protection saddles at supports.

5. Provide continuous pipe insulation and covering through sleeves or openings in walls and floors.
a. When buried pipe enters a building through a below grade wall or slab penetration, begin insulation system on interior side of penetration.

6. Apply pre-molded pipe insulation with extended legs when used on pipe traced with either tubing or electric cable type.

7. Thermally isolate insulation closure locations (end caps, transitions, etc.). a. Type 1 or 2 jacket installation on piping with potential reach temperatures greater than 150 degrees Fahrenheit.

8. Apply piping identification on jackets as specified in Section 15076 - Pipe Identification.

G. Backflow preventers:

1. Include shutoff valves at each end of backflow preventer with properly located test cocks.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test water piping in accordance with the plumbing code as specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.

B. Test drain, waste, and vent lines as specified and in accordance with the plumbing code as specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.

C. Backflow preventer:

1. Test witnessing: Witnessed.

Plumbing Systems
15400-18 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal)

2. Conduct pressure and leak test as specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.

3. Certificate of backflow prevention from a tester listed by the American Backflow Prevention Association.

3.04 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation, clean piping interior of foreign matter and debris.

B. Flush and disinfect potable water piping as specified in Section 01757 - Disinfection.

3.05 SCHEDULES
A. As indicated on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION
Emergency Eye/Face Wash and Shower Equipment
15430-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15430 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15430

EMERGENCY EYE/FACE WASH AND SHOWER EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Emergency shower and eyewash.

2. Water heaters.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Gas Association (AGA) Standards.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. Z358.1 - Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment.

C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).

D. American Society of Sanitary Engineering’s (ASSE):

1. 1070 - Standard for devices that limit water temperature to a fixture or fixtures such as sinks, lavatories, or bathtubs to reduce the risk of scalding.

2. 1071 - Performance Requirements for Temperature Actuated Mixing Valves for Plumbed Emergency Equipment.

E. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.

F. California Code of Regulations (CCR):

1. Title 24 - Building Standards Code.

G. California Department of Occupational Safety and Health Administration (Cal-OSHA).

H. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).

I. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

J. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS
A. IPS - Industrial Piping Systems.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.

Emergency Eye/Face Wash and Shower Equipment
15430-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15430 (DraftFinal)

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory requirements:

1. As applicable, equipment of this Section shall comply with requirements of public agencies of the state where the project is located including ASME, Cal-OSHA, NFPA, OSHA, UL.

1.06 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing and shipping: Deliver to the job site in manufacturer's original containers.

B. Delivery: After wet operations in building are completed.

C. Storage and protection:

1. Store materials in original, unopened containers in compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

2. Keep materials dry until ready for use.

3. Keep packages of material off the ground, under cover, and away from sweating walls and other damp surfaces.

4. Protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation. Keep covered with a protective covering.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EMERGENCY SHOWERS AND EYE/FACE WASHES
A. General design requirements:

1. Combination unit emergency shower with eye/face wash:
a. Floor mounted fixture consisting of pipe standard, showerhead assembly, and eyewash assembly.
b. Provide stanchion and floor flange, with interconnecting piping.

2. Showerhead flow: 20.0 gallons per minute flow, minimum.

3. Eye/face wash flow: 3.0 gallons per minute flow, minimum.

4. Meet or exceed all requirements of ANSI Z358.1.

5. Provide ANSI compliant identification sign and markings.

B. Shower/eyewash unit with integral controls to alarm the system is in use.

1. Flow switch:
a. Construction:
1) NEMA Type 4.
2) Brass or Type 316 Stainless Steel.
b. Type: Magnetic proximity switch.
c. Alarm Contacts: Double pole, double throw contacts rated at 2.0 amps at 120 VAC configurable for either Normally Open or Normally Closed.

Emergency Eye/Face Wash and Shower Equipment
15430-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15430 (DraftFinal) C. Combination unit emergency shower and eye/face wash:

1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Haws, Model No. 8309.
b. Guardian Equipment, Model No. G1950HFC.
c. Bradley, Model No. S19314AC.

2. Pipe standard:
a. 1-1/4-inch hot-dip galvanized steel pipe, and fittings with interconnecting piping, stanchion, and 9-inch diameter floor flange.
b. Corrosion protection:
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Bradley Galvanized steel with BradTect® safety yellow coating. b) Guardian Equipment “-GC” epoxy protective coating in corrosive environments.
c) Haws “-CRP”.

3. Shower head:
a. Material and size: ABS plastic, 10-inch diameter with 20 gallons per minute flow control.
b. Valve and actuator: Stay open chrome plated brass ball valve equipped with stainless steel ball and stem operated by a rigid stainless steel pull rod.

4. Eye/face wash receptor:
a. Valve and actuator: Stay open chrome plated brass ball valve with stainless steel ball and stem operated by a stainless steel or epoxy coated aluminum push handle and foot treadle.
b. Spray head(s): ABS plastic or polypropylene eye/face wash type heads, with integral flip top protective dust covers releasing with water pressure. c. Receptor bowl: Stainless steel; 11 inches diameter.

5. Supply: 1-1/4-inch IPS.

6. Waste: 1-1/4-inch IPS.

D. Safety shower and eye/face wash tepid water mixing valves:

1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Bradley, Model No. S19-2250.
b. Guardian Equipment, Model No. G3800 Series.
c. Haws, Model No. 9201 Series.

2. General requirements:
a. Provide 1 mixing valve for each safety unit or group of safety units mounted within 100 feet of each other.

3. Tepid water system to provide a minimum of 20 gallons per minute for shower and 3 gallons per minute for eye/face wash of water for a period of at least 15 minutes at a delivery temperature of 80 to 85 degrees Fahrenheit.

E. Safety shower tester:

1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Bradley, Model No. S19-330ST.
b. Guardian Equipment, Model No. AP250-005.
c. Haws, Model No. 9010 with No. 9009.

2. Kit includes:
a. Minimum 5 gallon plastic bucket.

Emergency Eye/Face Wash and Shower Equipment
15430-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15430 (DraftFinal) b. 7 foot long watertight 12-gallon translucent vinyl plastic bag for attaching over drench showerhead.
1) Bag shall have drawstring at top and be hemmed at bottom. c. Testing record card.

2.02 WATER HEATERS
A. Size and requirements as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Provide with temperature limiting device meeting ASSE 1070.

C. Water heaters shall meet the requirements in accordance with CCR Title 24.

D. Tankless electric heater:

1. Modular heating chambers.

2. NEMA 4X Type 316 stainless steel cabinet:
a. Internal heater protection to -30 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Wall mounted.

3. Flow actuated at 2.5 gpm.

4. Inlet flow:
a. Up to 40 gpm and 150 psig.

5. Outlet flow:
a. Minimum temperature rise: 22 degrees Fahrenheit at maximum inlet flow. b. Factory set maximum temperature: 115 degrees Fahrenheit. c. Temperature set point: 85 (within 1) degrees Fahrenheit.

6. Provide water heater piping components necessary for installation:
a. Drain piping, material as indicated on Piping Schedule. b. Supply valve.
c. Y strainer.
d. Pressure regulating valve and gauge.
e. Water hammer arrestor.

7. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Haws, Model 9327.
b. EEMAX, similar models.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations.

B. Install products in accordance with code requirements and ANSI Z358.1.

C. Plumbing and mechanical work as specified in Section 15400 - Plumbing Systems and Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

Emergency Eye/Face Wash and Shower Equipment
15430-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15430 (DraftFinal)

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Functional testing:

1. Shower/eyewash unit with integral controls:
a. Test witnessing: Witnessed.
b. Electrical Instrumentation and Controls:
1) Test witnessing: Witnessed.
2) Conduct testing as specified in Section 17950 - Commissioning for Instrumentation and Controls.

3.03 SCHEDULES
A. As indicated on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Common Work Results for HVAC
15500-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15500 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. General prescriptive, design, and performance requirements for products and mechanical equipment used to heat, ventilate, cool, or otherwise condition or distribute indoor air.

2. Specific requirements for ductwork accessories:
a. Dampers and damper operators.
b. Diffusers, grills, and registers.

3. Specific requirements for refrigerant piping.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI):

1. 210/240 - Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment.

2. 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.

3. 340/360 - Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment.

4. 430 - Performance Rating of Central Station Air-handling Unit Supply Fans.

B. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA):

1. 11 - Certified Ratings Program Operating Manual.

2. 210 - Laboratory Methods for Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating.

3. 211 - Certified Rating Program- Product Rating Manual for Fan Air Performance.

4. 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.

5. 311 - Certified Ratings Program — Product Rating Manual for Fan Sound Performance.

6. 500 – Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating.

7. 511 - Certified Ratings Program Product Rating Manual for Air Control Devices.

C. American Bearing Manufacturer's Association (ABMA):

1. 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

2. 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. Z21.47 - Gas Fired Central Furnaces (except Direct Vent Central Furnaces).

Common Work Results for HVAC
15500-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15500 (DraftFinal) E. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):

1. Standard 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration System.

2. Standard 52.2 - Methods of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size.

F. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

1. RTP-1 – Reinforced Thermoset Plastic Corrosion-Resistant Equipment.

G. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.

2. B75 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube.

3. B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.

4. B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube.

5. B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fitting.

6. C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation.

7. D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.

8. D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.

9. D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.

10. D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.

11. D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.

H. California Energy Commission (CEC):

1. Title 24 - Building Energy Efficiency Standards.

I. National Bureau of Standards: NBS PS15-69 - Custom Contact-Molded Reinforced-Polyester Chemical-Resistant Process Equipment.

J. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum).

K. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

2. 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

L. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA).

M. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO):

1. IS 3 - Installation Standard for Copper Plumbing Tube, Pipe, and Fittings.

N. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA).

Common Work Results for HVAC
15500-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15500 (DraftFinal) O. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers.

2. 555S - Standard for Smoke Dampers.

3. 900 - Standard for Air Filter Units.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination.

1. Provide roof mounted HVAC equipment information required in the preparation of roofing drawings including, but not limited to:
a. Location.
b. Size.
c. Weight.
d. Anchoring and support details.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Where items in this Section are components of equipment or systems specified in other sections, include data for this Section’s components with the equipment or system submittal.

B. When products are specified in this Section but are not referenced in other Technical Sections, submit:

1. As specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

2. Product data:
a. Sufficient to substantiate specified requirements.

3. Description of coating system and instructions for field touch up and re-coating.

C. Projects subject to CEC Title 24:

1. Damper operators:
a. Electric: Wiring diagrams.

2. Manufacturer's recommendation for testing and/or maintenance of product.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Technical Sections product requirements supersede conflicting requirements in this Section.

B. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.

C. Electrical:

1. Components and assemblies.

2. Carry UL Listing Marking.

3. In accordance with NEC requirements.

D. Fans:

1. Rated and labeled in accordance with AMCA 210 and AMCA 211.

Common Work Results for HVAC
15500-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15500 (DraftFinal)

2. Belt drive systems:
a. Adjustable for minimum within 5 percent speed change. b. Rated for 150 percent of maximum motor horsepower.

E. Unitary air conditioners and heat pumps:

1. Rated in accordance with AHRI Standards 210/240 or 340/360, AHRI 270, and AHRI 430.

2. In accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15.

3. Heating: Certified in accordance with ANSI Z21-47.

4. Refrigerant: HFC R-410A.

F. Filters:

1. Media: UL 900 listed.

G. Insulation and adhesives: In accordance with NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke generation.

H. Roof curbs: Supplied by manufacturer of product requiring the curb.

I. Factory coating: For equipment with factory coatings, manufacturer to supply 2 containers (each about a pint) of the paint for Contractor/Owner touch up.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. General:

1. Environmental conditions as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

2. Provide instrumentation and controls to meet the equipment operating requirements as specified in Section 15936 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.

B. Fans:

1. Sharply rising pressure characteristics throughout the operating range and beyond the efficiency peak.

2. Peak operating points to be as close as possible to the maximum efficiency and whose operating range is within the normal fan selection range.

3. Bearings rated per ABMA 9 or 11 for a L10 life rating of not less than 50,000 hours.

4. Total sound power levels in the 8 octave band range in accordance with, AMCA 301, not to exceed the lesser of the following or the sones level indicated on the Drawings.

Sound Power Level, decibels levels referenced to 10-12 watts Frequency, Hz 63 125 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000 8,000
General 100 98 94 88 84 84 78 75

5. Shall comply with AMCA Publication 11 and bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Program seal for air performance and sound performance according to AMCA Publication 211 and AMCA Publication 311.

Common Work Results for HVAC
15500-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15500 (DraftFinal) C. Unitary air conditioners and heat pumps:

1. Outdoor noise levels: Outdoor noise levels in the 8 octave band ranges, as measured in accordance with AHRI 270 shall not exceed the following:

OCTAVE BANDS
Unit Nominal
Capacity (Tons) 63 125 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000 8,000
0 to 5 64 70 71 74 74 71 67 67
6 79 85 78 74 71 73 66 59
7-1/2 to 10 64 70 73 79 82 78 74 67
12 and larger 84 88 84 83 84 78 72 68

2. Capable of starting and cooling from 45 to 125 degrees Fahrenheit ambient outdoor air temperature and exceeding the maximum load criteria of AHRI Standard 210/240 or 340/360.

3. Heat pumps capable of starting and heating at or above 0 degrees Fahrenheit outdoor ambient air temperature.

4. Minimum cooling, Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) and Integrated Energy Efficiency Ratio (IEER), as rated in accordance with AHRI 210/240 or 340/360 for split systems and packaged units is as follows:

Equipment Type
Net Cooling Cap (British
Thermal Units per hour) EER(1) IEER(2)
Space Constrained, Air Cooled <30,000 11.7 N/A
Small Duct, High Velocity, Air Cooled <65,000 12.1 N/A
Air Cooled <65,000 13.4 N/A
Air Cooled >65,000 and <135,000 11.2 14.8
Air Cooled >135,000 and <240,000 11.0 14.2
Air Cooled >240,000 and <760,000 10.0 13.2
Air Cooled >760,000 9.7 12.5
Water Cooled <65,000 12.1 12.3
Water Cooled >65,000 and <135,000 12.1 13.9
Water Cooled >135,000 and <240,000 12.5 13.9
Water Cooled >240,000 and <760,000 12.4 13.6
Water Cooled >760,000 12.2 13.5
Evaporatively Cooled <65,000 12.1 12.3
Evaporatively Cooled >65,000 and <135,000 12.1 12.3
Evaporatively Cooled >135,000 and <240,000 12.0 12.2
Evaporatively Cooled >240,000 and <760,000 11.9 12.0
Evaporatively Cooled >760,000 11.7 11.9
Common Work Results for HVAC
15500-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15500 (DraftFinal) Equipment Type
Net Cooling Cap (British
Thermal Units per hour) EER(1) IEER(2)
(1) Deduct 0.2°from the required EER for units with a heating section other than electric resistance heat.
(2) IEER is only applicable to equipment with capacity control in accordance with AHRI 340/360.

5. Units with heating capabilities: Meet or exceed the following:
a. Annual fuel utilization efficiency: 80 percent.
b. Steady state efficiency: 80 percent.
c. Comply with CEC Title 24: Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER) minimum: 76.9 percent.

6. Energy efficiency requirements:
a. Comply with CEC Title 24.

7. Unit air flows for cooling:
a. Minimum of 300 cubic feet per minute (cfm) per ton.

8. Maximum 500 cfm per ton.

D. Filters:

1. Efficiency: 45 to 50 percent dust spot efficiency when rated in accordance with ASHRAE Test Standard 52.2.

E. Smoke detector requirements:

1. Provide all supply, exhaust, and odor control fans greater than or equal to 2,000 cubic feet per minute with smoke detectors:
a. Duct or fan mounted smoke detector as specified in Section 15936 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.

2.03 DAMPERS
A. General:

1. Damper type, style, and size as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Components: Include with each damper:
a. Type, Frame, actuators, clips, connectors, and other accessories necessary for mounting.
1) Manual actuators: Factory supplied locking quadrant on factory mounted stand-off bracket.
a) Bracket finish to match frame.
2) Electric actuators when indicated on the Drawings.

3. Leakage Class, when specified, to be in accordance with AMCA Standard 511 and product to bear AMCA Rating Seal for Air Leakage.
a. Blade seals to be mechanically attached.

4. All fire dampers and combination smoke/fire dampers to have duct access door near damper as specified in technical sections.

B. Backdraft dampers (BDD):

1. BDD-1; Style 1; counterbalanced backdraft damper:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Ruskin: Model CBD6.
2) Greenheck.

Common Work Results for HVAC
15500-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15500 (DraftFinal) b. Frame:
1) Minimum depth: 2.25 inches.
2) Minimum thickness: 0.125-inch.
3) Material: 6063T5 aluminum.
4) With insect screen and water stop.
c. Blades:
1) Minimum thickness: 0.070-inch.
2) Material: 6063T5 aluminum.
3) High strength nylon bearings.
4) Elastomer edge seals.
5) Aluminum tie-bar.
6) Blades require no more than 4.25 inches clearance beyond frame when fully open.
d. Counterbalance:
1) Zinc plated bar on blades.
2) Adjustable down to 0.01-inch wg opening.
e. Finish:
1) Mill.

2.04 DAMPER OPERATORS
A. General: Provide manual or electric damper operator for each damper furnished as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Manual operators by damper manufacturer:

1. Operate damper manually with a force not exceeding 20 pounds.

2. Provide with locking quadrant.

3. Provide 3/8 inch, or larger, square double-ended drive shaft adequate for required damper torque, with machined keyways allowing for mounting in 2 positions, 90 degrees apart.

4. Provide sufficient number of operators for torque required to operate damper.

2.05 SCREENS
A. Required on all fans and louvers unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

B. Characteristics and features:

1. Bird screen: 1/2-inch mesh by 14 gauges.
a. For exhaust applications.

2. Insect screens: 18 by 14 mesh.
a. For intake applications.

3. Screens and frames, same material as ductwork, hood, louver, fan, or equipment connected to screen.

4. Screens secured in frames.

2.06 REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Seamless copper tube:

1. Type:
a. Straight lengths: ASTM B75, USN Alloy C12200, H55 Temper. b. Coiled lengths: ASTM B280, USN Alloy C12200, O60.

Common Work Results for HVAC
15500-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15500 (DraftFinal) c. Outside diameter sized, minimum wall thickness in accordance with ASTM B280 and B75.

2. VRF-System Refrigerant Piping:
a. Entire refrigerant piping system shall be brazed connections and fittings and meet test pressures required by VRF manufacturer.

3. Non-VRF System Refrigerant Piping:
a. Solder: ASTM B32, Alloy Grade Sb5.
b. Flux: ASTM B813.

2.07 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING
A. PVC:

1. PVC Pipe: Designation PVC 1120 in accordance with ASTM D1785 and appendices:
a. Pipe and fittings: Extruded from Type I, Grade 1, Class 12454 B material in accordance with ASTM D1784.
b. PVC Pipe: Schedule 80 unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

2. Fittings:
a. Supplied by pipe manufacturer.
b. Pressure fittings: In accordance with ASTM D2466 or ASTM D2467. c. DWV fittings: In accordance with ASTM D2665.

3. Solvent cement: In accordance with ASTM D2564:
a. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
1) Primer: IPS Corp Type P-70™.
2) Cement: IPS Corp Type 724™ cement or cement certified by the manufacturer for chemical service.

2.08 PIPE INSULATION
A. General:

1. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.

2. Insulation thicknesses: Provide insulation thickness in inches in accordance with the following table. Insulation thickness shown is nominal. Manufacturing tolerance of 15 percent variation is permissible.

Table 1 - Required Insulation Thicknesses (inches)
Service Temperature Range as
Designated in Insulation
Schedule at End of this Section
Nominal Pipe Diameters
1 inch and Less 1.25 to 2 inches
100 to 200 degrees Fahrenheit 1.5 1.5
40 to 100 degrees Fahrenheit 0.5 1.0
B. Insulation, Type 1:

1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc., Aerocel® AC.
b. Armacell®, AP Armaflex.

2. Insulation material: Closed cell elastomeric insulation.

3. Minimum temperature range: Minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit to plus 220 degrees Fahrenheit.

Common Work Results for HVAC
15500-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15500 (DraftFinal)

4. K factor at 75 degrees Fahrenheit: Not more than 0.27 BTU-inch/hour-square feet-degrees Fahrenheit.

5. Fire ratings:
a. Flame spread: 25 or less.
b. Smoke density: 50 or less for insulation thicknesses up to 1.5 inches.

6. Joints: Seal with manufacturer’s recommended contact adhesive to form continuous water barrier.

C. Insulation jackets:

1. Type 1:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Johns Manville, Zeston® 2000 PVC.
2) Proto Corp., LoSMOKE PVC.
3) Speedline® Corp., Smoke-Safe™ PVC.
b. Material: Ultraviolet-resistant polyvinyl chloride jacketing, 20 mil minimum thickness.
c. Fire rating: 25 maximum flame spread, smoke developed 50 or less. d. Color: White.
e. Overlap: 1-inch minimum at joints and fittings.
f. Joint seal: PVC solvent welded or adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer.
g. Fittings: Factory made with full thickness insulation.

D. Vapor barriers:

1. Vapor barrier, Type 1:
a. Material: White Kraft paper bound to aluminum foil in accordance with ASTM C1136, Type 1.
b. Permeability: 0.02 perms or lower.
c. Maximum flame spread rating: 25.
d. Edge seal: Pressure-sensitive tape lap seal.
e. Circumferential joints: 4-inch wide tape or 4-inch overlap with adhesive seal.

2. Vapor barrier, Type 2:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Benjamin Foster, No. 30-76.
2) Childers Products CP10/11 Vi-Acryl.
3) Foster Products, 36-10/46-10 Weatherite.
4) Insul-Coustic, No. I.C.-580.
b. Material: Mastic.

E. Insulation schedule:

Table 2 - Insulation Schedule
Service
Designation(1) Location(2)
Insulation
Type Jacket Type
Service
Temp. °F(3)
Vapor
Barrier
HVAC Refrigerant Interior or
Exterior 1 1 40 - 200 Required
HVAC Condensate Interior or
Exterior 1 1 Below 60 Required
Common Work Results for HVAC
15500-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15500 (DraftFinal) Table 2 - Insulation Schedule
Service
Designation(1) Location(2)
Insulation
Type Jacket Type
Service
Temp. °F(3)
Vapor
Barrier
Notes:

1. Refer to Piping Schedule in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping for service designations.

2. Insulation jackets are not required for interior installations that are concealed. See definitions for description of concealed locations.

3. Unless noted otherwise, use service temperature range provided in this table to establish insulation thickness as required by Table 1.

2.09 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES
A. Provide a nameplate with the following markings that is plainly visible after installation:

1. Manufacturer's name, trademark, or other descriptive marking to identify specific equipment.

2. Where equipment is electrically powered:
a. Supply voltage, phase, frequency, and full-load current. b. Power source or circuit ID.
c. Short-circuit current rating based on one of the following:
1) Short-circuit current rating of a listed and labeled assembly. 2) Short-circuit current rating established utilizing an approved method.

2.10 SHIPPING, SPARE PARTS, MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS, AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.

B. Inspect fasteners for proper tightness.

C. Ship units in 1 piece (or modular, if required), factory assembled, piped, internally wired, and factory tested.

D. Provide:

1. Filters: 2 extra (3 total) sets per each unit with filters.

2. Sheaves and belts: 1 set for change-out for final balance per unit installed.

3. Belts: 1 extra set for each unit installed as determined by final balance.

E. Provide a 2-year supply of maintenance products as indicated in manufacturer's maintenance literature.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. Technical Sections execution requirements supersede conflicting requirements in this Section.

B. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.

Common Work Results for HVAC
15500-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15500 (DraftFinal) C. Inspect fasteners for proper tightness.

D. Provide temporary closures for openings designed for airflow.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Examine and verify details and sections as indicated on the Drawings, ascertain adequacy, and determine conflicts in dimensions and clearances.

1. Take measurements and verify dimensions to ascertain fit of installation.

2. Ascertain structural sufficiency to support installation.

3. Ascertain that supports and openings are correctly located; otherwise cut new openings where required.

4. Confirm specified thermostat or other controls are compatible with specified equipment.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer instructions.

1. Electrical products installation in accordance with NFPA 70 NEC.

2. If there are conflicts, NEC supersedes manufacturer's instruction. a. Notify Engineer of conflicts.

C. Equipment and ducts:

1. Remove dust and debris before installation.

2. Protect from dust and debris by covering openings with tape or plastic during installation and until equipment is operated.

3. Adjust alignment of ducts to resolve conflicts with the work of other trades.

4. Install and wire unitary air conditioners, controls, and thermostats in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

5. Provide flexible duct and flexible piping connections at connections to unitary air conditioners.
a. FL-1 and FL-2, Flexible Connections:
1) Install at building expansion joints and as indicated on the Drawings. 2) Install with collar and metal band to form airtight joints. 3) Install with minimum 4 inches of slack in fabric.
4) Install with minimum 3 inches of specified material on each side of fabric.
5) Exterior locations: Install sheet metal weather cover over fabric. 6) Duct alignment shall be a maximum of 1/2-inch offset. 7) The minimum/maximum gap shall be 2-inches and 6-inches. 8) Lap longitudinal joints and glue per manufacturer’s
recommendations.

6. Lubrication lines and fittings:
a. Support and protect lines from source to point of use. b. Fittings:
1) Bring to outside of equipment in manner such that fittings are readily accessible from outside without necessity of removing covers, plates, housings, or guards.
2) Mount together wherever possible using factory-mounted multiple fitting assemblies securely mounted, parallel with equipment lines, and protected from damage.

7. Concrete surfaces designated to receive non-shrink grout under equipment:
a. Heavy sandblast concrete surface in contact with non-shrink grout.

Common Work Results for HVAC
15500-12 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15500 (DraftFinal) b. Clean concrete surfaces of sandblasting sand, grease, oil, dirt, and other foreign material that may reduce bond to non-shrink grout. c. Saturate concrete with water. Concrete shall be saturated surface damp at time non-shrink grout is placed.

8. Remove dust and debris from ductwork and equipment at completion of installation.

9. Set grilles, dampers, and diffusers to achieve flows and flow patterns indicated on the Drawings.

D. Refrigerant piping:

1. Support copper tubing as specified in Sections 15061 - Pipe Supports and 15062 - Preformed Channel Pipe Support System.

2. Clean copper lines with high-pressure air after first disconnecting piping at instruments, filters, pressure reducers, valve operators, and other special devices.

3. Installation of copper tubing:
a. Install copper tubing in accordance with ASTM B828 and IAPMO IS 3. b. Install copper tubing in straight runs, supported at intervals close enough to avoid sagging.
c. Make cuts square with a tubing cutter or with a 32-tooth hacksaw. 1) Provide a sizing tool to correct distortions.

4. Ream the inside of the tubing and remove burrs from the outside, holding the end of the tubing downward and preventing chips and fillings from entering the tubing.

5. Perform flaring with a flare block and yoke type screw feed flaring tool:
a. After removing the tubing from the flare block, inspect both surfaces of the flare for splits, cracks, or other imperfections.
b. Where there are imperfections, cut off the imperfect flare and prepare a new flare.

6. Insulate piping as specified in Sections 15400 - Plumbing systems.

E. Gas, water piping, drains, and venting in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction and applicable codes.

F. Roof curbs: Install in accordance with NRCA Manual.

G. Completed equipment installations must have confirmation that:

1. The equipment is properly assembled.

2. The equipment moves or rotates in the proper direction.

3. Shafting, drive elements, and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances.

4. No unusual power consumption, lubrication temperatures, bearing temperatures, or other conditions are observed.

5. The installation meets the requirements for intended use as well as the specified vibration and noise tolerances.

END OF SECTION
VRF Heat Pumps
15739-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15739 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15739

VRF HEAT PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. VRF Heat Pump and Heat Recovery Systems.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI):

1. 210-240 - Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment.

2. 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.

3. 1230 - Performance Rating of Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) Multi-Split Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment.

B. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA):

1. 210 - Laboratory Methods for Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating.

C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):

1. 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems.

2. 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size.

D. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (FOG) Apparatus.

E. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):

1. 9277 - Determination of the Specific Surface Area of Solids by Gas Adsorption — BET Method.

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

2. 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

G. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA).

H. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Roof coordination.

1. As specified in Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC.

VRF Heat Pumps
15739-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15739 (DraftFinal)

1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

B. Anchoring and bracing.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Design features.

2. Load capacities.

3. Efficiency ratings.

4. Dimensions.

5. Weight.

6. Shipping and operating.

7. Manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and installation.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Component layout and identification.

2. Views:
a. Front, side, rear elevations, and top and bottom views, with dimensions. b. Connection locations including electrical, mechanical, and other.

3. Cut away drawings.
a. Parts list.
b. Material specification lists.

4. Wiring, control schematics, control logic diagrams and ladder logic or similar for computer-based controls.

5. Refrigerant piping diagram with pipe diameters, lengths, and refrigerant volume.

6. Details for supports, isolators, and bracing.

7. Nameplate data.

D. Calculations:

1. Structural: Supports, vibration isolators, and seismic bracing calculations, if applicable.

E. Delegated Design Submittals:

1. Anchoring and bracing: Provide project-specific calculations based on support conditions and requirements to resist loads specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.
a. To structures for equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F.
b. For equipment installed outdoors.

F. Engineering data:

1. Manufacturer's published data for compressor, evaporator coil, condenser, evaporator fan, refrigerant, filter, etc.

2. Maximum equipment vibration levels and field-testing method.

3. Sound power level in each of 8 octave bands and overall sones.

VRF Heat Pumps
15739-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15739 (DraftFinal)

4. Fan performance curves showing specified operating condition.

5. Bearing life.

G. Vendor operation and maintenance manuals: Manufacturer's standard instruction manual for operation and maintenance.

1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty as specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

B. Special warranty:

1. Refrigerant compressors and closed or sealed refrigerant systems warranty duration: Provide 5-year warranty.

2. Evaporator and condensing coils warranty duration: Provide 10-year warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. As specified in Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC.

B. Supplied components of the unit shall be furnished and fully integrated by the unit system supplier:

1. Furnish and install piping, valves, dampers, sensors, and wiring within the unit package.

2. Provide a prewired, unit mounted control panel to dampers and sensors within the unit.

C. Motors:

1. Totally enclosed.

2. Voltage and number of phases as scheduled.

3. Compressor motors:
a. Cooled by refrigerant gas passing through windings.
b. Provided with line break thermal and current overload protection.

4. Fan and blower motors:
a. Permanently lubricated ball bearings.
b. Integral automatic reset thermal overload protection.

D. Electrical:

1. Provide a single conduit connection in the unit for both power and control wiring.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Design requirements:

1. Seismic supports: Design supports to comply with the criteria specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

2. Wind supports: Design supports to comply with the criteria specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

3. Control sequences of operations: As specified in Section 15936 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.

VRF Heat Pumps
15739-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15739 (DraftFinal)

4. Electrical components: UL listed and meeting the design and installation requirements of the NEC.

5. Water piping, drains, and venting: In accordance with building code, mechanical code, and plumbing code as specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements and in accordance with NFPA 90A.

6. Fans supplied with heat pump units: Rated in accordance with AMCA 210.

7. Unit heat pumps: Rated in accordance with AHRI Standards 210-240 and AHRI 270 and in accordance with the latest version of ASHRAE 15.

8. Roof curbs: Designed in accordance with NRCA standards.

9. Insulation and adhesives: In accordance with NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke generation.

10. Refrigerant: HCFC R-410A.

B. Performance requirements:

1. Performance requirements as specified and as scheduled on the VRF Heat Systems Schedule indicated on the Drawings.

2. Maximum nominal sound pressure shall be as shown and measured in accordance with AHRI Standard 270:

Capacity (MBH) Sound Pressure Level dB(A)
72 57
96 60
120 60
144 60
168 62
192 62
216 63
240 63
264 64
288 64
312 64
336 65
360 65

3. Air filters: 25 to 30 percent efficiency when rated in accordance with ASHRAE Tested Standard 52.2.

4. Capable of starting and providing cooling from 45 to 125 degrees Fahrenheit ambient outdoor air temperature and exceeding the maximum load criteria of AHRI Standards 210-240.

5. Capable of starting and providing heating at or above -10 degrees Fahrenheit outdoor ambient air temperature.

6. Minimum energy efficiency ratios IEER, EER, COP values for systems sized 300 MBH and smaller shall be certified to AHRI Standard 1230. Systems sized larger than 300 MBH shall be rated to AHRI Standard 1230. System shall meet the efficiencies in the tables below.

VRF Heat Pumps
15739-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15739 (DraftFinal) Capacity
(MBH)
System IEER*
(part load - ducted)
System IEER*
(part load - non-ducted)
System IEER*
(part load - mixed)
72 21.5 25.8 23.7
96 18.8 23.0 20.9
120 17.2 20.4 18.8
144 22.1 21.5 21.8
168 20.2 22.0 21.1
192 19.1 19.9 19.5
216 19.5 19.2 19.4
240 16.1 18.2 17.2
264 19.1 20.8 20.0
288 18.8 19.6 19.2
312 17.0 18.2 17.6
336 16.1 15.9 16.0
360 15.3 15.1 15.2
Capacity
(MBH)
System EER*
(full load - ducted)
System EER*
(full load - non-ducted)
System EER*
(full load - mixed)
72 12.8 14.1 13.4
96 12.5 13.5 13.0
120 11.9 12.5 12.2
144 12.7 14.0 13.4
168 12.1 12.4 12.3
192 11.8 11.7 11.8
216 11.7 11.6 11.7
240 11.6 11.5 11.6
264 11.7 11.3 11.5
288 10.5 11.5 11.0
312 11.5 10.7 11.1
336 10.7 10.8 10.8
360 10.8 9.8 10.3
Capacity
(MBH)
System COP@47F*
(full load - ducted)
System COP@47F*
(full load - non-ducted)
System COP@47F*
(full load - mixed)
72 3.71 4.00 3.86
96 3.65 4.20 3.93
120 3.63 3.80 3.72
144 3.70 3.90 3.80
168 3.70 3.95 3.83
VRF Heat Pumps
15739-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15739 (DraftFinal) Capacity
(MBH)
System COP@47F*
(full load - ducted)
System COP@47F*
(full load - non-ducted)
System COP@47F*
(full load - mixed)
192 3.55 3.70 3.63
216 3.60 3.80 3.70
240 3.50 3.60 3.55
264 3.50 3.50 3.50
288 3.45 3.50 3.48
312 3.30 3.30 3.30
336 3.45 3.45 3.45
360 3.20 3.45 3.33
Capacity
(MBH)
System COP@17F*
(full load - ducted)
System COP@17F*
(full load - non-ducted)
System COP@17F*
(full load - mixed)
72 2.40 2.65 2.53
96 2.50 2.85 2.68
120 2.50 2.65 2.58
144 2.45 2.55 2.50
168 2.45 2.65 2.55
192 2.45 2.55 2.50
216 2.45 2.60 2.53
240 2.35 2.55 2.45
264 2.30 2.45 2.38
288 2.45 2.45 2.45
312 2.35 2.35 2.35
336 2.35 2.35 2.35
360 2.30 2.40 2.35

2.03 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM
A. System description:

1. Variable capacity, heat pump, air conditioning system shall be a variable refrigerant flow (VRF) (heat and cool model) split system as specified. a. System shall consist of multiple evaporators, piping joints and headers, a refrigeration distribution system using PID control and a VRF outdoor unit. b. Outdoor unit is a direct expansion (DX), air-cooled heat pump, multi-zone air-conditioning system with variable speed inverter driven compressors using HCFC R-410A refrigerant.
c. Zones are each capable of operating separately with individual temperature control.

2. Outdoor unit(s) shall be interconnected to indoor unit models. a. Indoor units shall be connected to the outdoor utilizing specified piping joints and headers.

VRF Heat Pumps
15739-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15739 (DraftFinal) b. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be independently controlled.

3. Operation of the system shall permit cooling or heating of each indoor unit.

Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be able to provide set temperature independently via a local remote controller, a centralized controller, or a BMS interface.

4. Controls as specified in Section 15936 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.

B. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal:

1. Daikin VRV®.

2. Mitsubishi.

3. Samsung.

C. Refrigerant piping:

1. Provide piping as specified in Section 15500 - Common Works for HVAC.

2. Modular systems shall require outdoor refrigerant kits for module connection provided by the manufacturer.

3. Between indoor and outdoor units shall be sized and installed by manufacturer factory trained service professional.

4. Insulate as specified in Section 15500 - Common Works for HVAC.

D. Indoor/evaporator units:

1. General: Factory assembled and tested DX fan-coil units, with electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, factory wiring and piping, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay and test run switch.

2. Recessed ceiling units:
a. Ceiling cassette with central return air grille, for installation in lay-in ceiling grid.
1) Type: 4-way 24x24.
2) Exposed housing: White, impact resistant, with washable decoration panel.
3) Return air filter: As indicated on the Drawings.
4) Minimum capacity: As indicated on the Drawings.
5) Condensate pump: Built-in with minimum lift of:
a) 19 inches for 2-foot by 2-foot units.
b. Ventilation air option: As indicated on the Drawings. c. Air discharge: Provided with vane control and swing mode.

3. Refrigerant circuit factory-charged with dehydrated air, for field charging.

4. Evaporator coils:
a. Nonferrous construction with fins on copper tubing.
b. Tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. c. Braze tube joints with phos-copper or silver alloy. Factory tested.

5. Fans:
a. Direct-drive with statically and dynamically balanced impellers. b. High and low speeds unless otherwise indicated; motor thermally protected. c. Bearings shall be permanently sealed ball bearing type and permanently lubricated.

VRF Heat Pumps
15739-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15739 (DraftFinal)

6. Condensate drainage: Built-in condensate drain pan with PVC drain connection. a. Units with built-in condensate pumps: Provide condensate safety shut-off and alarm.
b. Units without built-in condensate pumps: Provide manufacturer recommended external condensate pump, minimum 10 feet of head. 1) See Drawings for required flow rate.
2) Provide with built-in condensate float switch and wiring connections for condensate safety shut-off and alarm.

7. Control: As specified in Section 15936 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC and below:
a. Temperature Control Mechanism: Return air thermistor and computerized Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) control of superheat. b. Unit shall have controls provided by the manufacturer to perform input functions necessary to operate the system.
c. Unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via optional LonWorks or BACnet gateways.
d. Unit shall be compatible with the VRF System primary controller.

E. Outdoor/condensing units:

1. General: Air-cooled DX refrigeration units, designed specifically for use with indoor/evaporator units; factory assembled and wired with necessary electronics and refrigerant controls; modular design for ganging multiple units. a. Refrigerant circuit: Scroll compressors, motors, fans, condenser coil, electronic expansion valves, solenoid valves, 4-way valve, distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shut-off valves, oil separators, service ports, and refrigerant regulator.
b. Refrigerant: Factory charged.
c. Variable flow control: Modulate compressor capacity automatically to maintain constant suction and condensing pressure while varying refrigerant flow to suit heating/cooling loads.
d. Capable of heating operation at low end of operating range as specified, without additional low ambient controls or auxiliary heat source; during heating operation, reverse cycle (cooling mode) oil return is not permitted due to potential reduction in space temperature.
e. Power failure mode: Automatically restart operation after power failure without loss of programmed settings.
f. Provide refrigerant auto-charging and refrigerant charge check functions. g. Safety devices: High pressure safety switch, over-current protection, crankcase heater.
h. Provide refrigerant sub-cooling to ensure the liquid refrigerant does not flash when supplying indoor units.
i. Defrost mode: Unit shall be capable of continuous heating function during defrost of separate coil circuits.

2. Unit cabinet:
a. Weatherproof and saltwater corrosion resistant; rustproofed mild steel panels coated with baked enamel finish.
b. Designed to allow side-by-side installation with minimum spacing.

3. Fans:
a. One or more direct-drive propeller type, vertical discharge, with multiple speed operation via DC (Digitally Commutated) inverter.

VRF Heat Pumps
15739-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15739 (DraftFinal) b. External static pressure:
1) Factory set at 0.12-inch WG, minimum.
2) External Static Pressure capability dependent upon type of unit. c. Fan motors: Factory installed; permanently lubricated bearings; inherent protection; fan guard; output as indicated for specific equipment.

4. Condenser coils:
a. Outdoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate fins on copper tubing.
b. Provide corrosion resistant coating to withstand ASTM B117 salt spray test for a minimum of 2,500 hours or ISO 9277 salt spray test for minimum of 960 hours.

5. Compressors:
a. Inverter driven scroll hermetic type to modulate capacity. b. Variable speed control: Capable of changing the speed to follow the variations in total cooling and heating load as determined by the suction gas pressure; high/low pressure calculated by samplings of evaporators and condenser temperatures every 20 seconds, with compressor capacity adjusted to eliminate deviation from target value by changing inverter frequency or on/off setting of fixed speed compressors. c. Multiple condenser modules: Balance total operation hours of compressors by means of duty cycling function, providing for sequential starting of each module at each start/stop cycle, completion of oil return and completion of defrost, or every 8 hours.
d. Failure mode: In the event of compressor failure, operate remaining compressor(s) at proportionally reduced capacity; provide microprocessor and associated controls specifically designed to address this condition. e. Inverter driven compressors: PWM inverter driven, highly efficiency reluctance DC (Digitally Commutated), hermetically sealed scroll. f. Provide each compressor with crankcase heater, high pressure safety switch and internal thermal overload protector.
g. Provide oil separators and intelligent oil management system. h. Provide spring mounted vibration isolators.

F. Controls and equipment safety features:

1. Advanced zoning: A single system shall be capable of providing for up to 50 zones.

2. Each system shall have a refrigerant auto-charging function.

3. Oil return heating: Each system shall maintain continuous heating during oil return operation. Reverse cycle (cooling mode) oil return during heating operation shall not be permitted due to the potential reduction in space temperature.

4. Each indoor unit shall use a dedicated electronic expansion valve for independent control.

5. VFD inverter control: Each condensing unit shall use a high efficiency, variable speed inverter compressor coupled with inverter fan motors for superior part load performance.

6. Compressor capacity shall be modulated automatically to maintain constant suction and condensing pressures while varying the refrigerant volume for the needs of the cooling or heating loads.

7. Systems shall be capable of up to 540 feet of linear piping between the condensing unit and furthest located indoor unit.

VRF Heat Pumps
15739-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15739 (DraftFinal)

8. Systems shall have a vertical (height) separation of up to 160 feet between the condensing unit and the indoor units.

9. Systems shall be capable of 50 feet between indoor units.

10. Condensing units shall be supported with a fan motor ESP up to 0.30 inches WG as standard to allow connection of discharge ductwork and to prevent discharge air short circuiting.

11. Simple wiring: Systems shall use 2 wire, multi-stranded, non-shielded, and non-polarized daisy chain control wiring.

12. Systems shall provide outside air capability, when required.

13. Advanced controls: Each system shall have at least 1 remote controller capable of controlling up to 16 indoor units.

14. Provide outdoor units with corrosion resistant coating to withstand ASTM B117 or ISO 9277 salt spray test.

15. Hail guard: Outdoor units shall be provided with a manufacturer supplied snow/hail guard, providing protection from hail damage and projectiles in severe climates.

16. Unit defrost:
a. Unit must defrost all circuits simultaneously in order to resume full heating more quickly.
b. Partial defrost which may extend “no or reduced heating” periods shall not be allowed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect components for shipping damage, conformance to specifications, and proper torques and tightness of fasteners, as specified in Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC.

B. Examine and verify that Work is in condition to receive installation specified in this Section.

1. Take measurements and verify dimensions to ascertain fit of installation.

2. Ascertain structural sufficiency to support installation.

3. Ascertain that supports and openings are correctly located; otherwise cut new openings where required.
a. Submit details of proposed cutting and patching.

4. Confirm specified thermostat or other controls are compatible with specified equipment.

C. Examine and verify structural details and sections indicated on the Drawings, ascertain adequacy, and determine conflicts in dimensions and clearances.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, remove dust and debris from equipment and ducts.

B. During installation and until equipment is operated, protect equipment and ducts from dust and debris by covering openings.

VRF Heat Pumps
15739-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15739 (DraftFinal) C. Anchoring and bracing to structures:

1. Prepare equipment anchor setting template(s) and use to position anchors during construction of supporting structure(s).

2. Install anchors of type and material indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3. Install anchors with embedment indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details.

B. Adjust alignment of ducts where necessary to resolve conflicts with architectural features or to resolve conflicts with the work of other trades.

C. Install outdoor units on a solid longitudinal foundation (steel beam frame, rail curb, or concrete) as recommended by unit manufacturer.

D. Upon completion of installation, remove debris from ductwork and equipment and clean ducts.

3.04 SCHEDULES
A. As indicated on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Heating Units
15762-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15762 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15762

HEATING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Requirements for electric, gas fired, steam, hot water unit heaters and thermostats for heaters.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Gas Association (AGA).

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).

C. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Roof coordination as specified in Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC.

1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

B. Anchoring and bracing.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Catalog cuts, bulletins, and brochures:

1. Design features.

2. Load capacities.

3. Efficiency ratings.

4. Dimensions.

5. Weight: Shipping and operating.

C. Drawings:

1. Component layout and identification.

2. Views:
a. Front, side, rear elevations, and top and bottom views, with dimensions. b. Connection locations including electrical, mechanical, and other.

3. Cut away drawings:
a. Parts list.
b. Material specification lists.

Heating Units
15762-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15762 (DraftFinal)

4. Wiring, control schematics, control logic diagrams and ladder logic or similar for computer-based controls.

5. Details for supports, isolators, and bracing.

D. Delegated Design Submittals:

E. Engineering data:

1. Manufacturer's published data for fan, burner, and filter.

2. Maximum equipment vibration levels and field-testing method.

3. Sound power level in each of 8 octave bands and overall Sones.

4. Fan performance curves showing specified operating condition.

5. Bearing life.

F. Manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and installation.

G. Nameplate data.

H. Seismic certification.

I. Vendor operation and maintenance manuals: Manufacturer's standard instruction manual for operation and maintenance.

1.06 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2 with additional requirements in Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. As specified in Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC.

B. Provide instrumentation and controls to meet the equipment operating requirements as specified in Section 15936 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.

2.03 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER (EUH)
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Indeeco, Type TRIAD.

2. Trane.

Heating Units
15762-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15762 (DraftFinal)

3. Markel.

4. Chromalox.

B. Fan type: Aluminum axial flow:

1. Provide fan guards.

2. Dynamically balance.

3. Fan designed for quiet operation.

4. Permanently lubricated ball bearings.

5. Automatic reset thermal overload protection.

C. Heating element characteristics:

1. Rated capacity at entering air temperature of 65 degrees Fahrenheit.

2. Fin type, Type 316 stainless steel plated heater elements, with elements brazed to common fins, designed for maximum strength and maximum heat transfer.

3. 3-phase designed for balanced phases.

4. Over temperature cutout with automatic reset.

D. Features:

1. Built-in magnetic contactors.

2. Control transformer for 24-volt or 120-volt control as indicated in the Heating Unit Schedules.

3. Required mounting brackets.

4. Individually adjustable outlet louvers.

5. Heavy 16 gauge stainless steel louvered outlet grille and plated rear grille.

6. Cabinet formed of minimum thickness 18-gauge steel with steel stiffeners.

Listed for corrosive areas and NEMA 4X hose down requirements.

7. Controls:
a. Provide thermostat as specified in this Section.
b. Provide control transformer suitable for 24-volt or 120-volt control as indicated in the Heating Unit Schedules.

E. Finishes:

1. Casing finish backed enamel in manufacturer's standard color.

2.04 THERMOSTATS FOR UNIT HEATERS
A. Type: Wall mounted, heat only with fan AUTO-ON selector switch when fan part of unit and separate system ON-OFF selector switch.

B. Dial or lever temperature setpoint adjustment with 45 to 90 degrees Fahrenheit setpoint range.

C. Setpoint and temperature indication.

D. Control voltage as indicated in the Heating Unit Schedules.

E. The use of mercury within the thermostat is not acceptable.

F. Bi-metallic contacts suitable for 1- or 2-stage unit heater control as specified for the heater size or as scheduled.

Heating Units
15762-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15762 (DraftFinal)

2.05 SHIPPING, SPARE PARTS, MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS, AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2, with additional requirements in Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. As specified in Section the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2, with additional requirements in Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Anchoring and bracing to structures:

1. Prepare equipment anchor setting template(s) and use to position anchors during construction of supporting structure(s).

2. Install anchors of type and material indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3. Install anchors with embedment indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details.

3.04 TESTING
A. Test equipment performance and balance equipment as specified in Section 15954 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify equipment operation is within manufacturer's standards and that noise levels do not exceed levels specified.

3.06 SCHEDULES
A. As indicated on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION
Fans
15830-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15830 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15830
FANS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Fans, motors, and accessories.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations:

1. As used in this Section and on the Drawings, abbreviations and Fan Schedule headings have the following meaning:
a. EF or EXF: Exhaust Fan.
b. Hp: Fan motor horsepower.
c. SF or SPF: Supply Fan.
d. Size: Nominal fan blade or wheel diameter in inches. e. SP or ESP: Fan External Static Pressure in inches water column. f. Type: Fan type as specified in this Section.
g. V/Ph: Fan motor voltage and power phases.

B. Standards:

1. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA).

2. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):
a. 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. b. 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

3. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished.
b. D4167 - Standard Specification for Fiber Reinforced Plastic Fans and Blowers.
c. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 820 - Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities.

5. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA).

6. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Roof coordination as specified in Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC.

Fans
15830-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15830 (DraftFinal)

1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

B. Anchoring and bracing.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Materials.

2. Primary and ancillary equipment.

3. Sound Power Level in each of 8 octave bands and overall Sones.

4. Fan system layout, mechanical, electrical power, and control diagrams.

5. Supports, vibration isolators, and seismic bracing calculations and details.

6. Calculated fan vibration levels and field-testing method.

7. Bearing life.

8. Fan performance curves showing specified operating condition.

C. Drawings:

1. Component layout and identification.

2. Views:
a. Front, side, rear elevations, and top and bottom views, with dimensions. b. Connection locations including electrical, mechanical, and other.

3. Cut away drawings.
a. Parts list.
b. Material specification lists.

4. Wiring, control schematics, control logic diagrams and ladder logic or similar for computer-based controls.

5. Details for supports, isolators, and bracing.

D. Delegated Design Submittals:

E. Manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and installation.

F. Nameplate data.

G. Vendor operation and maintenance manuals: Manufacturer's standard instruction manual for operation and maintenance.

H. Provide manufacturers reports on factory testing.

Fans
15830-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15830 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. As specified in Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide instrumentation and controls to meet the equipment operating requirements as specified in Section 15936 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.

B. Roof curb:

1. Factory fabricated to match fan material.

2. Capable of supporting entire unit weight.

3. Suitable for installing and connecting ductwork to curb.

4. In accordance with NRCA Standards.

5. Extend a minimum of 8 inches above top of built up roofing.

6. Curb shall be a minimum height of 12 inches.

7. Flashing: In accordance with NRCA Standards and roof manufacturer.

2.03 TYPE 4, SIDEWALL PROPELLER FANS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Greenheck, Model SBE, or SBS.

2. Loren Cook, similar series.

3. Penn Ventilator, similar model.

B. Characteristics:

1. Wall-mounted, low noise propeller type, packaged unit.

2. Fan: Statically and dynamically balanced propeller with aluminum blades, unless noted otherwise.

3. Motor: Permanently lubricated; selected to avoid running in the service factor.

4. Finishes: Provide 2 coat finish with a 2.0 to 3.0 mils thick epoxy primer base coat and 2.0 to 3.0 mils thick polyester powder coated topcoat or approved equal finish on fan and accessories.

C. Accessories:

1. Mounting brackets: Necessary for installation.

2. Motor and fan side OSHA guards.

3. Wall mount collar when necessary for.

4. Dampers with damper guards when damper scheduled.

5. Weather hood when scheduled.

6. Provide other accessories as scheduled.

2.04 TYPE 5, CENTRIFUGAL CEILING EXHAUST FANS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Greenheck, Model SP, CSP.

2. Loren Cook, similar series.

3. Penn, similar series.

Fans
15830-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15830 (DraftFinal) B. Characteristics:

1. Type: Cabinet type centrifugal fan.

2. Fan: Steel, forward-curved, squirrel-cage type wheel.

3. Housing: Heavy gauge carbon steel housing.

4. Access: Removable access panel.

5. Finish: Galvanized fan, housing, and damper.

C. Accessories:

1. Exhaust grille, egg-crate pattern, aluminum, or PVC construction.

2. Factory installed backdraft damper on discharge of fan.

3. Provide other accessories as scheduled.

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test fans listed on the Fan Schedule for proper operation, performance, and electrical controls.

2.06 SHIPPING, SPARE PARTS, MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS, AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2, with additional requirements in Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC.

B. Deliver units in 1 piece, factory assembled, internally wired, and lubricated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2, with additional requirements in Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Anchoring and bracing to structures:

1. Prepare equipment anchor setting template(s) and use to position anchors during construction of supporting structure(s).

2. Install anchors of type and material indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3. Install anchors with embedment indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details.

3.04 TESTING
A. Test equipment performance and balance equipment as specified in Section 15954 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.

Fans
15830-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15830 (DraftFinal)

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify equipment operation and unit vibration is within manufacturer's submitted maximum.

3.06 SCHEDULES
A. As indicated on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC
15936-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15936 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15936

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Controls for Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Systems.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. California Code of Regulations (CCR):

1. Title 24 - Building Standard Code.

B. CSA International (CSA).

C. National Electrical Code (NEC).

D. Restriction of Certain Hazardous Substances (RoHS).

E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

G. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. 13 – Standard for Safety Power-Limited Circuit Cables.

2. 268A - Standard for Smoke Detectors for Duct Application.

3. 508 - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.

4. 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.

5. 1685 – Standard for Safety Vertical-Tray Fire-Propagation and Smoke-Release Test for Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data: As specified in Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC.

C. Shop drawings:

1. Manufacturer's information including:
a. Catalog information clearly marked to show specific products, models, and sizes being furnished.
b. Component cut sheets.

2. Control diagrams showing the interconnection of control components including wiring terminal strip diagrams.

Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC
15936-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15936 (DraftFinal)

3. Detail drawings showing control panel layout and dimensions including control panel terminal strips for wiring to outside control devices and panels.

4. Provide certification that components and systems meet CCR Title 24 and are approved by the California Energy Commission.

D. Provide vendor operation and maintenance manual as specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

E. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The control system shall be designed in accordance with UL and CSA standards.

B. Regulatory requirements: In accordance with CCR Title 24.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The system control products shall be stored and handled per manufacturer's recommendations.

1.06 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Elevation and ambient conditions as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. Special warranties: Warranty period begins at date of Project Acceptance or first date of Beneficial Use by the Owner:

1. 1 year: Parts and on-site labor for components, systems, and programming.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. General requirements:

1. All electrical components shall be UL-listed and meet the design and installation requirements of the NEC.

2. Complete, functional system: Provide all necessary electrical power and control systems, components, and wiring to make a complete functioning system.

3. Comply with electrical Sections for electrical power and control systems.

4. System control functions to perform as described in Products.

5. Materials: New, free from defects, and of the quality specified.

6. Common manufacturer: Provide components, component accessories, and devices, as much as possible, by the same manufacturer throughout the work.

7. Mounting: Mount control components and devices in accessible locations for maintenance and as recommended by the manufacturer; provide necessary Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC
15936-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15936 (DraftFinal) manufacturer-approved mounting and configuration hardware for mounting and operation of control components and devices.

8. Components and systems must in accordance with CCR Title 24 energy conservation regulations and be listed with the California Energy Commission as approved for sale in California.

B. Fire detection system design requirements:

1. Provide all supply and exhaust fans greater than 2,000 cubic feet per minute with a smoke control system including the following minimum components. a. Fan and air handling unit interlocks interlock to shut down upon smoke detection signal from fire alarm control panel.
b. Field wiring terminal blocks for connection of shut down signals from local fire alarm control panel.

2.02 VRF SYSTEM WALL MOUNTED THERMOSTAT CONTROLLER
A. Each indoor/evaporator unit shall be supplied with a wall mounted thermostat controller. The controller shall have a backlit LCD display and be able to support the following display items and user input operations:

1. On/Off control.

2. Manual change of mode of operation.

3. Set-point adjustment.

4. Reading of both heating and cooling set-point temp.

5. Reading of actual room temp.

6. Fan speed setting.

7. Mode of operation on the unit display.

8. Individual heating and cooling (dual) set-point adjustment.

B. The controllers shall be capable of diagnostic use and provide malfunction codes to indicate the type of failure that has occurred. The user shall be able to read superheat temperatures, return air and discharge air temperature values directly from the wall mounted thermostats.

C. The controllers shall be capable of accepting independent set-points for cooling and heating operation. The use of a common set-point is not allowable.

D. The system shall provide automatic changeover from heating to cooling mode of operation. If, in heating mode, the space temperature rises 1 degree above the cooling set-point, the system shall change from heating to cooling mode. If, in cooling mode, the space falls 1 degree below the heating set-point, the system shall change from cooling to heating mode. Auto-change-over is required for all systems (heat pump and heat recovery). If not available in heat pump system, then manufacturer must provide system capable of meeting this requirement.

E. Adjustable setback temperature - The controllers shall allow for independent and adjustable setback temperature at each unit. The setback temperature (adjustable) shall determine the "override" temperature to start the system when in setback mode if the temperature rises or falls outside of the specified range.

F. Manufacturers: The following or equal:

1. Daikin: Model BRC1E73.

Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC
15936-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15936 (DraftFinal)

2. Mitsubishi: Similar Model.

3. Samsung: Similar Model.

2.03 THERMOSTATS
A. General:

1. Thermostat types: Thermostat types are called out on the drawings by the letter T followed by a number; this designation refers to the specified thermostat types specified in this Section; where no type is called out, provide 1 of the specified types that will match the controlled equipment requirements and provide a functioning system.

2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Johnson Controls, model as specified with each type. b. Honeywell, Tradeline, equivalent models.

3. Thermostat cable:
a. Conductor: Number of conductors required to be determined by HVAC system, solid bare copper, 18/20 American Wire Gauge (up to 250 feet); provide sufficient length to accommodate the thermostat locations as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Insulation: Heat and moisture resistant colored Polyvinylchloride (PVC) or Polypropylene insulation.

Thermostat Terminal Wire Color (Typical) Function Description R Red 24V AC/Heat Single Transformer
Rc Red 24V for Dual Transformer - AC
Rh Red 24V for Dual Transformer - Heat
C Black/Blue Common 24VAC Power Source
Y Yellow Primary Cooling
Y2 Light Blue/Yellow Secondary Cooling
W White Primary Heating
W2 Brown Secondary Heating
G Green Fan Relay
O Orange Reversing Valve
c. Jacket: White or Brown Polyvinylchloride.
d. In accordance with:
1) UL 13 in accordance with NEC Article 725.
2) UL Listed Type CL2, Sunlight Resistant.
3) UL 1685 Vertical Tray. RoHS compliant.
e. Temperature Rating: 140 degrees Fahrenheit.
f. Voltage Rating: Up to 150V.

Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC
15936-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15936 (DraftFinal) B. T-2, Type 2 Thermostat, Cooling Only, Line Voltage:

1. Manufacturers: The following or equal: Johnson Controls Model:
a. Dry locations (no hose bibs or open water processes in room): Model A19BBC-2C in NEMA 1 enclosure.
b. Wet locations (hose bibs or open water processes in room): Model A19QSC-1C in rain and dusttight enclosure.

2. Switch action: Single-pole double-throw, close on rising temperature.

3. Sensing element: Coiled bulb and capillary.

4. Setpoint: 30 to 110 degrees Fahrenheit with knob adjuster and visible scale.

5. Electrical ratings: 16 amps alternating current at 120 volts, 9.2 amps alternating current at 208 volts.

6. Differential range: For dry locations, 3 to 12 degrees Fahrenheit adjustable; for wet locations, 5 degrees Fahrenheit fixed.

2.04 RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR (RTD) TYPE TEMPERATURE

TRANSMITTER
A. Manufacturers: The following or equal:

1. Omega Engineering, Model EWSA-PT100-TX.

2. Greyston Energy Systems Inc., Model TDHRBF12XA002.

B. Characteristics and features:

1. Sensor: Platinum RTD 100 ohm or 1000 ohm.

2. Power supply: 10 to 30 Vdc, loop powered.

3. Probe sensing range: 32 to 158 degrees Fahrenheit.

4. Output signal: 4-20 mA.

5. Transmitter accuracy: Within 0.1 percent of span.

6. Enclosure:
a. NEMA 4X (IP65) for non-hazardous areas.
b. NEMA 7 for hazardous areas.

7. Wiring connection: Screw terminal block, 2-wire.

2.05 HVAC CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
A. General: Provide control systems that will maintain room or area comfort under changing ambient conditions and varying use; descriptions in this Section are general in nature and do not cover every mode of operation.

B. Chemical Room Control Sequences:

1. Exhaust Fan WD37-FANx-13302/WD37-FANx-19302 will run continuously to provide 6 ACH to the space.
a. WD37-FANx-13302/WD37-FANx-19302 will be hardwired to a break-glass emergency shutdown switch. Upon switch activation, the supply fan will de-energize.
b. WD37-FANx-13302/WD37-FANx-19302 will send a “General HVAC Fault” alarm to the SCADA system upon unit de-energizing.

2. Electric Unit Heater WD37-HEAT-13203/WD37-HEAT-19203 will be controlled by a thermostat with an adjustable set-point. The heating set-point will be 55 degrees Fahrenheit. When the temperature falls 3 degrees below the set-point, the unit will energize. When the temperature rises 3 degrees above the set-point, the unit will de-energize.

Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC
15936-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15936 (DraftFinal) C. Pump Room Control Sequences:

1. Exhaust Fan WD37-FANx-13301/Exhaust Fan WD37-FANx-19301 will be controlled by a thermostat with an adjustable set-point. The cooling set-point will be 80 degrees Fahrenheit. When the temperature rises 3 degrees above the set-point, the unit will energize. When the temperature falls 3 degrees below the set-point, the unit will de-energize.

2. Electric Unit Heaters WD37-HEAT-13201/WD37-HEAT-19201 and WD37-HEAT-13202/WD37-HEAT-19202 will be controlled by thermostats with an adjustable set-point. The heating set-point will be 55 degrees Fahrenheit.

When the temperature falls 3 degrees below the set-point, the unit will energize. When the temperature rises 3 degrees above the set-point, the unit will de-energize.

D. Campus Oaks Electrical Room Control Sequences:

1. The variable refrigerant flow (VRF) will be comprised of the outdoor heat pump unit WD37-HVAC-13101 and indoor fan coil units WD37-HVAC-13102, WD37-HVAC-13103, and WD37-HVAC-13104. The indoor units will be controlled by a single thermostat with adjustable set-points. The cooling set-point will be 90 degrees Fahrenheit. When the temperature rises 3 degrees above the set-point, the unit will energize. When the temperature falls 3 degrees below the set-point, the unit will de-energize. The heating set-point will be 55 degrees Fahrenheit. When the temperature falls 3 degrees above the set-point, the unit will energize. When the temperature rises 3 degrees below the set-point, the unit will de-energize.
a. Provide lockbox for thermostat. Setpoint shall be locked out from being set below 90 degrees Fahrenheit, or below 55 degrees Fahrenheit.

2. Electric Unit Heater WD37-HEAT-13204 will be controlled by a thermostat with an adjustable set-point. The heating set-point will be 50 degrees Fahrenheit.

When the temperature falls 3 degrees below the set-point, the unit will energize. When the temperature rises 3 degrees above the set-point, the unit will de-energize.

E. Misty Woods Electrical Room Control Sequences:

1. The variable refrigerant flow (VRF) system will be comprised of the outdoor heat pump unit WD37-HVAC-19101 and indoor fan coil units WD37-HVAC-19102, WD37-HVAC-19103, WD37-HVAC-19104, and
WD37-HVAC-19105. The indoor units will be controlled by a single thermostat with adjustable set-points. The cooling set-point will be 90 degrees Fahrenheit.

When the temperature rises 3 degrees above the set-point, the unit will energize. When the temperature falls 3 degrees below the set-point, the unit will de-energize. The heating set-point will be 55 degrees Fahrenheit. When the temperature falls 3 degrees above the set-point, the unit will energize.

When the temperature rises 3 degrees below the set-point, the unit will de-energize.
a. Provide lockbox for thermostat. Setpoint shall be locked out from being set below 90 degrees Fahrenheit, or below 55 degrees Fahrenheit.

2. Electric Unit Heater WD37-HEAT-19204 will be controlled by a thermostat with an adjustable set-point. The heating set-point will be 50 degrees Fahrenheit.

When the temperature falls 3 degrees below the set-point, the unit will energize. When the temperature rises 3 degrees above the set-point, the unit will de-energize.

Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC
15936-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15936 (DraftFinal) F. Restroom Control Sequences:

1. Restroom Exhaust Fan WD05-FANx-13303/WD05-FANx-19303 will be interlocked with the lights of restroom. When the lights are turned on, the fan will energize. When the lights are turned off, the fan will de-energize.

2.06 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
A. Provide conduit as specified in Section 16010 - General Requirements for Electrical, and Section 16130 - Conduits.

B. Provide control and instrumentation wire as specified in Section 16123 - 600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Before installation remove dust and debris from equipment and accessories.

B. During installation and until equipment is operated, protect equipment and accessories from dust and debris.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with NFPA 90A, and per the manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Coordinate installation of HVAC control systems with other trades.

1. Prior to installation, coordinate wiring and conduit requirements with electrical subcontractor.

C. Mount remote annunciator and test station on wall near smoke detector.

1. Devices shall be easily accessible from floor level.

2. Label annunciator and test station.

D. Provide all electrical work to support smoke detector.

1. Coordinate with electrical subcontractor.

E. Thermostat cable conduit installation:

1. As specified in Electrical Sections - 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical, 16123 - 600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables, and 16130 - Conduits.

F. Sensor and control station mounting:

1. Where not otherwise indicated, mount 5 feet above floor or walking level.

2. Provide insulating back plates when mounting is on an exterior wall or a wall adjoining an unconditioned space.

3. Shield outside thermostats or sensors from the sun; provide thermostats with remote bulb and compensated capillary.

4. Install locking covers where indicated on the Drawings.

Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC
15936-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15936 (DraftFinal)

3.03 TESTING
A. Test witnessing: Witnessed.

B. Test each control component and system as part of HVAC system testing, adjusting, and balancing as specified in Section 15954 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.

END OF SECTION
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
15954-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15954 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15954

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Requirements for testing air systems installed as part of this contract and existing air systems affected by the installation of new equipment.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC):

1. National Standards Total System Balance.

B. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB):

1. Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Environmental Systems.

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA):

1. HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.

D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau (TABB):

1. TAB Procedural Guide.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Resumes of proposed supervisor and personnel showing training and qualifications.

1. Include courses, exams, or tests relating to HVAC testing - taken and passed.

B. Testing plan:

1. At least 30 days prior to starting field work.

2. Set of report forms completed with design flow values and installed equipment pressure drops, and required cubic feet per minute for air terminals.

3. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning system schematic similar to Figure 6-1 in SMACNA HVAC Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.

4. Complete list of instruments proposed to be used, organized in appropriate categories, with data sheets for each showing:
a. Manufacturer and model number.
b. Description and use when needed to further identify instrument. c. Size or capacity range.
d. Latest calibration date.

5. Proposed schedule for testing and balancing.

C. Report:

1. Not more than 45 days prior to Contractor's request for final inspection, submit draft report on applicable reporting forms.

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
15954-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15954 (DraftFinal)

2. At least 15 days prior to Contractor's request for final inspection, submit 3 copies of final reports incorporating Engineer's comments on draft report.

3. List of instruments used and last date of calibration of each.

4. Procedures followed for testing, adjusting, and balancing.

5. Identification and succinct description of systems included in report.

6. Initial balance test results made with all dampers and air control devices in full open positions.

7. Description of final locations and sizes, including opening area and dimensioned configuration of orifices and other restrictions used to achieve final balanced flows.

8. Description of final location and opening positions of dampers, registers, louvers, and valves.

9. Schematics of systems included in report; use schematics as part of testing, adjusting, and balancing report to summarize design and final balanced flows.

10. Testing, adjusting, and balancing report forms.

11. Final field results established for system balancing including airflow, fan speeds, and fan static pressures at the fan inlet and outlet.

12. Appendices.
a. Raw field data taken during testing.
b. Sample calculation sheet for each type of calculation made to convert raw field data to final results.
c. Initial air balance results with dampers and registers in full open position; include airflow at all inlets and outlet, initial fan speed and fan suction and discharge pressures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Work of testing, adjusting, and balancing of heating, ventilation, and air conditioning systems to be by an independent testing agency and a certified member in good standing with AABC, NEBB, or TABB.

B. Field testing to be performed or directly supervised by personal who have passed a Test and Balance course or exam and is an AABC, NEBB, or TABB certified supervisor.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prior to start of testing, adjusting, and balancing, verify that:

1. System installation is complete in accordance with the requirements for completed equipment installations in Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC and capable of full operation.

2. Outside conditions are within reasonable range relative to design conditions.

3. Lighting fixtures are energized.

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
15954-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15954 (DraftFinal)

4. Special equipment such as computers, laboratory equipment, and electronic equipment are in full operation.

5. Requirements for preparation for testing and balancing have been met for elements of each system which require testing.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test, adjust, and balance each separate complete heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems.

1. Include existing heating, ventilating, and air conditioning components when effected by the Work.

B. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing cycles until airflows meet acceptance criteria.

1. Ascertain airflow balance between overall requirements and flow in individual supply and exhaust grilles.

C. Initial testing, adjusting, and balancing:

1. Test each system with dampers, grilles, orifices, and other variable airflow devices in their full open position; measure and report initial airflows, fan speed, and fan static pressures at fan inlet and outlet.

2. Adjust total system flow downward or upward by adjusting fan speed until one inlet or outlet is at indicated flow and all other flows exceed indicated flows.

3. Adjust fan speed by changing fan drives or sheaves as necessary.

D. Subsequent testing, adjusting, and balancing:

1. Perform adjustments by adjusting dampers, louvers, or size of orifices or plates.

2. Measure and record air volume discharged at each inlet and outlet and adjust air inlets and outlets to design air volumes within 0 to 5 percent over design rates.

3. Adjust fan speeds and motor drives within drive limitations, for required air volume.

4. Measure air flow and static pressures and adjust air supply and exhaust fan units to deliver at least 100 to 105 percent of the design air volume.

5. Measure and record static air pressure conditions on fans, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan.

6. Evaluate building and room pressure conditions to determine adequate supply and return air conditions.

7. Evaluate space and zone temperature of conditions to determine adequate performance of the systems to maintain temperatures without draft.

8. Permanently mark final balance positions of balancing dampers.

E. Develop heating, ventilating, and air conditioning system schematics similar to Figure 6-1 in SMACNA Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.

F. Accurately record the required data on AABC, NEBB, or TABB test and balance report forms.

G. Measure amperage draw of fan and pump motors at final balance.

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
15954-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15954 (DraftFinal) H. Test primary source equipment in accordance with AABC, NEBB, or TABB procedures.

1. Primary source equipment includes items listed in this Section not previously tested as part of this testing, adjusting, and balancing work.

2. Complete appropriate AABC, NEBB, or TABB equipment test forms for each piece of equipment.

3. Calculate cooling and heating capacities to show conformance with specified capacities.

4. Adjust equipment as needed to deliver specified cooling and heating loads.

5. Record final equipment performing characteristics and adjustment settings in the final design report.

I. Testing, adjusting, and balancing acceptance criteria:

1. Procedures successful and complete when heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and components are functioning properly and system air flows are within specified tolerances of design flows.

END OF SECTION
Piping Systems Testing
15956-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15956 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15956

PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Test requirements for piping systems.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Fuel Gas Code (NFGC).

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

1. B31.1 - Power Piping.

2. B31.3 - Process Piping.

3. B31.8 - Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).

1.03 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. General requirements:

1. Testing requirements are stipulated in Laws and Regulations; are included in the Piping Schedule in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping; are specified in the specifications covering the various types of piping; and are specified in this Section.

2. Requirements in Laws and Regulations supersede other requirements of Contract Documents, except where requirements of Contract Documents are more stringent, including higher test pressures, longer test times, and lower leakage allowances.

3. Test plumbing piping in accordance with Laws and Regulations, the plumbing code, as specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements, and UL requirements.

4. When testing with water, the specified test pressure is considered to be the pressure at the lowest point of the piping section under test. a. Lower test pressure as necessary (based on elevation) if testing is performed at higher point of the pipe section.

B. Furnish necessary personnel, materials, and equipment, including bulkheads, restraints, anchors, temporary connections, pumps, water, pressure gauges, and other means and facilities required to perform tests.

C. Water for testing, cleaning, and disinfecting:

1. Water for testing, cleaning, and disinfecting will be provided as specified in Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.

Piping Systems Testing
15956-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15956 (DraftFinal) D. Pipes to be tested: Test only those portions of pipes that have been installed as part of this Contract. Test new pipe sections prior to making final connections to existing piping. Furnish and install test plugs, bulkheads, and restraints required to isolate new pipe sections. Do not use existing valves as test plug or bulkhead.

E. Unsuccessful tests:

1. Where tests are not successful, correct defects or remove defective piping and appurtenances and install piping and appurtenances that comply with the specified requirements.

2. Repeat testing until tests are successful.

F. Test completion: Drain and leave piping clean after successful testing.

G. Test water disposal: Dispose of testing water at locations specified by the City of Roseville in accordance with requirements of federal, state, county, and city regulations governing disposal of wastes in the location of the Project and disposal site. All requirements and costs associated with notifications and obtaining any discharge permit or approvals shall be responsibility of Contractor.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Schedule and notification of tests:

1. Submit a list of scheduled piping tests by noon of the working day preceding the date of the scheduled tests.

2. Notification of readiness to test: Immediately before testing, notify Engineer in writing of readiness, not just intention, to test piping.

3. Have personnel, materials, and equipment specified in place before submitting notification of readiness.

1.05 SEQUENCE
A. Clean piping before pressure or leak tests.

B. Test gravity piping underground, including sanitary sewers, for visible leaks before backfilling and compacting.

C. Underground pressure piping may be tested before or after backfilling when not indicated or specified otherwise.

D. Backfill and compact trench, or provide blocking that prevents pipe movement before testing underground piping with a maximum leakage allowance.

E. Test underground piping before encasing piping in concrete or covering piping with slab, structure, or permanent improvement.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
Piping Systems Testing
15956-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15956 (DraftFinal) PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 TESTING ALIGNMENT, GRADE, AND DEFLECTION
A. Alignment and grade:

1. Visually inspect the interior of gravity piping with artificial light, reflected light, or laser beam.

2. Consider inspection complete when no broken or collapsed piping, no open or poorly made joints, no grade changes that affect the piping capacity, or no other defects are observed.

B. Deflection test:

1. Pull a mandrel through the clean piping section under test.

2. Perform the test not sooner than 30 days after installation and not later than 60 days after installation.

3. Use a 9-rod mandrel with a contact length of not less than the nominal diameter of the pipe within 1 percent plus or minus.

4. Consider test complete when the mandrel can be pulled through the piping with reasonable effort by one person, without the aid of mechanical equipment.

3.02 AIR TESTING METHOD FOR PRESSURE PIPING
A. Air test piping, indicated with "AM" in the Piping Schedule, with air or another nonflammable or inert gas.

B. Test gas, air, liquefied petroleum gas, liquid chlorine, and chlorine gas piping by the air test method:

1. Test chlorine piping with dry air or nitrogen having a dew point of minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit or less. Supply temporary air dryers as necessary.

C. Test at pressure as specified in the Piping Schedule on the Drawings:

1. Provide temporary pressure relief valve for piping under test:
a. Set at the lesser of 110 percent of the test pressure or 50 pounds per square inch gauge over the test pressure.

2. Air method test pressures shall not exceed 110 percent of the piping maximum allowable working pressure calculated in accordance with the most stringent of ASME B31.1, ASME B31.3, ASME B31.8, or the pipe manufacturer's stated maximum working pressure.

3. Gradually increase test pressure to an initial test pressure equal to the lesser of 1/2 the test pressure or 25 pounds per square inch gauge.

4. Perform initial check of joints and fittings for leakage.

5. Gradually increase test pressure in steps no larger than the initial pressure.

Check for leakage; at each step increase until test pressure reached.

6. At each step in the pressure, examine and test piping being air tested for leaks with soap solution.

7. Consider examination complete when piping section under test holds the test pressure for 15 minutes without losses.

Piping Systems Testing
15956-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15956 (DraftFinal)

3.03 TESTING GRAVITY FLOW PIPING
A. Test gravity flow piping indicated with "GR" in the Piping Schedule, as follows:

1. Unless specified otherwise, subject gravity flow piping to the following tests:
a. Alignment and grade.
b. For plastic piping test for deflection.
c. Visible leaks and pressure with maximum leakage allowance, except for storm drains and culverts.

2. Inspect piping for visible leaks before backfilling.

3. Provide temporary restraints when needed to prevent movement of piping.

4. Pressure test piping with maximum leakage allowance after backfilling.

5. With the lower end plugged, fill piping slowly with water while allowing air to escape from high points. Keep piping full under a slight head for the water at least 24 hours:
a. Examine piping for visible leaks. Consider examination complete when no visible leaks are observed.
b. Maintain piping with water, or allow a new water absorption period of 24 hours for the performance of the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance.
c. After successful completion of the test for visible leaks and after the piping has been restrained and backfilled, subject piping to the test pressure for minimum of 4 hours while accurately measuring the volume of water added to maintain the test pressure:
1) Consider the test complete when leakage is equal to or less than the following maximum leakage allowances:
a) For concrete piping with rubber gasket joints: 80 gallons per day per inch of diameter per mile of piping under test:
(1) Advise manufacturer of concrete piping with rubber gasket joints of more stringent than normal maximum leakage
allowance.
b) For vitrified clay piping: 500 gallons per day per inch of diameter per mile of piping under test.
c) For other piping: 80 gallons per day per inch diameter per mile of piping under test.

3.04 TESTING HIGH-HEAD PRESSURE PIPING
A. Test piping for which the specified test pressure in the Piping Schedule is 20 pounds per square inch gauge or greater, by the high head pressure test method, indicated "HH" in the Piping Schedule.

B. General:

1. Test connections, hydrants, valves, blowoffs, and closure pieces with the piping.

2. Do not use installed valves for shutoff when the specified test pressure exceeds the valve's maximum allowable seat differential pressure. Provide blinds or other means to isolate test sections.

Piping Systems Testing
15956-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15956 (DraftFinal)

3. Do not include valves, equipment, or piping specialties in test sections if test pressure exceeds the valve, equipment, or piping specialty safe test pressure allowed by the item's manufacturer.

4. During the performance of the tests, test pressure shall not vary more than plus or minus 5 pounds per square inch gauge with respect to the specified test pressure.

5. Select the limits of testing to sections of piping. Select sections that have the same piping material and test pressure.

6. When test results indicate failure of selected sections, limit tests to piping:
a. Between valves.
b. Between a valve and the end of the piping.
c. Less than 500 feet long.

7. Test piping for minimum 2 hours for visible leaks test and minimum 2 hours for the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance.

C. Testing procedures:

1. Fill piping section under test slowly with water while venting air:
a. Use potable water for all potable waterlines and where noted on the Piping Schedule.

2. Before pressurizing for the tests, retain water in piping under slight pressure for a water absorption period of minimum 24 hours.

3. Raise pressure to the specified test pressure and inspect piping visually for leaks:
a. Consider visible leakage testing complete when no visible leaks are observed.

D. Pressure test with maximum leakage allowance:

1. Leakage allowance is zero for piping systems using flanged, National Pipe Thread threaded and welded joints.

2. Pressure test piping after completion of visible leaks test.

3. For piping systems using joint designs other than flanged, threaded, or welded joints, accurately measure the makeup water necessary to maintain the pressure in the piping section under test during the pressure test period:
a. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred.
b. Successful completion of the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance shall be achieved when the observed leakage during the test period is equal or less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred.
c. When leakage is allowed, calculate the allowable leakage by the following formula:

L = S x D x P1/2 x 148,000-1
wherein the terms shall mean:

L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour.

S = Length of the test section in feet.

Piping Systems Testing
15956-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15956 (DraftFinal) D = Nominal diameter of the piping in inches.

P = Average observed test pressure in pounds per square inches gauge, at the lowest point of the test section, corrected for elevation of the pressure gauge.
x = The multiplication symbol.

3.05 TESTING LOW-HEAD PRESSURE PIPING
A. Test piping for which the specified test pressure is less than 20 pounds per square inch gauge, by the low head pressure test method, indicated "LH" in the Piping Schedule.

B. General:

1. Test pressures shall be as scheduled in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.

2. During the performance of the tests, test pressure shall not vary more than plus or minus 2 pounds per square inch gauge with respect to the specified test pressure.

3. Test connections, blowoffs, vents, closure pieces, and joints into structures, including existing bell rings and other appurtenances, with the piping.

4. Test piping for minimum 2 hours for visible leaks test and minimum 2 hours for the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance.

C. Visible leaks test:

1. Subject piping under test to specified pressure measured at the lowest end.

2. Fill piping section under test slowly with water while venting air:
a. Use potable water for all potable waterlines and where noted on the Piping Schedule.

3. Before pressurizing for the tests, retain water in piping under slight pressure for the water absorption period of minimum 24 hours.

4. Raise pressure to the specified test pressure and inspect piping visually for leaks. Consider testing complete when no visible leaks are observed.

D. Pressure test with maximum leakage allowance:

1. Pressure test piping after completion of visible leaks test.

2. Accurately measure the makeup water necessary to maintain the pressure in the piping section under test during the pressure test period:
a. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is less than the allowable leakage of 80 gallons per inch of nominal diameter, per mile of piping section under test after 24 hours, and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred.
b. Successful completion of the leakage test shall have been achieved when the observed leakage is equal or less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred.

E. Optional joint test:

1. When joint testing is allowed by note in the Piping Schedule, the procedure shall be as follows:
a. Joint testing will be allowed only for low head pressure piping.

Piping Systems Testing
15956-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15956 (DraftFinal) b. Joint testing does not replace and is not in lieu of any testing of the piping system or trust restraints.

2. Joint testing may be performed with water or air.

3. Joint test piping after completion of backfill and compaction to the top of the trench.

4. Joint testing with water:
a. Measure test pressure at the invert of the pipe. Apply pressure of 4 feet plus the inside diameter of the pipe in water column within 0.20 feet in water column.
b. Maintain test pressure for 1 minute.
c. Base the allowable leakage per joint on 80 gallons per inch nominal diameter, per mile of piping, per 24 hours equally distributed to the actual number of joints per mile for the type of piping.
d. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is less than the allowable leakage.
e. Successful completion of the joint test with water shall have been achieved when the observed leakage is equal or less than the allowable leakage.

5. Joint testing with air:
a. Apply test pressure of 3 pounds per square inch gauge with a maximum variation of plus 0.20 and minus 0.00 pounds per square inch. b. Maintain test pressure for 2 minutes.
c. Consider the pressure test to be complete when the test pressure does not drop below 2.7 pounds per square inch for the duration of the test.

END OF SECTION

Mechanical Equipment Testing
15958-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15958 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15958

MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Testing of mechanical equipment and systems.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. S1.4 Specification for Sound Level Meters.

B. Hydraulic Institute (HI).

C. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide Source Test Plans as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

B. Provide Installation and Functional Testing Plans as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

C. Provide vendor operation and maintenance manual as specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

1. Include motor rotor bar pass frequencies for motors larger than 500 horsepower.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. Commissioning of equipment as specified in:

1. This Section.

2. Section 01756 - Commissioning.

3. Equipment sections:
a. If testing requirements are not specified, provide Level 1 Tests.

B. Test and prepare piping as specified in Section 15956 - Piping Systems Testing.

Mechanical Equipment Testing
15958-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15958 (DraftFinal) C. Provide necessary test instrumentation that has been calibrated within 1 year from date of test to recognized test standards traceable to the NIST or approved source.

1. Properly calibrated field instrumentation permanently installed as a part of the Work may be utilized for tests.

2. Prior to testing, provide signed and dated certificates of calibration for test instrumentation and equipment.

D. Test measurement and result accuracy:

1. Use test instruments with accuracies as recommended in the appropriate referenced standards. When no accuracy is recommended in the referenced standard, use 1 percent or better accuracy test instruments. a. Improved (lower error tolerance) accuracies specified elsewhere prevail over this general requirement.

2. Do not adjust results of tests for instrumentation accuracy. a. Measured values and values directly calculated from measured values shall be the basis for comparing actual equipment performance to specified requirements.

3.02 VARIABLE SPEED EQUIPMENT TESTS
A. Establish performance over the entire speed range and at the average operating condition.

B. Establish performance curves for the following speeds:

1. The speed corresponding to the rated maximum capacity.

2. The speed corresponding to the minimum capacity.

3. The speed corresponding to the average operating conditions.

3.03 PUMP TESTS, ALL LEVELS OF TESTING
A. Test in accordance with the following:

1. Applicable HI Standards.

2. This Section.

3. Equipment sections.

B. Test tolerances: In accordance with appropriate HI Standards, except the following modified tolerances apply:

1. From 0 to plus 5 percent of head at the rated design point flow.

2. From 0 to plus 5 percent of flow at the rated design point head.

3. No tolerance for head and flow when ranges are specified.

4. No negative tolerance for the efficiency at the rated design point, and other specified conditions.

5. Use of specified test tolerances shall not result in motor overload while operating at any point on the supplied pump operating head-flow curve, including runout.

6. No positive tolerance for vibration limits. Vibration limits and test methods in HI Standards do not apply, use limits and methods specified in this or other Sections of the Specifications.

Mechanical Equipment Testing
15958-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15958 (DraftFinal)

3.04 DRIVERS TESTS
A. Test motors as specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower.

B. Test other drivers as specified in the equipment section.

3.05 NOISE REQUIREMENTS AND CONTROL
A. Perform noise tests in conjunction with vibration test analysis.

B. Make measurements in relation to reference pressure of 0.0002 microbar.

C. Make measurements of emitted noise levels on sound level meter meeting or exceeding ANSI S1.4, Type II.

D. Set sound level meter to slow response.

E. Unless otherwise specified, maximum free field noise level not to exceed 85 dBA measured as sound pressure level at 3 feet from the equipment.

3.06 PRESSURE TESTING
A. Hydrostatically pressure test pressure containing parts at the appropriate standard or code required level above the equipment component specified design pressure or operating pressure, whichever is higher.

3.07 INSPECTION AND BALANCING
A. Statically and dynamically balance each of the individual rotating parts as required to achieve the required field vibration limits.

B. Statically and dynamically balance the completed equipment rotating assembly and drive shaft components.

C. Furnish copies of material and component inspection reports including balancing reports for equipment system components and for the completed rotating assembly.

D. Critical speed of rotating equipment:

1. Satisfy the following:
a. The first lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and 2-speed driven equipment that is considered rigid such as horizontal pumps, all non-clog pumps, blowers, air compressors, and engines shall be at least 25 percent above the equipment’s maximum operating speed. b. The first lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and 2-speed driven equipment that is considered flexible or flexibly mounted such as vertical pumps (vertical in-line and vertical non-clog pumps Mechanical Equipment Testing
15958-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15958 (DraftFinal) excluded) and fans shall at least 25 percent below the equipment’s lowest operating speed.
c. The second lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and 2-speed equipment that is considered flexible or flexibly mounted shall be at least 25 percent above the maximum operating speed.

E. Vibration tests:

1. Definitions:
a. Root mean square: for pumps operating at speeds greater than 600 rpm, the vibration measurement shall be measured as the overall velocity in inches per second root mean square (RMS).
b. Peak-to-peak displacement: The root means squared average of the peak-to-peak displacement multiplied by the square root of 2. c. Peak velocity: The root mean squared average of the peak velocity multiplied by the square root of 2.
d. Peak acceleration: The root mean squared average of the peak acceleration multiplied by the square root of 2.
e. High frequency enveloping: A process to extract very low amplitude time domain signals associated with impact or impulse events such as bearing or gear tooth defects and display them in a frequency spectrum of acceleration versus frequency.
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Rockwell Automation, Entek Group, "Spike Energy" analysis. b) CSI, "PeakVue."
f. Rotor bar pass frequency (RBF), for detecting loose rotor bars. g. Low speed equipment: Equipment or components of equipment rotating at less than 600 revolutions per minute.
h. High speed equipment: Equipment and equipment components operating at or above 600 revolutions per minute.
i. Preferred operating range: Manufacturer’s defined preferred operating range (POR) for the equipment.
j. Allowable operating range: Manufacturer’s defined allowable operating range (AOR) for the equipment.

2. Vibration instrumentation requirements:
a. Analyzers: Use digital type analyzers or data collectors with anti-aliasing filter, 12-bit A/D converter, fast fourier transform circuitry, phase measurement capability, time wave form data storage, high-frequency enveloping capabilities, 35 frequency ranges from 21 to 1,500,000 cycles per minute, adjustable fast fourier transform resolution from 400 to 6,400 lines, storage for up to one hundred 3,200 line frequency spectra, data output port, circuitry for integration of acceleration data to velocity or double integration to displacement.
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Computational Systems Inc., (CSI) Division of Emerson Process Management, Model 2120A, Data Collector/analyzer with
applicable analysis software.
b) Pruftechnik, VIBXPERT II.
b. Analyzer settings:
1) Units: English, inches/second, mils, and gravitational forces. 2) Fast fourier transform lines: Most equipment 1,600 minimum; for motors, enough lines as required to distinguish motor current Mechanical Equipment Testing
15958-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15958 (DraftFinal) frequencies from rotational frequencies, use 3,200 lines for motors with a nominal speed of 3,600 revolutions per minute; 3,200 lines minimum for High Frequency Enveloping; 1,600 lines minimum for low speed equipment.
3) Sample averages: 4 minimum.
4) Maximum frequency (Fmax): 40 times rotational frequency for rolling element bearings, 10 times rotational frequency for sleeve bearings. 5) Amplitude range: Auto select but full scale not more than twice the acceptance criteria or the highest peak, whichever is lower. 6) Fast fourier transform windowing: Hanning Window.
7) High pass filter: Minus 3 dB at 120 cycles per minute for high speed equipment. Minus 3 dB at 21 cycles per minute for low speed equipment.
c. Accelerometers:
1) For low speed equipment: Low frequency, shear mode
accelerometer, 500 millivolts per gravitational force sensitivity, 10 gravitational force range, plus/minus 5 percent frequency response from 0.5 hertz to 850 hertz, magnetic mount.
a) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
(1) Wilcoxon Research, Model 797L.
(2) PCB, Model 393C.
2) For high speed equipment: General purpose accelerometer, 100 millivolts per gravitational force sensitivity, 50 gravitational force range, plus/minus 3dB frequency response range from 2 hertz to 12,000 hertz when stud mounted, with magnetic mount holder. a) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
(1) Wilcoxon Research, Model 793.
(2) Entek-IRD Model 943.

3. Accelerometer mounting:
a. Use magnetic mounting or stud mounting.
b. Mount on bearing housing in location with best available direct path to bearing and shaft vibration.
c. Remove paint and mount transducer on flat metal surface or epoxy mount for High Frequency Enveloping measurements.

4. Vibration acceptance criteria:
a. Testing of rotating mechanical equipment: Tests are to be performed by an experienced, factory trained, and independent authorized vibration analysis expert.

Mechanical Equipment Testing
15958-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15958 (DraftFinal) b. Vibration displacement limits: Unless otherwise specified, equipment operating at speeds 600 revolutions per minute or less is not to exhibit unfiltered readings in excess of following:

Operating Conditions and Application Data
Overall Peak-to-Peak Displacement
Field, mils Factory, mils
Operation within the POR 3.0 4.0
Operation within the AOR 4.0 5.0
Additive value when measurement location is
greater than 5 feet above foundation 2.0 2.0
Additive value for solids-handling pumps 2.0 N/A
Additive value for slurry pumps 2.0 N/A
c. Vibration velocity limits: Unless otherwise specified, equipment operating at speeds greater than 600 revolutions per minute is not to exceed the following peak velocity limits:

HI Pump Type Horsepower
Field Test Factory Test
Overall RMS Overall RMS
Horizontal Solids Handling
Centrifugal Pumps
Below 33 hp 0.25 0.28
Horizontal and Vertical In-Line
Centrifugal Pumps (other than
Non-Clog type)
Vertical Solids Handling
Centrifugal Pumps
Between 33 and
100 hp

0.28 0.31
100 hp and above 0.31 0.34
Below 33 hp 0.30 0.33
Vertical Turbine, Mixed Flow, and
Propeller Pumps (solids-handling
type pumps)
Between 33 and
100 hp

0.32 0.35
100 hp and above 0.34 0.35
Non-Solids Handling Centrifugal
Pumps
HI Types BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4,
BB5, OH1, OH2, OH3, OH4, OH5,
and OH7
Below 268 hp 0.15 0.19
268 hp and above 0.19 0.22
Vertical Turbine, Mixed Flow, and
Propeller Pumps HI Types VS1,
VS2, VS3, VS4, VS5, VS6, VS7,
and VS8
Below 268 hp 0.13
268 hp and above 0.17
Slurry Pumps 0.25 0.30
Motors See Applicable
Motor
Specification
See Applicable
Motor
Specification
Mechanical Equipment Testing
15958-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15958 (DraftFinal) HI Pump Type Horsepower
Field Test Factory Test
Overall RMS Overall RMS
Gear Reducers, Radial Not to exceed
AGMA
6000-B96 limits
Not to exceed
AGMA
6000-B96 limits
Other Reducers, Axial 0.1 N/A
d. Equipment operation: Measurements are to be obtained with equipment installed and operating within capacity ranges specified and without duplicate equipment running.
e. Additional criteria:
1) No narrow band spectral vibration amplitude components, whether sub-rotational, higher harmonic, or synchronous multiple of running speed, are to exceed 40 percent of synchronous vibration amplitude component without manufacturer's detailed verification of origin and ultimate effect of such excitation.
2) The presence of discernable vibration amplitude peaks in Test Level 2 or 3 vibration spectra at bearing inner or outer race frequencies shall be cause for rejection of the equipment. 3) For motors, the following shall be cause for rejection:
a) Stator eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times electrical line frequency that is more than 40 percent of the peak at rotational frequency.
b) Rotor eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times electrical line frequency with spectra side bands at the pole pass frequency around the 2 times line frequency peak.
c) Other rotor problems evidenced by pole pass frequency side bands around operating speed harmonic peaks or 2 times line frequency side bands around rotor bar pass frequency or around 2 times the rotor bar pass frequency.
d) Phasing problems evidenced by 1/3 line frequency side band spectral peaks around the 2 times electrical line frequency peak. 4) The presence of peaks in a High Frequency Enveloping spectra plot corresponding to bearing, gear or motor rotor bar frequencies or harmonics of these frequencies shall be cause for rejection of the equipment; since inadequate lubrication of some equipment may be a cause of these peaks, lubrication shall be checked, corrected as necessary and the high frequency envelope analysis repeated.

5. Vibration testing results presentation:
a. Provide equipment drawing with location and orientation of measurement points indicated.
b. For each vibration measurement take and include appropriate data on equipment operating conditions at the time vibration data is taken; for pumps, compressors, and blowers record suction pressure, discharge pressure, and flow.
c. When Vibration Spectra Data required:
1) Plot peak vibration velocity versus frequency in cycles per minute. 2) Label plots showing actual shaft or part rotation frequency, bearing inner and outer race ball pass frequencies, gear mesh frequencies Mechanical Equipment Testing
15958-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15958 (DraftFinal) and relevant equipment excitation frequencies on the plot; label probable cause of vibration peaks whether in excess of specification limits or not.
3) Label plots with equipment identification and operating conditions such as tag number, capacity, pressure, driver horsepower, and point of vibration measurement.
4) Plot motor spectra on a log amplitude scale versus frequency. d. For low speed equipment, plot peak vibration displacement versus frequency as well as velocity versus frequency.
e. Provide name of manufacturer and model number of the vibration instrumentation used, including analyzer and accelerometer used together with mounting type.

3.08 TESTING LEVELS
A. Level 1 Tests:

1. Level 1 Performance Test:
a. General:
1) For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for 15 minutes minimum after components reach normal operating temperatures.
2) Operate at rated design load conditions.
3) Confirm that equipment is properly assembled.
4) Confirm the equipment moves or rotates in the proper direction. 5) Confirm shafting, drive elements, and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances.
6) Confirm that no unusual power consumption, lubrication temperatures, bearing temperatures, or other conditions are observed.
b. Pumps:
1) Comply with general performance test requirements as specified in this Section.
2) Measure flow and head while operating at or near the rated condition; for factory testing, testing may be at reduced speeds with flow and head corresponding to the rated condition when adjusted for speed using the appropriate affinity laws.
a) Use of a test driver is permitted for factory tests when actual driver is given a separate test at its point of manufacture as specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to
500 Horsepower or the applicable equipment section.
b) Use actual driver for field tests.
3) Record measured flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure, and make observations on bearing temperatures and noise levels.

2. Level 1 Vibration Test:
a. Test requirement:
1) Measure filtered vibration spectra versus frequency in 3 perpendicular planes at each normally accessible bearing housing on the driven equipment, any gears and on the driver; 1 plane of measurement to be parallel to the axis of rotation of the component. 2) Vibration spectra versus frequency shall be in accordance with Vibration Acceptance Criteria.

Mechanical Equipment Testing
15958-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15958 (DraftFinal) b. Equipment operating condition: Test at specified maximum speed.

3. Level 1 Noise Test:
a. Measure unfiltered overall A-weighted sound pressure level in dBA at 3 feet horizontally from the surface of the equipment and at a mid-point of the equipment height.

B. Level 2 Tests:

1. Level 2 Performance Test:
a. General:
1) For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for at least 2 hours after components reach normal operating
temperatures.
2) Operate at rated design load conditions.
3) Confirm that equipment is properly assembled.
4) Confirm the equipment moves or rotates in the proper direction. 5) Confirm shafting, drive elements, and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances.
6) Confirm that no unusual power consumption, lubrication temperatures, bearing temperatures, or other conditions are observed.
b. Pumps:
1) Comply with general performance test requirements as specified in this Section.
2) Test 2 hours minimum for flow and head at the rated condition; for factory testing, testing may be at a reduced speeds with flow and head corresponding to the rated condition when adjusted for speed using the appropriate affinity laws.
a) Use of a test driver is permitted for factory tests when actual driver is given a separate test at its point of manufacture as specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to
500 Horsepower.
b) Use actual driver for field tests.
3) Test for flow and head at 2 additional conditions; 1 at 25 percent below the rated flow and 1 at 10 percent above the rated flow. 4) Record measured flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure, and observations on bearing temperatures and noise levels at each condition.

2. Level 2 Vibration Test:
a. Test requirement:
1) Measure filtered vibration spectra versus frequency and measure vibration phase in 3 perpendicular planes at each normally accessible bearing housing on the driven equipment, any gears and on the driver; 1 plane of measurement to be parallel to the axis of rotation of the component; measure actual rotational speeds for each vibration spectra measured using photometric or other tachometer input connected directly to the vibration data collector. 2) Vibration spectra versus frequency shall be in accordance with Vibration Acceptance Criteria.
b. Equipment operating condition: Repeat test requirements at design specified maximum speed and at minimum speed for variable speed equipment.

Mechanical Equipment Testing
15958-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15958 (DraftFinal) c. Natural frequency test of field installed equipment:
1) Excite the installed equipment and support system in 3 perpendicular planes, use same planes as operating vibration measurement planes, and determine the as-installed natural resonant frequency of the driven equipment, the driver, gears, and supports.
2) Perform test at each bearing housing, at each support pedestal, and for pumps on the suction and discharge piping.
3) Perform with equipment and attached piping full of intended service or process fluid.

3. Level 2 Noise Test:
a. Measure filtered A-weighted overall sound pressure level in dBA for each of 8 octave band mid-points beginning at 63 hertz measured at 3 feet horizontally from the surface of the equipment at mid-point height of the noise source.

C. Level 3 Tests:

1. Level 3 Performance Tests:
a. General:
1) For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for at least 4 hours after components reach normal operating
temperatures.
2) Operate at rated design load conditions for 1/2 the specified time; operate at each of any other specified conditions for a proportionate share of the remaining test time.
3) Confirm that equipment is properly assembled.
4) Confirm the equipment moves or rotates in the proper direction. 5) Confirm shafting, drive elements, and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances.
6) Confirm that no unusual power consumption, lubrication temperatures, bearing temperatures, or other conditions are observed.
7) Take appropriate capacity, power or fuel consumption, torque, revolutions per minute, pressure, and temperature readings using appropriate test instrumentation to confirm equipment meets specified performance requirements at the design rated condition. 8) Bearing temperatures: During maximum speed or capacity performance testing, measure and record the exterior surface temperature of each bearing versus time.
b. Pumps:
1) Comply with general performance test requirements as specified in this Section.
2) Test 4 hours minimum for flow and head; begin tests at or near the rated condition; for factory and field-testing, test at full speed. a) Use of a test driver is permitted for factory tests when actual driver is given a separate test at its point of manufacture as specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to
500 Horsepower.
b) Use actual driver for field tests.
3) Test each specified flow and head condition at the rated speed and test at minimum as well as maximum specified speeds; operate at each test condition for a minimum of 15 minutes; or longer as Mechanical Equipment Testing
15958-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15958 (DraftFinal) necessary to measure required performance, vibration, and noise data at each test condition. For factory testing, test at other speeds may be omitted if test driver at reduced speeds is used for rated condition testing.
4) Record measured shaft revolutions per minute, flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure; record measured bearing
temperatures (bearing housing exterior surface temperatures may be recorded when bearing temperature devices are not required by the equipment section) and record observations on noise levels. 5) Perform efficiency and/or Net Positive Suction Head Required (NPSHr) and/or priming time tests when specified in the equipment section in accordance with the appropriate HI standard and as follows:
a) Perform NPSHr testing at maximum rated design speed, head and flow with test fluids at ambient conditions; at maximum rated speed, test at 15 percent above rated design flow, and
25 percent below rated design flow.
b) Perform efficiency testing with test fluids at maximum rated speed.
c) Perform priming time testing with test fluids at maximum rated speed.

2. Level 3 Vibration Test:
a. Requirements: Same as Level 2 vibration test except data taken at each operating condition tested and with additional requirements below. b. Perform High Frequency Enveloping Analysis for gears and bearings. 1) Measure bearing element vibration directly on each bearing cap in a location close as possible to the bearing load zone that provides a smooth surface and direct path to the bearing to detect bearing defects.
2) Report results in units of acceleration versus frequency in cycles per minute.
c. Perform Time Wave Form analysis for gears, low speed equipment and reciprocating equipment; plot true peak amplitude velocity and displacement versus time and label the period between peaks with the likely cause of the periodic peaks (relate the period to a cause). d. Plot vibration spectra on 3 different plots; peak displacement versus frequency, peak acceleration versus frequency and peak velocity versus frequency.

3. Level 3 Noise Test: Measure filtered, un-weighted overall sound pressure level in dB at 3 feet horizontally from the surface of the equipment at mid-point height and at 4 locations approximately 90 degrees apart in plain view; report results for each of 8 octave band mid-points beginning at 63 hertz.

D. Level 4 Tests:

1. Level 4 Performance Test:
a. General:
1) For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for at least 8 hours after components reach normal operating
temperatures.

Mechanical Equipment Testing
15958-12 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15958 (DraftFinal) 2) Operate at rated design load conditions for 1/2 the specified time; operate at each of any other specified conditions for a proportionate share of the remaining test time.
3) Confirm that equipment is properly assembled.
4) Confirm the equipment moves or rotates in the proper direction. 5) Confirm shafting, drive elements, and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances.
6) Confirm that no unusual power consumption, lubrication temperatures, bearing temperatures, or other conditions are observed.
7) Take appropriate capacity, power or fuel consumption, torque, revolutions per minute, pressure and temperature readings, using appropriate test instrumentation to confirm equipment meets specified performance requirements at the design rated condition. 8) Bearing temperatures: During maximum speed or capacity testing, measure and record the exterior surface temperature of each bearing versus time.
b. Pumps:
1) Comply with general performance test requirements as specified in this Section.
2) Test 8 hours minimum for flow and head; begin tests at or near the rated condition; for factory and field-testing, test with furnished motor at full speed.
3) Test each specified flow and head condition at the rated speed and test at minimum as well as maximum specified speeds; operate at each test condition for a minimum of 20 minutes or longer as necessary to measure required performance, vibration, and noise data at each test condition.
4) Record measured shaft revolutions per minute, flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure; record measured bearing
temperatures (bearing housing exterior surface temperatures may be recorded when bearing temperature devices not required by the equipment section) and record observations on noise levels. 5) Bearing temperatures: During maximum speed or capacity testing, measure and record the exterior surface temperature of each bearing versus time.
6) Perform efficiency and/or Net Positive Suction Head Required (NPSHr) and/or priming time tests when specified in the equipment section in accordance with the appropriate HI standard and as follows:
a) Perform NPSHr testing at maximum rated design speed, head and flow with test fluids at ambient conditions; at maximum rated speed, test at 15 percent above rated design flow, and
25 percent below rated design flow.
b) Perform efficiency testing with test fluids at maximum rated speed.
c) Perform priming time testing with test fluids at maximum rated speed.

Mechanical Equipment Testing
15958-13 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15958 (DraftFinal)

2. Level 4 Vibration Test: Same as Level 3 vibration test.

3. Level 4 Noise Test: Same as Level 3 Noise Test except with data taken at each operating condition tested.

END OF SECTION

Common Work Results for Electrical
16050-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16050 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16050

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Requirements for electrical:
a. Basic design and performance criteria.
b. Installation.

B. Contract Drawings:

1. Schematic diagrams:
a. Controls are shown as de-energized.
b. Add relays, where required, to provide necessary contacts for the control system or where needed to function as interposing relays for control voltage coordination, equipment coordination, or control system voltage drop considerations.
c. Mount devices shown on motor controller schematic diagrams in the controller compartment enclosure, unless otherwise noted.

2. Plan drawings:
a. Electrical drawings show desired locations, arrangements, and components of the electrical Work in a diagrammatic manner. b. Locations and sizes of equipment are approximate only.

3. Installation details:
a. Contract Drawings include typical installation details the Contractor is to use to complete the electrical Work. For cases where a typical detail does not apply, develop installation details that may be necessary for completing the Work, and submit these details for review by the Engineer. b. Not all typical installation details are referenced within the drawing set.

Apply and use typical details where appropriate.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations:

1. FAT: Factory acceptance test that is also referred to as source test.

2. ICSC: Instrumentation and controls subcontractor.

3. PCIS: Process control and instrumentation system.

B. Standards:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

Common Work Results for Electrical
16050-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16050 (DraftFinal)

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. LCP: Local control panel: Operator interface panel that may contain pilot type control devices, operator interface devices, control relays, etc., and does not contain a PLC or RIO.

2. PCM: Process control module: An enclosure containing any of the following devices: PLC, RTU, or RIO.

3. Space: Portion of a switchgear, motor control center, panelboard, switchboard, or control panel that does not physically contain a device but is capable of accepting a device with no modifications to the equipment. a. Furnish hardware to accommodate installation of future circuit breakers, instruments, relays, and controls.
b. Wire relay and circuit breaker control power and network connections to the compartment and provide terminations.
c. Space for future devices shall include:
1) All necessary bus.
2) Device supports and mounting equipment.
3) Device connections to bus work.
4) Wire troughs or raceway space.

4. Spare: Portion of a switchgear, motor control center, panelboard, switchboard, or control panel that physically contains a device with no load connections to be made.

5. Unequipped space: Portion of a switchgear, motor control center, panelboard, switchboard, or control panel that does not physically contain a device, standoff, bus, hardware, or other equipment.

1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. Requirements for Delegated Design are specified in the Technical Sections.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General:

1. Furnish equipment listed by and bearing the label of UL or of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Shipping precautions:

1. After completion of shop assembly and successful factory testing, pack equipment in protective crates, and enclose in heavy duty polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from damage, dust, and moisture.

2. Place dehumidifiers, when required, inside the polyethylene coverings.

3. Skid-mount the equipment for final transport.

4. Provide lifting rings for moving without removing protective covering.

5. Display boxed weight on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing, and handling at the job site.

Common Work Results for Electrical
16050-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16050 (DraftFinal)

1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.08 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Loop drawings:
a. Provide electrical information required in the preparation of loop drawings, including, but not limited to:
1) Conduit numbers and associated signal(s) contained within each conduit.
2) Wire numbers.
3) Equipment terminal numbers.
4) Junction boxes and signal(s) contained within each junction box. 5) Equipment power sources, and associated circuit numbers. 6) As-built drawings detailing wiring.

B. Meetings:

1. As specified in Section 01312 - Project Meetings.

C. Sequencing and scheduling:

1. Equipment anchoring: Project construction schedule must include an event for obtaining the anchor layout drawings from equipment manufacturers in adequate time for templates to be constructed and anchors to be cast-in-place.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide field wiring and terminations.

B. Equipment mounting and anchoring:

1. Design equipment anchorage, supports, and connections for dead load, running loads, loads during start-up, seismic load specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria, and other loads as required for proper operation of equipment. a. For equipment with an operating weight of 400 pounds or greater and equipment that is supported higher than 4 feet above the floor, provide calculations for:
1) Operating weight and location of the centroid of mass for the equipment.
2) Forces and overturning moments.
3) Shear and tension forces in equipment anchorages, supports, and connections.
4) Design of equipment anchorage, supports, and connections based on calculated shear and tension forces.

2. Anchorage of equipment to concrete or masonry:
a. Perform calculations and determine number, size, type, strength, and location of anchor bolts or other connections.

Common Work Results for Electrical
16050-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16050 (DraftFinal) b. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, select and provide anchors from the types specified in Section 05190 - Mechanical Anchoring and Fastening to Concrete and Masonry.
c. Provide bolt sleeves around cast-in anchor bolts for 400 pounds or greater equipment.
1) Adjust bolts to final location and secure the sleeve.

3. Anchorage of equipment to metal supports:
a. Perform calculations and determine number, size, type, strength, and location of bolts used to connect equipment to metal supports.

2.02 MATERIALS
A. Enclosures:

1. Provide enclosures for electrical, instrumentation, and control equipment, regardless of Supplier or Subcontractor furnishing the equipment, that meet the requirements of NEMA Standard 250.
a. Provide metallic enclosures unless specifically indicated otherwise.

B. Stainless steel:

1. Where stainless steel is indicated or used for any portion of the electrical Work, provide a non-magnetic, corrosion-resistant alloy, ANSI Type 316, satin finish.

2. Provide exposed screws of the same alloys.

3. Use stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all chemical areas or areas requiring NEMA Type 4X construction.

4. Do not use stainless steel in any area containing chlorine, gas or solution, chlorine products or ferric chloride.

C. Plant area electrical Work requirements:

1. Provide electrical materials in accordance with the following table, unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings:
a. Conduit installation requirements: As specified in Section 16130 - Conduits.

Table 1. Electrical Material Requirements
Plant Area
Environment:

W = Wet
D = Damp
C = Clean/dry
X = Corrosive
H = Hazardous
NEMA
Enclosure Type
Exposed
Conduit Type
(as specified in
Section 16130 -
Conduits)
Support
Materials
Electrical Room C 1, 12 GRC GRC
Pump Room D 4X Stainless Steel GRC GRC
Chemical Room X 4X non-metallic PCS Fiberglass
Outdoors W 4X Stainless Steel PCS Stainless steel
Common Work Results for Electrical
16050-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16050 (DraftFinal) PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment:

1. Where the Drawings do not show dimensions for locating equipment, install equipment in the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Provide NEC required working space in front of electrical equipment as if it could be worked on energized.

C. Circuits of different service voltage:

1. Voltage and service levels:
a. Low voltage:
1) Power and controls: 120 V to 480 V.
2) Instrumentation: Less than 50 VDC.
b. Fiber.

2. Install different service voltage circuits in separate raceways as well as underground manholes and hand holes.

3. Install different service voltage circuits in separate junction boxes and pullboxes or provide physical dividers where boxes can be divided.

D. Conductors shall not pass through equipment they are not terminating in unless indicated on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Workmanship:

1. Leave wiring in panels, manholes, boxes, and other locations neat, clean, and organized:
a. Neatly coil and label spare wiring lengths.
b. Shorten, re-terminate, and re-label excessively used, as well as spare, wire and cable lengths, as directed by the Engineer.

B. Inspection activities conducted during construction do not satisfy the inspection or testing requirements specified in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.

C. Provide onsite assistance for troubleshooting and correcting electrical issues discovered during installation and testing for the Project.

3.03 CLEANING
A. General:

1. Clean and vacuum enclosures to remove metal filings, surplus insulation and any visible dirt, dust, or other matter before energization of the equipment or system start-up:
a. Use of compressors or air blowers for cleaning is not acceptable.

2. Clean luminaries in the areas affected by the construction.

END OF SECTION

Grounding and Bonding
16060-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16060 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16060

GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Grounding materials and requirements.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.

2. B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft.

3. B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes.

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

1. 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. 467 - Ground and Bonding Equipment.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Catalog cutsheets.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Grounding components and materials shall be UL listed and labeled.

1.05 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.06 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

Grounding and Bonding
16060-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16060 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Ground equipment and raceway systems so that the completed installation is in accordance with applicable code requirements.

B. Provide a complete electrical grounding system as indicated on the Drawings and as specified including but not limited to:

1. Grounding electrodes.

2. Bonding jumpers.

3. Ground connections.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Compression connectors: One of the following or equal:

1. ABB.

2. Burndy.

3. Erico.

4. Harger.

5. Panduit.

B. Ground rods: One of the following or equal:

1. Erico.

2. Harger.

3. Nehring.

C. Ground cable: One of the following or equal:

1. Erico.

2. Harger.

3. Nehring.

4. Southwire.

D. Precast ground well boxes: One of the following or equal:

1. Brooks Products, 3-RT Valve Box.

2. Christy Concrete Products, G12 Valve Box.

2.03 MATERIALS
A. Ground rod:

1. Minimum: 3/4-inch diameter, 10-feet long.

2. Uniform 10 mil covering of electrolytic copper metallically bonded to a rigid steel core:
a. Copper-to-steel bond shall be corrosion resistant.

3. In accordance with UL 467.

4. Sectional type joined by threaded copper alloy couplings.

5. Fit the top of the rod with a threaded coupling and steel-driving stud.

B. Ground cable:

1. Requirements:
a. Soft drawn (annealed).

Grounding and Bonding
16060-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16060 (DraftFinal) b. Concentric lay, coarse stranded in accordance with ASTM B8. c. Bare copper in accordance with ASTM B3.

2. Size is as indicated on the Drawings, but not less than required by the NEC.

C. Compression connectors:

1. Manufactured of high copper alloy specifically for the particular grounding application.

2. Suitable for direct burial in earth and concrete.

3. Identifying compression die number inscription to be impressed on compression fitting.

4. Barrels prefilled and sealed with oxide-inhibiting and anti-seizing compound.

D. Grounding electrode conductors:

1. Minimum size in accordance with the NEC.

E. Main bonding jumpers and bonding jumpers:

1. Minimum size in accordance with the NEC.

2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Precast ground well boxes:

1. Minimum 10-inch interior diameter.

2. Traffic-rated cast iron cover.

3. Permanent “GROUND” marking on cover.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide bonding jumpers and wire, grounding bushings, clamps and appurtenances required for complete grounding system to bond equipment and raceways to equipment grounding conductors.

B. Provide a separate grounding conductor for each motor and connect at motor terminal box. Do not use bolts securing motor box to frame or cover for grounding connectors:

1. When grounding motors driven by variable frequency drives (VFD) comply with the requirements of the VFD manufacturer.

C. Provide a grounding type bushing with lug for connection of grounding conductor for conduits that originate from each motor control center section, switchboard, or panelboard:

1. Individually bond these raceways to the ground bus in the equipment.

D. Provide grounding type bushings with lugs for connection of grounding conductor at both ends of metallic conduit runs. Bond ground bushings to the grounding system.

E. Provide a green insulated wire-grounding jumper from the ground screw to a box grounding screw and, for grounding type devices, to equipment grounding conductor.

Grounding and Bonding
16060-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16060 (DraftFinal) F. Interconnect the secondary switchgear, switchboard, or panelboard neutral bus to the ground bus in the secondary switchgear, switchboard, or panelboard compartment, only at service entrance point or after a transformer.

G. Duct bank ground system:

1. Provide a bare copper grounding conductor the entire length of each duct bank, embedded in the concrete of the duct bank as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications.

2. Bond duct bank ground conductors together where duct banks join, merge, intersect, or split.

H. Grounding at service (600 V or Less):

1. Connect the neutral to ground only at one point within the enclosure of the first disconnecting means on the load side of the service transformer.

I. Ground connections:

1. Connections to the ground grid system, the duct bank grounding system, equipment, ground rods, etc., shall be made using compression type grounding connectors as indicated on the Drawings, UL listed, and labeled for the application.

2. Make ground connections in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Do not conceal or cover any ground connections until the Engineer or authorized representative has established and provided written confirmation that every grounding connection is as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications.

J. Grounding electrode system:

1. Ground ring:
a. Provide trenching and materials necessary to install the ground ring as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Ground ring conductor shall be in direct contact with the earth, or where embedded, concrete, of the size as indicated on the Drawings. c. Minimum burial depth 36 inches or as indicated on the Drawings. d. Re-compact disturbed soils to original density in 6-inch lifts.

2. Ground rods:
a. Locations as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Length of rods forming an individual ground array shall be equal in length. c. Drive ground rods and install grounding conductors before construction of concrete slabs and duct banks.
d. Pre-crimp ground rods, as recommended by the manufacturer, before crimping connector to ground rod.

3. Metal underground water pipe:
a. Bond metal underground domestic water pipe to grounding electrode system.
b. Cathodically protected systems: Bond in accordance with cathodic protection system design requirements.

4. Metal frame of building or structure:
a. Bond metal frame of building or structure to grounding electrode system.

5. Extend grounding conductors through concrete to accessible points for grounding equipment and electrical enclosures.

Grounding and Bonding
16060-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16060 (DraftFinal)

6. Where grounding conductors are exposed and subject to physical damage, install in Schedule 80 PVC conduit for protection.

7. Install grounding system at each structure where switchgear, motor control centers, switchboards, panelboards, panels, or other electrical equipment are installed.

K. Ground magnetic flowmeters as indicated on the Drawings.

L. Shield grounding:

1. Analog signal cables shields shall only be grounded at a single point in the loop. Unless otherwise noted, ground signal cable shields at control panel.

2. For communication and data line signal cable shields and drain wires should be grounded at both ends of the cable run.

3. Insulate the shielding and exposed drain wire for each signal cable with heat-shrink tubing.

4. Terminate the signal cable shield on a dedicated grounding terminal block.

M. Where indicated on the Drawings, install ground rods in precast ground wells.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field electrical acceptance testing:

1. As specified in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.

B. Ground system resistance (electrode to ground) of the completed installation, as determined by tests, shall be:

1. 5 ohms or less for industrial systems.

2. 1 ohm or less for electrical buildings.

C. Measure grounding electrode system resistance to ground in accordance with IEEE 81.

3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Under the direction of the Engineer, add additional parallel connected ground rods and/or deeper driven rods until the ground resistance measurement meets the specified resistance requirements:

1. Use of salts, water, or compounds to attain the specified ground resistance is not acceptable.

END OF SECTION

Hangers and Supports
16070-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16070 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16070

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Mounting and supporting electrical equipment and components.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

2. A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

3. A240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.

4. D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position.

5. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Anchor: Elements (including hardware) connecting hangers and supports to the structure.

2. Hardware: Nuts, bolts, straps, clamps, threaded rod, etc.

3. Supports: Preformed channel or other structural member on which the electrical equipment or raceway is mounted.

1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

B. Anchoring and bracing.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

Hangers and Supports
16070-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16070 (DraftFinal) B. Product data:

1. Supports:
a. Materials.
b. Geometry.
c. Manufacturer.

2. Hardware:
a. Materials.
b. Manufacturer.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Dimensioned and scalable Shop Drawings of hangers and supports for distribution systems and equipment.

2. Complete details for:
a. Member sizes and arrangement in hangers and support assemblies. b. Connections between members in hangers and support assemblies. c. Anchoring hangers and supports to structures.
d. Bracing for hangers and supports and anchoring of bracing to structures.

3. Include data on connections, attachment hardware and construction to demonstrate that hangers and supports will satisfy the design loading, bracing, and anchoring criteria.

D. Delegated Design Submittals:

1. Hangers and supports - General:
a. Locations and conditions:
1) Hangers and supports inside structures.
2) Hangers and supports that resist cable pulling/rigging loads. b. Required Submittals: Details with supporting calculations for:
1) Support member arrangement, sizes, and connections.
2) Bracing to resist cable pulling/rigging loads.
3) Connections of hangers, supports, and bracing to the structure. 4) Connections between supports and the equipment or raceway(s) thereon.

2. Hangers and supports - Exterior and seismic conditions:
a. Locations and conditions:
1) Hangers and supports at structures designated as Seismic Design Category (SDC) C, D, E, or F in Section 01850 - Design Criteria. 2) Hangers and supports for outdoor installations.
b. Required Submittals:
1) Interior: Bracing to resist seismic design loads specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.
2) Exterior: Bracing to resist seismic, wind, and other environmental loads specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

3. Hangers and supports anchored to concrete and masonry:
a. Locations and conditions:
1) Post-installed mechanical anchors in tension.
2) Post-installed adhesive-bonded all-thread rods in tension. b. Required Submittals:
1) Calculations demonstrating that anchors have a demand/capacity ratio (D/C) not greater than the following when anchor capacity is Hangers and Supports
16070-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16070 (DraftFinal) adjusted for moisture conditions, anchor spacing and edge distances, and sustained loading conditions present at the location of installation. a) Post-installed mechanical anchors maximum: 85 percent. b) Post-installed adhesive-bonded anchors maximum: 75 percent.

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Mount raceways, cabinets, boxes, fixtures, instruments, and devices on Contractorfabricated supports unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Hangers and supports individually and as a system shall resist weights and code-required forces without deflections and deformations that would damage the supporting elements, the raceway or equipment supported, or the surrounding construction.

1. Provide the necessary sway bracing to keep support structures from swaying due to lateral forces, including wire and cable pulling forces.

2. Lateral deflection at top of slab mounted supports shall not exceed support height divided by 240, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. Preformed channel:
a. Eaton B-line.
b. Power-Strut.
c. Robroy.
d. Tyco.
e. Unistrut.

2.04 MATERIALS
A. Hot dip galvanized steel:

1. Supports:
a. In accordance with ASTM A123 or A153.
b. Minimum zinc coating thickness of 2.5 mils.
c. Nominal dimensions: 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch.

Hangers and Supports
16070-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16070 (DraftFinal)

2. Hardware:
a. Electro-galvanized.
b. In accordance with ASTM A153.

B. Stainless steel:

1. Supports:
a. In accordance with ASTM A240.
b. ANSI Type 316 material.
c. Nominal dimensions: 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch.

2. Hardware:
a. ANSI Type 316 material.

C. PVC coated galvanized steel:

1. Supports:
a. Hot dip galvanized steel as specified in this Section. b. PVC coating thickness of 10 to 20 mils.
c. Nominal dimensions: 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch.

2. Hardware:
a. ANSI Type 316 material.

D. Fiberglass:

1. Supports:
a. Vinyl ester.
b. Nominal dimensions: 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch.
c. Flame spread rating of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84. d. Tested in accordance with ASTM D635.

2. Hardware:
a. Polypropylene.
b. Thermal plastic elastomer.
c. Fiberglass reinforced plastic.

2.05 COMPONENTS
A. Fabricated metal supports: As specified in Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.

2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchors:

1. As specified in Section 05190 - Mechanical Anchoring and Fastening to Concrete and Masonry.

2.07 FINISHES
A. Paint and finish structures as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.

Hangers and Supports
16070-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16070 (DraftFinal) PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Anchoring and bracing to structures:

1. Prepare equipment anchor setting template(s) and use to position anchors during construction of supporting structure(s).

2. Install anchors of type and material indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3. Install anchors with embedment indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Use materials appropriate for the area as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. General:

1. Refer to the Drawings for details. Equipment, cabinets, boxes, instruments, and devices in damp or wet locations on minimum of 7/8-inch preformed mounting channel.

2. Mount channel vertically along the length of the device so that water or moisture may run freely behind the device.

C. Corrosion protection:

1. Isolate dissimilar metals, except where required for electrical continuity. a. Use neoprene washers, 9-mil polyethylene tape, or gaskets for isolation.

D. Anchoring methods:

1. Solid concrete:
a. Anchor bolts, anchor rods or post-installed anchors as specified in Section 05190 - Mechanical Anchoring and Fastening to Concrete and Masonry.

2. Metal surfaces: Machine screws or bolts.

3. Hollow masonry units:
a. Post installed anchors as specified in Section 05190 - Mechanical Anchoring and Fastening to Concrete and Masonry.

4. Wood and metal studs:
a. When supporting devices on metal or wood stud construction, bridge studs with preformed channel, and mount the devices to the channel.

E. Recoat or seal drilled holes, cut or scratched surfaces or with products recommended by the manufacturer.

F. Group raceway and position on racks to minimize crossovers.

END OF SECTION

Identification for Electrical Systems
16075-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16075 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16075

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Identification of electrical equipment, devices and components.

2. Material, manufacturing and installation requirements for identification devices.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Nameplates:
a. Color.
b. Size:
1) Outside dimensions.
2) Lettering.
c. Material.
d. Mounting means.

2. Nameplate schedule:
a. Show exact wording for each nameplate.
b. Include nameplate and letter sizes.

3. Wire numbers:
a. Manufacturer’s catalog data for wire labels and label printer.

C. Record documents:

1. Update the conduit schedule to reflect the exact quantity of wire numbers, including spares and destination points for all wires.

1.04 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

Identification for Electrical Systems
16075-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16075 (DraftFinal)

1.05 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Nameplates:

1. Provide for control panel operator devices (e.g., pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights, etc.):
a. Same material and same color and appearance as the device nameplates to achieve an aesthetically consistent and coordinated system.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Nameplates:

1. Provide for each piece of electrical equipment, device, control panel, and control panel components.

2. Identical style, color, and material throughout the facility.

3. Device nameplates information:
a. Equipment tag number as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Wire numbers:

1. Coordinate the wire numbering system with vendors of equipment so that every field wire has a unique number associated with it for the entire system:
a. Correspond to the wire numbers on the control drawings or the panel and circuit numbers for receptacles and lighting.
b. Correspond to the terminal block number to which they are attached in the control panel.
c. Internal panel wires on a common terminal shall have the same wire number.
d. Multi-conductor cables shall be assigned a cable number that shall be attached to the cable at intermediate pull boxes and stub-up locations beneath freestanding equipment. Multi-conductor and instrumentation cables shall be identified at pull points as described above:
1) Label armored multi-conductor cable using the conduit number as indicated on the Drawings, following the requirements for conduit markers specified in Section 16130 - Conduits.

2. Provide the following wiring numbering schemes throughout the Project for field wires between process control module (PCM), vendor control panels (VCP), motor control centers (MCC), field starters, field instruments, etc.

Identification for Electrical Systems
16075-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16075 (DraftFinal) OR:

Where:

ORIGIN LOC. = Designation for originating panel or device ORIGIN TERM. = Terminal designation at originating panel or device DEST. LOC. = Designation for destination panel or device DEST. TERM. = Terminal designation at destination panel or device or PLC

3. I/O address at destination panel:
a. Identify equipment and field instruments as the origin. b. PCMs are always identified as the destination.
c. Location is the panel designation for VCP, LCP, or PCM. For connections to MCCs, location is the specific starter tag and loop number. Location is the tag and loop number for motor starters, field instruments and equipment. Any hyphen in the panel designation or tag and loop number shall be omitted.
d. Terminal designation is the actual number on the terminal block where the conductor terminates at field devices and vendor control panels. For multiconductor cables, all terminal numbers shall be shown, separated by commas.
e. Terminal designations at motor leads shall be the motor manufacturer’s standard terminal designation (e.g., T1, T2, T3, etc.). f. Terminal designations at PCMs where the field conductor connects to field terminal blocks for a PLC input or output shall be the PLC address (Note: The following PLC I/O numbering scheme is typical for Allen-Bradley. The numbering scheme should be modified to match that of the actual PLC manufacturer used for the Project):

Discrete Point: W:X:Y/Z.

Analog Point: W:X:Y.Z.

Where:

W = I for input, O for output.

X = PLC number (1, 2, 3…)
Y = Slot number (01, 02, 03…)
Z = Terminal number (00, 01, 02…) for a discrete point or a word number for an analog point (1, 2, 3…)
g. Terminal designations at PCMs where the conductor does not connect to a PLC I/O point shall be the terminal number with a “C” prefix (e.g., C0010). For common power after a fuse or neutrals after a switch, the subsequent points shall have and capital letter suffix starting with “A” (e.g., C0010A).

Identification for Electrical Systems
16075-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16075 (DraftFinal)

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. Nameplates and signs:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Brady.
b. Seton.

B. Conductor and cable markers:

1. Heat-shrinkable tubing:
a. One of the following or equal:
1) Brady.
2) Kroy.
3) Panduit.
4) Raychem.

2. Non heat-shrinkable tubing:
a. One of the following or equal:
1) Brady.
2) Panduit.
3) Seton.

C. Conduit and raceway markers:

1. Brass: One of the following or equal:
a. Panduit.

2.04 MATERIALS
A. Nameplates:

1. Colors:
a. Warning: White-center, red face.
b. Other: Black-center, white face.

2. Laminated plastic engraving stock:
a. 3/32-inch thick material.
b. 2-ply.

3. With chamfered edges.

4. Lettering:
a. Block style engraved characters of adequate size to be read easily from a distance of 6 feet.
b. Minimum letter height: 1/8 inch.

B. Signs:

1. Automatic equipment and high voltage signs:
a. Suitable for exterior use.
b. In accordance with OSHA regulations.

C. Conductor and cable markers:

1. Lettering:
a. Machine printed black characters on white tubing.
b. Minimum letter height: 10-point type or larger.

Identification for Electrical Systems
16075-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16075 (DraftFinal) D. Conduit and raceway markers:

1. Solid brass:
a. Minimum thickness: 0.036 inches.
b. Minimum dimensions: 1/2- inch wide, 2-inches long.
c. Letter and number characters: Engraved.
d. Minimum letter height: 1/4-inch.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Nameplates:

1. Attach to equipment with rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws, approved waterproof epoxy-based cement or install in metal holders welded to the equipment.

2. Provide for each disconnecting means with the following:
a. Equipment served, voltage, and fuse size as required. b. Identification of the circuit source that supplies the disconnecting means.

3. On NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X enclosures, use epoxy-based cement to attach nameplates.

4. Aligned and level or plumb to within 1/32 inch over the entire length:
a. Misaligned or crooked nameplates shall be remounted or new enclosures shall be provided at the discretion of the Engineer.

B. Conductor and cable markers:

1. Apply before termination.

2. Heat-shrinkable tubing:
a. Shrunk using a heat gun that produces low temperature heated air. b. Tight on the wire after it has been heated.
c. Characters shall face the open panel and shall read from left to right or top to bottom.
d. Marker shall start within 1/32 inch of the end of the stripped insulation point.

C. Conduit markers:

1. Furnish and install markers for every conduit in the electrical system that is identified in the conduit schedule or part of the process system:
a. Markings shall match the conduit schedule.

2. Mark conduits at the following locations:
a. At each end of the conduit.
b. Within 3 feet of any pull box, electrical equipment, or control panel. c. Where the conduit penetrates a wall, structure, manhole, or handhole. d. Where the conduit emerges from the ground, slab, etc.

3. Position conduit markers so that they are easily read from the floor.

4. Attach brass tags with 18 gauge Type 304 stainless steel wire.

5. Mark conduits before construction review by the Engineer for punch list purposes.

Identification for Electrical Systems
16075-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16075 (DraftFinal) D. Signs and labeling:

1. Furnish and install permanent warning signs at mechanical equipment that may be started automatically or from remote locations:
a. Fasten warning signs with round head stainless steel screws or bolts. b. Locate and mount in a manner to be clearly legible to operations personnel.

2. Furnish and install warning signs on equipment that has more than one source of power.
a. Warning signs to identify every panel and circuit number of the disconnecting means of external power sources.

3. Place warning signs on equipment that has 120 VAC control voltage source used for interlocking.
a. Identify panel and circuit number or conductor tag for control voltage source disconnecting means.

4. Label service entrance equipment, switchgear, switchboards, MCCs, panelboards, and transfer switches with the available short circuit current, equipment label, and date of application in accordance with NEC. Coordinate with Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies for available fault current data.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Replace any nameplates, signs, conductor markers, cable markers, or raceway labels that in the sole opinion of the Engineer do not meet the Engineer’s aesthetic requirements.

END OF SECTION
600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables
16123-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16123 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16123
600-VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. 600-volt class or less wire and cable.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations:

1. AWG: American wire gauge.

2. BCCS: Bare copper-covered steel.

3. CPE: Chlorinated polyethylene.

4. FHDPE: Foam high-density polyethylene.

5. FPE: Foam polyethylene.

6. OD: Outside diameter.

7. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.

8. XHHW: Cross-linked high heat water resistant insulated wire.

B. Standards:

1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. b. B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft.

2. CSA International (CSA).

3. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):
a. S-90-661 - Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables for Use in Communication Wiring Systems.

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/Insulated Cable Engineers Association (NEMA/ICEA):
a. NEMA WC 66/ICEA S-116-732 - Standard for Category 6 and 6A, 100 Ohm, Individually Unshielded Twisted Pairs, Indoor Cables (With or Without an Overall Shield) for Use in LAN Communication Wiring Systems. b. NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658-1999 - Standard for Power Cables Rated 2,000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy.

5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).
b. 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.

6. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA):
a. 568.2-D - Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard.
b. 569-B - Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables
16123-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16123 (DraftFinal)

7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
a. 44 - Standard for Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables. b. 1666 - Standard for Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Manufacturer of wire and cable.

2. Insulation:
a. Type.
b. Voltage class.

3. AWG size.

4. Conductor material.

5. Pulling compounds.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Show splice locations.
a. For each proposed splice location provide written justification describing why the splice is necessary.

D. Test reports:

1. Submit test reports for meg-ohm tests.

E. Calculations:

1. Submit cable pulling calculations for cables that will be installed using mechanical pulling equipment. Show that the maximum cable tension and sidewall pressure will not exceed manufacturer recommended values:
a. Provide a table showing the manufacturer’s recommended maximum cable tension and sidewall pressure for each cable type and size included in the calculations.
b. Submit the calculations to the Engineer a minimum of 2 weeks before conduit installation.

F. Cable lengths:

1. Submit installed cable lengths using a conduit measuring tape for 3-phase circuits.

2. Submit installed lengths of cable for the following single-phase circuits:
a. Circuits feeding single-phase transformers.
b. Circuits feeding single-phase panelboards.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Wires and cables shall be UL listed and labeled.

1.05 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. General Site and Project conditions:

1. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.
600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables
16123-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16123 (DraftFinal)

1.06 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Color-coding:

1. Color-coding shall be consistent throughout the facility.

2. The following color code shall be followed for 240/120-volt and 208/120-volt systems:
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
c. Phase C: Blue.
d. Single phase system: Black for 1 hot leg, red for the other. e. Neutral: White.
f. High phase or wild leg: Orange.
g. Equipment ground: Green.

3. The following color code shall be followed for 480/277-volt systems:
a. Phase A: Brown.
b. Phase B: Orange.
c. Phase C: Yellow.
d. Neutral: Gray.
e. Equipment ground: Green.

4. The following color code shall be followed for 120 VAC control wiring:
a. Power: Red.
b. Neutral: White.

5. The following color code shall be followed for general purpose DC control circuits:
a. Grounded conductors: White with blue stripe.
b. Ungrounded conductors: Blue.

6. Switch legs shall be violet. 3-way switch runners shall be pink.

7. Wires in intrinsically safe circuits shall be light blue.

8. Wire colors shall be implemented in the following methods:
a. Number 2 AWG and smaller: Wires manufactured of the desired color. b. Number 1 AWG and larger by one of the following:
1) Wire manufactured of the desired color.
2) Continuously spiral wrap the first 6 inches of the wire from the termination point with colored tape:
a) Colored tape shall be wrapped to overlap half of the width of the tape.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following, or equal:

1. 600-volt class wire and cable:
a. Okonite Co.
b. Prysmian General Cable.
c. Service Wire.
600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables
16123-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16123 (DraftFinal) d. Southwire Co.

2. 600-volt VFD cable:
a. Prysmian General Cable.
b. Service Wire.
c. Southwire Co.

3. Instrumentation class wire and cable:
a. Alpha Wire Co.
b. Belden CDT.
c. Okonite Co.
d. Prysmian General Cable.
e. Rockbestos Surprenant Cable Corp.

4. Network cables:
a. Belden.
b. CommScope.
c. General Cable.

2.03 MATERIALS
A. Conductors:

1. Copper in accordance with ASTM B3.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. General:

1. Provide new wires and cables manufactured within 1 year of the date of delivery to the Site.

2. Permanently mark each wire and cable with the following at 24-inch intervals:
a. AWG size.
b. Voltage rating.
c. Insulation type.
d. UL symbol.
e. Month and year of manufacture.
f. Manufacturer’s name.

3. Identify and mark wire and cable as specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems:
a. Use integral color insulation for #2 AWG and smaller wire. b. Wrap colored tape around cable larger than #2 AWG.

B. 600-volt class wire and cable:

1. Provide AWG or kcmil sizes as indicated on the Drawings or in the Conduit Schedules:
a. When not indicated on the Drawings, size wire as follows:
1) In accordance with the NEC:
a) Use 75-degree Celsius ampacity ratings.
b) Ampacity rating after derating factors, equal to or greater than rating of the overcurrent device.
2) Provide #12 AWG minimum for power conductors.
3) Provide #14 AWG minimum for control conductors.

2. Provide Class B stranding in accordance with ASTM B8:
a. Provide Class C stranding where extra flexibility is required. 600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables
16123-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16123 (DraftFinal)

3. Insulation:
a. XHHW-2.
b. 90-degree Celsius rating.

C. 600-volt VFD cables:

1. Conductor:
a. Provide Class B stranding in accordance with ASTM B3 and B8. b. Copper conductor.

2. Insulation:
a. Cross-linked Polyethylene, XLPE.
b. 90-degree Celsius rating.
c. UL 44 Type RHH/RHW-2 or XHHW-2.
d. 2,000 volts.

3. Ground:
a. Provide Class B compressed stranded bare copper in accordance with ASTM B3 and B8.
b. 3 symmetrically placed bare copper conductors in direct contact with shield.
c. Equivalent ground size 50 percent of the phase conductor size.

4. Filler:
a. Cable sizes 8 and 6 use polypropylene filler.
b. Other cable sizes use paper filler.

5. Metallic shield:
a. Overall 5 mil bare copper tape shield with 50 percent overlap.

6. Outer jacket:
a. UL 1277 Type PVC.

7. Cable tray rated, UL Type TC-ER.

D. Instrumentation class cable:

1. Type TC.

2. Suitable for use in wet locations.

3. Voltage rating: 600 volts.

4. Temperature rating:
a. 90-degree Celsius rating in dry locations.
b. 75-degree Celsius rating in wet locations.

5. Conductors:
a. Insulation:
1) Flame-retardant PVC, 15 mils nominal thickness, with nylon jacket 4 mils nominal thickness.
b. #16 AWG stranded and tinned.
c. Color code: ICEA Method 1:
1) Pair: Black and white.
2) Triad: Black, white and red.
3) Multiple pairs or triads:
a) Color-coded and numbered.

6. Drain wire:
a. #18 AWG.
b. Stranded, tinned.

7. Jacket:
a. Flame retardant, moisture and sunlight resistant PVC. b. Ripcord laid longitudinally under jacket to facilitate removal. 600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables
16123-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16123 (DraftFinal)

8. Shielding:
a. Individual pair/triad:
1) Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum foil-polyester tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
b. Multiple pair or triad shielding:
1) Group shield: Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum foil-polyester tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 2) Completely isolate group shields from each other.
3) Cable shield: 2.35-mil double-faced aluminum and synthetic polymer backed tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. c. Shielding to be in contact with the drain wire.

E. Network cables:

1. Copper Ethernet cable:
a. Provide copper Ethernet cable types as indicated on the Drawings and Specifications.
b. General requirements:
1) Cables shall meet the standards set by TIA-568.2-D and verified by third-party testing laboratory.
2) Conductors:
a) 4 balanced twisted pairs.
(1) #22 to #24 AWG thermoplastic insulated solid copper conducts enclosed by a thermoplastic jacket. Copper clad aluminum is not allowed.
3) Insulation:
a) Non-Plenum: Polyolefin.
b) Plenum: Fluoropolymer.
4) Color coded per T568B.
5) Outer jacket with ripcord.
6) Shielding:
a) Provide F/UTP cables with drain wire for cables inside any equipment or enclosure with 480 VAC and above, outdoor
installations, and where indicated on the Drawings.
7) Voltage rating:
a) At a minimum provide 300 VAC rated jacket.
b) 600 VAC rated jacket when cables are inside equipment or enclosures that contain 480 VAC power.
8) Approvals and listings:
a) Meets any necessary NEC and NFPA requirements for each application.
b) Riser applications: CMR in accordance with UL 1666.
c) Plenum applications: CMP in accordance with NFPA 262. 9) Certification:
a) Provide Category 6 cables with NEMA WC 66/ICEA S-116-732 certification.
600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables
16123-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16123 (DraftFinal)

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Wire ties:

1. One of the following, or equal:
a. Panduit, cable ties.
b. T&B, “Ty-Rap” cable ties.

B. Wire markers:

1. As specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Assembly and testing of cable shall comply with the applicable requirements of NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658-1999.

B. Test Type XHHW-2 in accordance with the requirements of UL 44.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install conductors only after the conduit installation is complete, and enclosures have been vacuumed clean, and the affected conduits have been swabbed clean and dry:

1. Install wires only in approved raceways.

2. Do not install wire:
a. In incomplete conduit runs.
b. Until after the concrete work and plastering is completed.

B. Properly coat wires and cables with pulling compound before pulling into conduits:

1. For #4 AWG and larger, use an approved wire-pulling lubricant while cable is being installed in conduit:
a. Ideal Products.
b. Polywater Products.
c. 3M Products.
d. Greenlee Products.
e. Or equal, as recommended by cable manufacturer.
f. Do not use oil, grease, or similar substances.

C. Cable pulling:

1. Prevent mechanical damage to conductors during installation.

2. For cables #1 AWG and smaller, install cables by hand.

3. For cables larger than #1 AWG, power pulling winches may be used if they have cable tension monitoring equipment.

4. Provide documentation that maximum cable pulling tension was no more than 75 percent of the maximum recommended level as published by the cable manufacturer. If exceeded, the Engineer may, at his discretion, require replacement of the cable.

5. Ensure cable pulling crews have calculations and cable pulling limitations while pulling cable.
600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables
16123-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16123 (DraftFinal)

6. Make splices or add a junction box or pullbox where required to prevent cable pulling tension or sidewall pressure from exceeding 75 percent of the manufacturer’s recommendation for the specified cable size:
a. Make splices in manholes or pull boxes only.
b. Leave sufficient slack to make proper connections.

D. Install and terminate wire in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Neatly arrange and lace conductors in switchboards, panelboards, pull boxes, and terminal cabinets by means of wire ties:

1. Do not lace wires in gutter or panel channel.

2. Install wire ties with a flush cutting wire tie installation tool:
a. Use a tool with an adjustable tension setting.

3. Do not leave sharp edges on wire ties.

F. Terminate stranded conductors on equipment box lugs such that conductor strands are confined within the lug:

1. Use ring type lugs if box lugs are not available on the equipment.

G. Lighting circuits:

1. Each circuit shall have a dedicated neutral.

H. Splices:

1. Provide continuous circuits from origin to termination whenever possible:
a. Obtain the Engineer’s approval prior to making any splices.

2. Lighting and receptacle circuit conductors may be spliced without prior approval from the Engineer.

3. Where splices are necessary because of extremely long wire or cable lengths that exceed standard manufactured lengths:
a. Splice box NEMA rating requirements as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
b. Make splices in labeled junction boxes for power conductors. c. Make splices for control and instrument conductors in terminal boxes:
1) Provide terminal boards with setscrew pressure connectors, with spade or ring lug connectors.

4. Power and control conductors routed in common raceways may be spliced in common junction boxes.

5. Clearly label junction and terminal boxes containing splices with the word “SPLICE LOCATED WITHIN”.

6. Leave sufficient slack at junction boxes and termination boxes to make proper splices and connections. Do not pull splices into conduits.

7. Install splices with compression type butt splices and insulate using a heat-shrink sleeve:
a. In NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X areas, provide heat-shrink sleeves that are listed for submersible applications.

8. Splices in below grade pull boxes, in any box subject to flooding, and in wet areas shall be made waterproof using:
a. A heat shrink insulating system listed for submersible applications. b. Or an epoxy resin splicing kit.
600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables
16123-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16123 (DraftFinal) I. Apply wire markers to wires at each end after being installed in the conduit and before meg-ohm testing and termination.

J. Instrumentation class cable:

1. Install instrumentation class cables in separate raceway systems from power cables:
a. Install instrument cable in metallic conduit within non-dedicated manholes or pull boxes.
b. Install cable without splices between instruments or between field devices and instrument enclosures or panels.

2. Do not make intermediate terminations, except in designated terminal boxes as indicated on the Drawings.

3. Shield grounding requirements as specified in Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding.

K. Copper Ethernet cables:

1. In accordance with TIA-568.2-D.

2. Pathways:
a. For initial installation, the maximum fill capacity for pathways (i.e., conduit, raceways, trays, baskets) is 40 percent. The maximum fill capacity of 60 percent is allowed to accommodate future additions after initial installation.
b. Conduit should be run in the most direct route possible with no more than two 90-degree bends between pull boxes and serve no more than 3 outlet boxes.

3. Cable bend radius:
a. Proper cable bend radius control must be maintained throughout the pathways. Bend radius needs to be at a minimum 10 times the cable diameter.

4. Cable pulling:
a. Provide cable pulling swivel system to prevent winding and tangling of rope and cables during pull.
b. Maximum pulling tension is not to exceed the manufacturer’s recommendations. Cable installation should not in any way deform the cable jacket.
c. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

5. Cable management:
a. Organize and manage cables for quick and easy moves, adds and changes.

6. Cable termination:
a. Install equipment outlet connector hardware (e.g., RJ45, M12, etc.), and connect to field equipment outlet (e.g., instrument, VFD, actuator, etc.). b. Use shielded connectors as required by the installation. c. Coordinate cable termination at copper patch panels with ICSC and General Contractor.

7. Testing:
a. Copper Ethernet cable testing requirements as specified in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.
600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables
16123-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16123 (DraftFinal)

8. Separation from EMI sources:
a. Comply with TIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.
b. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
1) Electrical equipment rating less than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. 2) Electrical equipment rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.
3) Electrical equipment rating more than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. c. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
1) Electrical equipment rating less than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches.
2) Electrical equipment rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.
3) Electrical equipment rating more than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. d. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:
1) Electrical equipment rating less than 2 kVA: No requirement. 2) Electrical equipment rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches.
3) Electrical equipment rating more than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. e. Separation between communications cables and electrical motors and transformers, 5 kVA or HP and larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

L. Signal cable:

1. Separate and isolate electrical signal cables from sources of electrical noise and power cables by a minimum of 12 inches.

M. Wiring allowances:

1. Equipment locations may vary slightly from the Drawings. Include an allowance for necessary conductors and terminations for motorized equipment, electrical outlets, fixtures, communication outlets, instruments, and devices within 10 linear feet of locations indicated on the Drawings.

2. Locations for pull boxes, manholes, and duct banks may vary slightly from the Drawings. Include an allowance for necessary conductors and related materials to provide conductors to pull boxes, manholes and duct banks within 20-linear feet of locations indicated on the Drawings.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field electrical acceptance testing:

1. As specified in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.

END OF SECTION
Fiber Optic Cable and Appurtenances
16125-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16125 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16125

FIBER OPTIC CABLE AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Fiber optic cable.

2. Fiber splices and terminations.

3. Accessories.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations:

1. N/Cm: Newtons per centimeter.

2. OTDR: Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (Tier 2 test).

3. OTLS: Optical Loss Test Set (Tier 1 test).

B. Standards:

1. Bellcore Standards:
a. GR-409 - Generic Requirements for Indoor Fiber.

2. Electronic Industry Association (EIA):
a. FOTP-25 - Impact testing of Fiber Optic Cables and Cable Assemblies. b. FOTP-33 - Fiber Optic Cable Tensile Loading and Bending Test. c. FOTP-41 - Compressive Loading Resistance of Fiber Optic Cables. d. FOTP-81 - Compound Flow (Drip) Test for Filled Fiber Optic Cable. e. FOTP-104 - Fiber Optic Cable Cyclic Flexing Test.
f. FOTP-181 - Lightning Damage Susceptibility Test for Fiber Optic Cables with Metallic Components.

3. Insulated Cable Engineer’s Association (ICEA):
a. S-83-596 - Optic Fiber Premises Distribution Cables. b. S-87-640 - Optic Fiber Outside Plant Communications Cable. c. S-104-696 - Indoor-Outdoor Optic Fiber Cable.

4. TIA/EIA Standards:
a. 598 - Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.
b. 11801 - Information technology - Generic cabling for customer premises.

5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a. 1666 - Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts.
b. 1685 - Vertical-Tray Fire-Propagation and Smoke-Release Test for Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

Fiber Optic Cable and Appurtenances
16125-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16125 (DraftFinal)

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Complete manufacturer’s brochures that identify materials and options.

2. Completed datasheets, including catalog number and source for determining catalog number.

3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

4. Include the following:
a. Manufacturer’s data on testing equipment used on this Project. b. Manufacturer’s specifications and datasheets for all fiber types. c. Manufacturer’s specifications and datasheets for all connectors, bulkheads, splicing kits, breakout devices, and appurtenances used in connecting and terminating fiber spans.

5. Catalog data on testing devices proposed for use plus certifications of accuracy, calibration, and traceability to standards of the NIST.

6. Manufacturer’s test procedures and quality assurance procedures:
a. After review, the Engineer may require that additional tests be performed before installation.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Interconnection cabling diagrams for the complete system including every fiber in each cable.

2. Drawings indicating locations of all pull boxes including pull box identifiers and lengths.

3. Submit optical power budget calculations for fiber segments. Include the following:
a. Minimum transmit power of active devices.
b. Minimum receive sensitivity.
c. Available power, in dBm.
d. Loss for each segment in dBm, including cable attenuation and connector losses. Use manufacturer’s data for cable attenuation at the wavelength to be used. Assume 0.5 dB per connector.
e. Demonstrate that remaining power budget at each receiver is equal to or greater than 3.0 dBm.

D. Calculations:

1. Cable pulling calculations for conduit runs:
a. Indicate on the Submittal any additional pull boxes that are required, including pull box identifiers and a written description of the location.

E. Installation instructions:

1. Submit a cable pulling and splicing work plan that includes the following:
a. Pull tension calculations.
b. Detailed description of pull operation methods for conduit runs. c. Tools and equipment to be used for cable installation and testing. d. Physical location of equipment setup and type.
e. Exact locations of splice points.
f. Safety and manual assist cable-pulling operations.
g. Detailed schedule for pulling and testing cables.

Fiber Optic Cable and Appurtenances
16125-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16125 (DraftFinal) h. Name and qualifications of the supervisory personnel directly responsible for installation of the conduit system.
i. Sample fiber optic cable test sheets.
j. Signed test sheet results.

F. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s representative qualifications.

2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

3. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

G. Test reports:

1. Submit results of specified tests to the Engineer.

2. Submit 3 copies of test reports showing results of tests specified in this Section or in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests:
a. Test forms shall include the following information at a minimum:
1) Test type.
2) Test location.
3) Test date.
4) Wavelength.
5) Index of refraction.
6) Cable identification.
7) Fiber type.
8) Fiber number.
9) Fiber color.
10) Result of the value of the tested parameter.

3. Furnish hard copy and electronic copy for OTDR traces.

4. Submit certification that the fiber optic cable has passed each testing stage:
a. Submit separate documentation for each testing stage result.

H. Operation and maintenance manuals:

1. As specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

I. Record documents:

1. Furnish updated electrical drawings, network diagrams, and fiber cable block diagrams at the end of construction and submit as record drawings.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish cable and appurtenances manufactured within 1 year of installation.

B. Proof test optical fibers by the fiber manufacturer at a minimum load of 50 kpsi.

C. Provide 100 percent attenuation testing for optical fibers:

1. Include with each cable reel the attenuation of each fiber.

D. Provide information on at least 5 successful fiber optic cable installations of comparable size and complexity in the past 3 years with name, address, and telephone number of facility owner, name of project with completion date, and type of conduit system and length of cable pulled.

Fiber Optic Cable and Appurtenances
16125-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16125 (DraftFinal)

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package cable for shipment on wooden reels:

1. Seal both ends of cable to prevent ingress of moisture.

2. Place fiber cable assemblies on reels such that both cable ends are available for testing.

3. Weatherproof cable reel markings shall include the following:
a. Manufacturer.
b. Date of manufacture.
c. Shipping date.
d. Cable identification.
e. Cable configuration/fiber count.
f. Cable length.
g. Gross weight.
h. Cable test date.
i. Handling instructions.
j. Direction to unreel.

1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.08 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sequencing:

1. Submit a cable pulling and splicing work plan a minimum of 45 days before the planned initiation of cable pulling. Cable pulling and splicing work plan must be approved a minimum of 15 days before pulling cable.

2. Testing sequence:
a. Perform testing of each fiber in each cable as follows:
1) At factory before shipment.
2) At Project Site upon delivery.
3) Submit copies of test results to the Engineer within 5 days after the delivery to the site.
4) After installation, before breakout and terminations. 5) After installation is complete.
b. Submit test reports following each set of tests as specified in this Section.

B. Scheduling:

1. Schedule Engineer, 5 days before installation, to witness cable installations.

2. Notify the Engineer and Owner a minimum of 15 days before post-installation testing.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

Fiber Optic Cable and Appurtenances
16125-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16125 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Furnish a complete fiber optic network as indicated on the Drawings.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Install fiber optic system components in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers are indicated with each component type as listed in the remainder of this Specification.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. General fiber cable requirements:

1. Suitable for the installed environment.

2. Color-coded fibers according to TIA/EIA-598.

3. Color-coded buffer tubes according to TIA/EIA-598.

4. Furnish buffer tubes of a single layer nylon construction or of a material with similar mechanical performance.

5. Fillers may be included in the cable core to lend symmetry to the cable cross-section where needed.

6. Apply binders with sufficient tension to secure buffer tubes to the central member without crushing the buffer tubes:
a. Provide binders that are:
1) Non-hygroscopic.
2) Non-wicking (or rendered so by the flooding compound). 3) Dielectric with low shrinkage.

7. Provide a minimum of 1 ripcord under the cable sheath.

8. Provide high tensile strength Aramid yarns, Kevlar, and/or fiberglass helically stranded evenly around the cable core:
a. No metallic elements whatsoever are allowed in non-armored cable.

9. Jacket or sheath shall be free of holes, splits, and blisters.

10. Mark jacket or sheath with:
a. Manufacturer’s name.
b. “Optical Cable”.
c. Year of manufacture.
d. Sequential meter marks.
e. Repeat markings every 1-meter.
f. Actual length of the cable to be within 1 percent of the length marking. g. Marking must be in a contrasting color to the cable jacket. h. Height of the marking:
1) Approximately 2.5 millimeters.

11. Shipping, storage, and operating temperature range of the cable shall be -40 degrees Celsius to +70 degrees Celsius.

Fiber Optic Cable and Appurtenances
16125-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16125 (DraftFinal)

12. General performance characteristics:
a. Rated tensile load of the cables:
1) Indoor/outdoor:
a) Short term: 1,330 N.
b) Long term: 400 N.
b. Non-armored fiber optic cables: Compressive load withstand of 220 N/cm applied uniformly over the length of the cable.
c. Armored fiber optic cables: Compressive load withstand of 440 N/cm applied uniformly over the length of the cable.
d. Average increase in attenuation for the fibers: Less than or equal to

0.10 dB at 1,550 nm for a cable subjected to this load:
1) With no measurable increase in attenuation after load removal. e. Test in accordance with EIA FOTP-41 except that the load must be applied at the rate of 3 millimeters to 20 millimeters per minute and maintained for 10 minutes.
f. Capable of withstanding 25 cycles of mechanical flexing at a rate of 30 within 1 cycles/minute.
g. Average increase in attenuation for the fibers: Less than or equal to

0.10 dB at 1,550 nm at the completion of the test.
h. For armored cables, any visible cracks causing separation of the armor and propagating more than 5 millimeters constitutes failure. i. Outer cable jacket cracking or splitting observed under 10X times magnification, constitutes failure.

B. Indoor/outdoor cable:

1. Cable construction:
a. General:
1) Cable type: Indoor/Outdoor - Flame retardant, low smoke, zero halogen, UV resistant.
2) Fiber count: As indicated on the Drawings.
3) Fiber type: As indicated on the Drawings.
4) Buffer tube: Loose tube.
5) Armoring: None.
6) Waterproofing: Water blocking layer.
7) Strength member:
a) Loose tube: Utilize a central, nonmetallic strength member with a coefficient of thermal expansion similar to the fibers as the central anti-buckling member.
8) Approvals and listings: UL 1666 and UL 1685.
9) Design and test criteria: In accordance with ICEA S-104-696. b. Testing:
1) Fibers in the cable:
a) Proof test of 100 kpsi.
b) Each optical fiber: Bellcore GR-409 strip force testing. c) No gaps are allowed between the coating material and the buffer material visible under a 50-power microscope.
c. Outer jacket material:
1) Linear low-density polyethylene.
2) Meet requirements of the NEC for use in indoor/outdoor areas (excluding plenums) without being enclosed in conduit.
3) Flame retardant OFNR riser rated conforming to UL 1666.

Fiber Optic Cable and Appurtenances
16125-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16125 (DraftFinal) 4) Printed with necessary UL marks and manufacturer identification. 5) Sequential printing of footage in 2-foot increments. 6) With a ripcord incorporated under the cable jacket.

C. Single mode fibers:

1. Fibers in the cable must be usable fibers and meet required specifications.

2. Each optical fiber shall consist of a doped silica core surrounded by a concentric silica cladding.

3. Single mode fiber characteristics:
a. Category: OS2 compliant with ITU-G.657.A1.
b. Jacket color: Yellow.

D. Indoor/outdoor:

1. Tight buffer:
a. Corning Cable Systems, Freedm® One.
b. Optical Cable Corporation, DX-Series.
c. CommScope, LazrSPEED/TerraSPEED.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Patch cords:

1. General:
a. Connector types to match supplied equipment and patch panel terminations.
b. Maximum length of patch cords: 25 feet.
c. Provide 2 spare patch cords (or 1 duplex patch cord) of each type used at each PLC or network cabinet.
d. Factory assembled and optically tested.
e. Provide mode-conditioning cords for multimode fibers operating at 1,310 nm.

2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. CommScope.
b. Corning Cable Systems.

B. Fiber connectors:

1. As specified in Section 17733 - Control Systems: Network Materials and Equipment.

C. Fiber optic identification/warning tags:

1. Black letters on orange or yellow background.

2. UV resistant polyethylene or other suitable material:
a. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
1) Almetek.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Source Testing:

1. Before shipment and while on the shipping reel, test 100 percent of fibers for attenuation:
a. Copies of the results shall be:
1) Maintained on file.

Fiber Optic Cable and Appurtenances
16125-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16125 (DraftFinal) 2) Attached to the cable reel in a waterproof pouch.
3) Submitted before the delivery of the cable to the job Site to the Engineer for approval.

2. Conduct the flex test in accordance with EIA FOTP-104 test condition I and III with a maximum sheave diameter of 20 times the cable OD.

3. Verify that the cable withstands 25 impact cycles with:
a. Average increase in attenuation for fibers less than 0.20 dB at 1,550 nm. b. No evidence of cracking or splitting.
c. Conduct test in accordance with EIA FOTP-25.

4. Certify that the cable withstands a tensile load of 2,700 N (600 pounds):
a. Without exhibiting an average increase in attenuation of greater than

0.10 dB.
b. Test in accordance with EIA FOTP-33 using a maximum mandrel and sheave diameter of 560 millimeters.
c. Apply the load for 1 hour in test condition II.

5. Certify that the cable withstands a simulated lightning strike:
a. Peak value of the current pulse greater than 105 kA. b. Use a test current with a damped oscillatory maximum time-to-peak value of 15 µs (which corresponds to a minimum frequency of 16.7 kHz) and a maximum frequency of 30 kHz.
c. Time to half-value of the waveform envelope 40 to 70 µs. d. Conduct the test in accordance with the EIA FOTP-181. e. In addition to the analysis criterion set forth in EIA FOTP-181, the integrity of the buffer tubes (or analogous loose tube, i.e., core tube) and strength members must be intact after removal of the cable specimens from the test box.

6. Furnish test reports and Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify the condition of the conduit system before installation of the fiber optic cable or inner duct.

B. Pass a test mandrel through fiber optic conduits prior to pulling fiber or installing inner duct.

1. Run the mandrel in both directions.

C. Examine materials and equipment before installation and verify they are free from physical damage and defects.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Equipment support and anchoring to structures:

1. Prepare anchor setting template(s) and use to position anchors during construction of supporting structures.

2. Install anchors of type and material indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3. Install anchors with embedment indicated on approved anchoring designs.

Fiber Optic Cable and Appurtenances
16125-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16125 (DraftFinal) B. Before fiber splicing terminating or testing activities, verify sufficient workspace is available to perform the activity without interferences from other trades.

C. Pre-installation test:

1. Upon arrival at the site:
a. Inspect the cable and reel for damage.
b. Test fibers with an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) for fiber integrity.
c. Verify that the fiber lengths are consistent with the cable manufacture. d. Verify that traces yield no point discontinuities.

2. Complete test sequence and obtain approval from the Engineer of submitted test results before cable installation.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install fiber optic patch cords in open network trays or in dedicated conduits no longer than 25 feet in length.

B. Install fiber optic cable in continuous lengths without intermediate splices, except where approved by the Engineer.

C. Cable installation:

1. Properly attach the fiber optic cable’s strength elements to a 600-pound breakaway swivel containing tension or shear pins using Kellums pulling grips that are a minimum of 18 inches long.

2. Certify that cable tensile limits do not exceed cable pull tension and bend limits using tension monitoring devices.

3. Leave an extra loop of fiber optic cable in each pull box.

4. Conform with the cable manufacturer’s specifications, practices, and the following requirements:
a. When power equipment is used to install fiber optic cables, use low speeds and do not exceed a rate of 30 meters per minute. b. Do not exceed the tensile and bending limitation for fiber optic cables under any circumstances.
c. Use large diameter wheels, pulling sheaves, and cable guides to maintain the specified bending radius.
d. Use commercial dynamometers or load cells to monitor pulling tension. e. A nonfreezing type of swivel inserted between the pulling line and cable pulling grip to prevent twisting under strain.
f. Cable to be installed using a breakaway swivel.

5. Apply to conduits a lubricant at each conduit ingress and egress location during the pull operation:
a. Pour or pump lubricant into the end of the conduit at the feed location at a nominal application rate of 3 gallons per 1,000 feet of cable. b. If the conduit is open at intermediate locations, then apply the appropriate proportion of lubricant at each opening.
c. Continuously lubricate the cable as it is being pulled by pouring or pumping the lubricant into the conduit at the feed location and at each intermediate location.
d. Station workers at each intermediate location as required. e. Remove excess lubricant that has collected.

Fiber Optic Cable and Appurtenances
16125-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16125 (DraftFinal) f. Remove and clean the surrounding area after cable installation.

6. Install using a hydraulic capstan or winch equipped with a recording running line dynamometer graph which measures and records pulling tensions:
a. Use pulling equipment with slip-load capability to allow the winch to maintain a constant pulling force without taking up the winch line. b. Use pulling equipment equipped with a hydraulic bypass set so that a maximum tension of 600 pounds is not exceeded.
c. Use only equipment designed to prevent a preset pulling tension from being exceeded.
d. Fiber optic cable manufacturer to provide the pulling tension setpoint. e. If during the pulling operation excessive tension is detected, cease operations and notify the Engineer.

7. Position the cable reel at the feed point in alignment with the raceway and in such a position that the cable can be passed from the top of the reel in a long, smooth bend into the raceway system:
a. Use of a cable feeder is required unless the cable is hand-pulled.

8. Supply bull wheels, blocks, split wheels, cable feeders, and necessary equipment required to provide a clean and safe operation:
a. Cable shall not be allowed to travel over any wheel or block that has a radius less than the minimum radius allowed by the cable manufacturer.

9. Minimize the use of snatch blocks and rollers to guide the cable into the conduit at the feed point:
a. Slack feed by hand the cable into the feed point and raceway without the use of rollers.

10. Tend the cable reel at all times and turn by hand to provide the required cable slack:
a. Under no circumstances shall the cable tension be allowed to turn the cable reel.

11. Use a rim roller, with a wheel radius greater than the minimum cable bending radius placed at the manhole or vault opening to prevent the cable from dragging on the manhole rim or steps.

12. Perform a continuous thorough visual inspection for flaws, breaks, and abrasions in the cable sheath as the cable leaves the reel and maintain a slow pulling speed to permit this inspection.

13. Damage to the sheath or finish of the cable is cause for rejecting the cable:
a. Replace any cable damaged in any way during installation.

14. If the cable becomes damaged during installation, stop operations and notify the Engineer immediately:
a. Engineer to determine whether to replace the entire reel of cable or to install a termination panel to eliminate the damaged section.

15. Document pulls by a graph which is annotated with the following information:
a. Reel number.
b. Pull point ID.
c. Date and time.
d. Explanations for abnormalities in readings or interruptions. e. Sign-off by the Contractor and Engineer.

16. Under no conditions shall the fiber optic cable be left exposed or unattended.

Fiber Optic Cable and Appurtenances
16125-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16125 (DraftFinal) D. After the cables are installed and spliced:

1. Rack the cables:
a. Loosely secure in racked position with wire ties.
b. Attach imprinted plastic-coated cloth identification/warning tags to each cable in at least 2 locations in each handhole/manhole.

E. Splices:

1. Provide field splices in a splice tray located in a waterproof splice enclosure:
a. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
1) Tyco/Raychem, FOSC style splice enclosure.

2. Loop the individual fibers a minimum of 1 full turn within the splice tray to avoid macro/micro bending.

3. After completion of cable terminations, neatly dress cables.

4. Protect splices with a thermal shrink sleeve.

5. Provide fusion type fiber optic cable splicing meeting the following requirements:
a. Joins multimode or single mode fibers.
b. Establishes a permanent fusion splice.
c. Waterproof.
d. Re-enterable, rearrangeable, and reusable.
e. Splice loss less than 0.10 dB.
f. Protected by a splice enclosure.

6. Requirement for outdoor fiber splice enclosures:
a. Seal.
b. Bond.
c. Anchor.
d. Protect fiber optic cable splices.
e. Stand-alone unit that does not require an outer enclosure. f. Provide for a maximum of 6 cable entries in a butt-end configuration. g. Used in aerial, underground, and direct buried applications.

7. Requirement for indoor fiber splice enclosures:
a. Anchor.
b. Protect fiber optic cable splices.
c. Stand-alone unit that does not require an outer enclosure. d. Suitable for the minimum number of splices at that location plus additional capacity for reconfigurations.

8. Re-splice any splice that has a loss greater than 0.10 dB.

9. Leave a minimum of 20 feet of fiber optic cable at each end of splice.

F. Terminations:

1. Terminate fiber inside a patch panel:
a. Direct landing to a switch, router hub, or PLC will not be allowed.

2. Terminate outdoor cables using a breakout kit that seals the cable and provides physical protection for the fiber strands.

3. Terminate indoor cables using factory assembled terminations pig tail spliced to the cable ends.

4. Labeling:
a. Permanently label cable terminations. Use labels produced by a wire printer using pressure sensitive polyester labels.
b. Label patch panels as specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

Fiber Optic Cable and Appurtenances
16125-12 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16125 (DraftFinal) G. Installation Verification:

1. Furnish Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation Verification.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field electrical acceptance testing:

1. As specified in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.

B. Utilize personnel certified by the manufacturer with specific knowledge of the cable manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.

C. General:

1. Test results shall meet or exceed manufacturer specifications:
a. Test each fiber of each cable for breaks, abnormalities, and overall attenuation characteristics.

2. Pre-installation tests and post-installation tests to be witnessed and signed off by the Engineer and Owner.

3. Perform OLTS test with equipment capable and calibrated to show anomalies of 0.1 dB as a minimum:
a. Test multimode fibers at 850 nm and 1,300 nm.
b. Test single mode fibers at 1,310 nm and 1,550 nm.

4. Perform OTDR tests on fiber cables less than 100 meters with the aid of a launch cable:
a. Adjust OTDR pulse width settings to a maximum setting of 1/1,000th of the cable length or 10 nanoseconds.

3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean fiber optic connectors after termination and before testing. After cleaning, cover unterminated connectors with a protective boot.

B. At the completion of construction, touch up the finish on fiber patch panels and enclosures.

3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect the fiber system from physical damage and the encroachment of dust, before, during, and after installation.

END OF SECTION
Conduits
16130-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16130 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16130

CONDUITS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Metallic conduits.

2. Nonmetallic conduits.

3. Conduit bodies.

4. Conduit fittings and accessories.

5. Conduit installation.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations:

1. FRD: Fiberglass-reinforced duct.

2. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

3. NPT: National pipe thread.

4. PCS: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coated rigid steel conduit.

5. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride rigid nonmetallic conduit.

6. SLT: Sealtight-liquidtight flexible conduit.

B. Standards:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. C80.1 - Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit.

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). a. RN-1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Steel Conduit.

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Inc.:
a. 1 - Standard for Safety Flexible Metal Conduit.
b. 6 - Standard for Safety Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Conduit bodies: A separate portion of a conduit system that provides access through a removable cover to the interior of the system at a junction of 2 or more conduit sections. Includes, but not limited to, shapes C, E, LB, T, X, etc.

2. Conduit fitting: An accessory that primarily serves a mechanical purpose.

Includes, but not limited to, bushings, locknuts, hubs, couplings, reducers, etc.

Conduits
16130-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16130 (DraftFinal)

1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures and Section 16070 - Hangers and Supports.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Manufacturer’s catalog sheets for every type and size of conduit, fitting, conduit body, and accessories to be used on the Project.

2. Manufacturer’s recommended special tools to be used for installation, if required.

3. Certified test results for PVC-coated metallic conduit showing the adhesive bond is stronger than the tensile strength of the PVC.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Furnish conduit routing plans for conduits before the installation of any conduits embedded within concrete.

2. Detail the intended routing of each conduit, conduit material and include supporting methods.

3. Number conduits in accordance with the Contract Documents. a. Provide conduit labels as specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

D. Delegated Design Submittals:

1. As specified in Section 16070 - Hangers and Supports.

E. Certifications:

1. Furnish PVC-coated conduit manufacturer’s valid, unexpired certification for each installer.

F. Record documents:

1. Incorporate changes in conduit routing on electrical plan drawings.

2. Dimension underground and concealed conduits from building lines.

3. Furnish hard copy drawings.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conduits, conduit bodies, and fittings shall be UL listed and labeled.

B. Every installer of PVC-coated metallic conduit shall be certified by the manufacturer for installation of the conduit, and be able to present a valid, unexpired installer certification card prior to installation beginning.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not expose non-metallic conduit to direct sunlight.

B. Do not store conduit in direct contact with the ground.

Conduits
16130-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16130 (DraftFinal)

1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide conduits, conduit bodies, fittings, junction boxes, and necessary components, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, as required, to install a complete electrical raceway system.

B. Provide location and protection of existing underground utilities, underground conduit trenching, conduit and backfill necessary for the complete installation of underground conduits.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Galvanized rigid steel conduit:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Allied Tube and Conduit.
b. Western Tube and Conduit.
c. Wheatland Tube Co.

B. PVC-coated rigid steel conduit:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Allied.
b. Calbond.
c. NEC, Inc. BlackGuard.
d. Ocal, Inc.
e. Robroy Ind.

C. Sealtight-liquidtight flexible conduit:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. AFC Cable Systems.
b. Anaconda.
c. Electri-Flex Co.
d. Southwire.

D. Rigid nonmetallic PVC conduit:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Cantex.
b. Carlon.
c. Triangle Conduit and Cable.

Conduits
16130-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16130 (DraftFinal) E. Fiberglass reinforced duct:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Champion Fiberglass.
b. FRE Composites.
c. Smith Fiberglass.

F. Conduit bodies:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Appleton.
b. Calbond.
c. Carlon.
d. Crouse-Hinds.
e. O-Z/Gedney.
f. Ocal, Inc.
g. Robroy Ind.

G. Joint compound:

1. As recommended by the conduit manufacturer.

H. Galvanized rigid steel conduit expansion fittings:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Appleton.
b. Crouse-Hinds.
c. O-Z/Gedney.

2.03 COMPONENTS
A. GRC:

1. NPT standard conduit threads with a 3/4-inch taper per foot:
a. Running conduit threads are not acceptable.

2. Hot-dip galvanized inside and out:
a. Ensures complete coverage and heats the zinc and steel to a temperature that ensures the zinc alloys with the steel over the entire surface. b. Electro-galvanizing is not acceptable.

3. Manufactured in accordance with:
a. UL 6.
b. ANSI C80.1.

B. PCS:

1. Steel conduit, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused, hot-dip galvanized material, in accordance with to the requirements for Type GRC.

2. Coated conduit NEMA Standard RN-1:
a. Galvanized coating may not be disturbed or reduced in thickness during the cleaning and preparatory process.

3. Factory-bonded PVC jacket:
a. Exterior galvanized surfaces shall be coated with primer before PVC coating to ensure a bond between the zinc substrate and the PVC coating.
b. Nominal thickness of the exterior PVC coating shall be 0.040 inch except where part configuration or application of the piece dictates otherwise.

Conduits
16130-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16130 (DraftFinal) c. PVC coating on conduits and associated fittings shall have no sags, blisters, lumps, or other surface defects and shall be free of holes and holidays.
d. PVC adhesive bond on conduits and fittings shall be greater than the tensile strength of the PVC plastic coating:
1) Confirm bond with certified test results.

4. Urethane coating shall be uniformly and consistently applied to the interior of conduits and fittings:
a. Nominal thickness of 0.002 inch.
b. Conduits having areas with thin or no coating are not acceptable. c. Threads shall be coated with urethane.

5. PVC exterior and urethane interior coatings applied to the conduits shall afford sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking at temperature above 30 degrees Fahrenheit (-1 degree Celsius).

6. PCS conduit bodies and fittings:
a. Malleable iron.
b. Conduit body, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused material and shall be in accordance with appropriate UL standards.
c. PVC coating on the outside of conduit bodies shall be 0.040-inch thick and have a series of ribs to protect the coating from tool damage during installation.
d. 0.002-inch interior urethane coating.
e. Utilize PVC coating as an integral part of the gasket design. f. Stainless steel cover screw heads shall be encapsulated with plastic to ensure corrosion protection.
g. PVC sleeve extending 1 conduit diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less, shall be formed at each female conduit opening.
1) Inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used.
2) Sleeve shall provide a vapor- and moisture resistant seal at every connection.
3) Fittings shall be Form 8 and supplied with plastic encapsulated stainless steel cover screws. Fittings shall be UL Type 4X. Fittings shall be from the same manufacturer as the conduit in order to maintain system continuity and warranty.

C. SLT:

1. Temperature rated for use in the ambient temperature at the installed location but not less than the following:
a. General purpose:
1) Temperature range: -20 degrees Celsius to +80 degrees Celsius. b. Oil-resistant:
1) Temperature range: -20 degrees Celsius to +60 degrees Celsius.

2. Sunlight-resistant, weatherproof, and watertight.

3. Manufactured from single strip steel, hot-dip galvanized on all 4 sides before conduit fabrication.

4. Strip steel spiral wound resulting in an interior that is smooth and clean for easy wire pulling.

5. Overall PVC jacket.

6. With integral copper ground wire, built in the core, in conduit trade sizes 1/2 inch through 1-1/4 inch.

Conduits
16130-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16130 (DraftFinal) D. PVC:

1. Extruded from virgin PVC compound:
a. Schedule 40 unless otherwise specified.
b. Schedule 80 extra-heavy wall where specified.

2. Rated for 90 degrees Celsius conductors or cable.

3. Rated for use in direct sunlight.

E. FRD:

1. Suitable for use at -40 degrees Celsius to 110 degrees Celsius.

2. Integral bell and spigot either glued together or assembled with an integral urethane tri-seal gasket held in place with a retainer ring.

3. For underground use only.

4. Conduits and fittings shall be pigmented with UV-inhibiting carbon black.

F. Conduit bodies:

1. Material consistent with conduit type:
a. Malleable iron bodies and covers when used with Type GRC. b. PVC-coated malleable iron bodies and covers when used with Type PCS.

2. Conduit bodies to be in accordance with to Form 8, Mark 9, or Mogul design:
a. Mogul design in accordance with to NEC requirements for bending space for large conductors for conduit trade sizes of 1 inch and larger with conductors #4 AWG and larger, or where required for wire-bending space.

3. Gasketed covers attached to bodies with stainless steel screws secured to threaded holes in conduit body.

2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Connectors and fittings:

1. Manufactured with compatible materials to the corresponding conduit.

B. Insulated throat metallic bushings:

1. Construction:
a. Malleable iron or zinc-plated steel when used with steel conduit. b. Positive metallic conduit end stop.
c. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic-insulated surfaces rated at 150 degrees Celsius.
d. Use fully insulated bushings on nonmetallic conduit system made of high-impact 150 degrees Celsius rated non-combustible thermosetting phenolic.

C. Insulated grounding bushings:

1. Construction:
a. Malleable iron or steel, zinc-plated, with a positive metallic end stop. b. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic-insulated surfaces rated at 150 degrees Celsius.
c. Tin-plated copper grounding saddle for use with copper or aluminum conductors.

D. Electrical unions (Erickson Couplings):

1. Construction:
a. Malleable iron for use with steel conduit.

Conduits
16130-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16130 (DraftFinal) b. PVC-coated malleable iron for use with PCS conduit.
c. Concrete tight, 3-piece construction.
d. Rated for Class I Division 1 Group D in hazardous areas.

E. SLT fittings:

1. Construction:
a. Malleable iron.
b. Furnished with locknut and sealing ring.
c. Liquidtight, raintight, oiltight.
d. Insulated throat.
e. Furnish as straight, 45-degree elbows, and 90-degree elbows. f. Designed to prevent sleeving:
1) Verify complete bonding of the raceway jacket to the plastic gasket seal.
g. Equipped with grounding device to provide ground continuity irrespective of raceway core construction. Grounding device, if inserted into raceway and directly in contact with conductors, shall have rolled-over edges for sizes under 5 inches.
h. Where terminated into a threadless opening using a threaded hub fitting, a suitable moisture-resistant/oil-resistant synthetic rubber gasket shall be provided between the outside of the box or enclosure and the fitting shoulder. Gasket shall be adequately protected by and permanently bonded to a metallic retainer.

2. Corrosion-resistant and outdoor SLT fittings:
a. Construction:
1) PVC-coated liquidtight fittings with a bonded 0.040-inch-thick PVC coating on the metal connector to form a seal around the SLT conduit.
2) Insulated throat and an integral sealing ring.

F. Hubs for threaded attachment of steel conduit to sheet metal enclosures:

1. Construction:
a. Insulated throat.
b. PVC-coated when used in corrosive areas.
c. Bonding locknut.
d. Recessed neoprene O-ring to ensure watertight and dusttight connector. e. 1/2-inch through 1-1/4-inch steel zinc electroplated. f. 1-1/2-inch through 6-inch malleable iron zinc plated.

2. Usage:
a. Conduits in damp, wet, outdoor, and corrosive areas shall use threaded hubs for connections to sheet metal enclosures.

G. Expansion/deflection couplings:

1. Use to compensate for movement in any directions between 2 conduit ends where they connect.

2. Shall allow movement of 3/4 inch from the normal in all directions.

3. Shall allow angular movement for a deflection of 30 degrees from normal in any direction.

4. Constructed to maintain electrical continuity of the conduit system.

5. Materials:
a. End couplings: Bronze or galvanized ductile iron.

Conduits
16130-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16130 (DraftFinal) b. Sleeve: Neoprene.
c. Bands: Stainless steel.
d. Bonding jumper: Tinned copper braid.

H. Expansion couplings:

1. Shall allow for expansion and contraction of conduit:
a. Permitting 8-inch movement, 4 inches in either direction.

2. Constructed to maintain electrical continuity of the conduit system.

3. Materials:
a. Head: Malleable or ductile iron.
b. Sleeve: Steel.
c. Insulating bushing: Phenolic.
d. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized.
e. PVC-coated steel when used with Type PCS.

I. Conduit markers:

1. As specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Before installing any conduit or locating any device box:

1. Examine the complete set of Drawings and Specifications, and applicable Shop Drawings.

B. Verify all dimensions and space requirements and make any minor adjustments to the conduit system as required to avoid conflicts with the building structure, other equipment, or the work of other trades.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General:

1. Conduit routing:
a. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic in nature:
1) Install conduit runs as specified with schematic representation indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
2) Modify conduit runs to suit field conditions, as accepted by the Engineer:
a) Make changes in conduit locations that are consistent with the design intent but are dimensionally different, or routing to bypass obstructions.
b) Make changes in conduit routing due to the relocation of equipment.
c) Install conduits and equipment in such a manner as to avoid obstructions and to preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear.
3) Where the Drawings do not indicate the exact mounting and/or supporting method to be used, use materials and methods similar to the mounting details indicated on the Drawings.

Conduits
16130-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16130 (DraftFinal) 4) Electrical drawings do not indicate all required junction boxes and pull boxes:
a) Provide junction boxes and pull boxes to facilitate wire pulling as required:
(1) To meet cable manufacturer’s pulling tension requirements. (2) To limit total conduit bends between pull locations. b) Install junction boxes and pull boxes at locations acceptable to the Engineer.
b. Contractor is responsible for any deviations in general location, conduit size, routing, or changes to the conduit schedule without the express written approval or direction by the Engineer:
1) Engineer is the sole source in determining whether the change is constituted as a deviation.
2) Perform any changes resulting in additional conduits, or extra work from such deviations.
3) Incorporate any deviations on the Record Documents.

2. Use only tools recommended by the conduit manufacturer for assembling the conduit system.

3. Provide adequate clearances from high-temperature surfaces for conduit runs.

Provide minimum clearances as follows:
a. Clearance of 6 inches from surfaces 113 degrees Fahrenheit to 149 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Clearance of 12 inches from surfaces greater than 149 degrees Fahrenheit.
c. Keep conduits at least 6 inches from the coverings on hot water and steam pipes, 18 inches from the coverings on flues and breechings, and 12 inches from fuel lines and gas lines.
d. Where it is necessary to route conduits close to high-temperature surfaces, provide a high-reflectance thermal barrier between the conduit and the surface.

4. Support conduit runs on water-bearing walls a minimum of 7/8-inch away from wall on an accepted preformed channel:
a. Do not run conduits within water-bearing walls unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

5. Do not install 1-inch or larger conduits in or through structural members unless approved by the Engineer.

6. Run conduits exposed to view parallel with or at right angles to structural members, walls, or lines of the building:
a. Install straight and true conduit runs with uniform and symmetrical elbows, offsets, and bends.
b. Make changes in direction with long radius bends or with conduit bodies.

7. Install conduits with total conduit bends between pull locations less than or equal to 270 degrees.

8. Route exposed conduits to preserve headroom, access space and workspace, and to prevent tripping hazards and clearance problems:
a. Install conduit runs so that runs do not interfere with proper and safe operation of equipment and do not block or interfere with ingress or egress, including equipment-removal hatches.
b. Route conduits to avoid drains or other gravity lines. Where conflicts occur, relocate the conduit as required.

Conduits
16130-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16130 (DraftFinal)

9. Conduits may be run in concrete members or slabs with permission of the Engineer or as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Refer to the typical details for conduit spacing and size requirements.

10. When installing conduits through existing slabs or walls, make provisions for locating any possible conflicting items where the conduit is to penetrate. Use tone signal or X-ray methods to make certain that no penetrations will be made into the existing conduits, piping, cables, post-tensioning cables, etc.

11. Plug conduits brought into pull boxes, manholes, handholes, and other openings until used to prevent entrance of moisture.

12. Install conduits through wall and floor seals where indicated on the Drawings.

13. For existing and new 2-inch and larger conduit runs, snake conduits with a conduit cleaner equipped with a cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than 85 percent of nominal diameter of the conduit:
a. Remove and replace conduits through which mandrel will not pass.

14. Provide sleeves and openings required for the passage of electrical raceways or cables even when these openings or sleeves are not specifically indicated on the Drawings.

15. Install complete conduit systems before conductors are installed.

16. Provide metallic conduits terminating in transformer, switchgear, motor control center, or other equipment conduit windows with grounding bushings and ground with a minimum No. 6 AWG ground wire.

17. Underground conduits:
a. Install underground conduits, including conduit runs below slabs-on-grade in concrete-reinforced duct bank construction:
1) As specified in Section 16133 - Duct Banks.
b. Make underground conduit size transitions at handholes and manholes. c. Install spare conduits in underground duct banks towards top center of runs to allow for ease of installation of future cables as conduits enter underground manholes and handholes.
d. Seal around conduit penetrations of below grade walls with a mechanical seal.

18. Underground conduit trenching:
a. Perform trenching as specified in Section 02318 - Trenching. b. Trench must be uniformly graded with the bottom, rock free and covered with select material.
c. Damage occurring to existing ducts, conduits, cables, and other utilities during underground conduit installation shall be remediated to the satisfaction of the Owner.
d. Whenever possible, use the walls of the trench as forms for concrete encasement:
1) Forms are required where the soil is not self-supporting.

B. Equipment grounding conductors:

1. Provide a separate, green insulated, grounding conductor in each raceway independent of raceway material:
a. Multi-conductor power and control cables shall include an integral green insulated grounding conductor.
b. Provide a separate grounding conductor in each individual raceway for parallel feeders.

Conduits
16130-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16130 (DraftFinal)

2. Conductors shall be the same type and insulation as the circuit conductors:
a. Use 600-volt insulation for the equipment grounding conductors for medium voltage systems.

3. Minimum size in accordance with the NEC.

C. Lighting and receptacle conduits:

1. Provide conduit runs for lighting and receptacle circuits, whether or not indicated on the Drawings.

2. Install conduits in accordance with the requirements of this Section unless otherwise indicated.

3. Minimum conduit size:
a. 3/4-inch for exposed conduits.
b. 1-inch for underground or in-slab conduits.

4. Provide conduit materials for the installed location as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

D. Conduit usage:

1. Exposed conduits:
a. Rigid conduit:
1) Install the rigid conduit type for each location as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
2) Minimum size: 3/4-inch.
b. Flexible conduit:
1) Use flexible conduit for final connections between rigid conduit and motors, vibrating equipment, instruments, control equipment, or where required for equipment servicing:
a) Use Type SLT with rigid metallic conduit.
2) Minimum size: 3/4-inch:
a) 1/2 when required for connection to instruments.
3) Maximum length:
a) Fixed equipment:

Conduit Trade Size Flexible Conduit Length (inch)
3/4 18
1 18
1-1/4 18
1-1/2 18
2 36
2-1/2 36
3 36
3-1/2 38
4 40
b) Removable instruments or hinged equipment:
(1) As required to allow complete removal or full movement without disconnecting or stressing the conduit.

Conduits
16130-12 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16130 (DraftFinal)

2. Concrete-encased and embedded conduits:
a. Straight runs and bends less than 45 degrees:
1) Type PVC Schedule 40.
b. Bends with total deflection greater than 45 degrees:
1) PCS, or FRD.
c. Entering and exiting duct bank, underground or embedded conduit runs a minimum 12 inches above and below grade, finished floor, or entering equipment:
1) PCS.
d. Minimum size:
1) 2-inch in duct banks.
2) 1-inch for in-slab conduits.
3) Provide conduit fittings to enlarge the conduit from the exposed size in the conduit schedule as required.

3. Direct-buried conduits:
a. Type PCS.
b. Minimum size: 1 inch.

4. Below-slab conduits:
a. Type PCS.
b. Minimum size: 1-inch.

5. PVC-coated rigid metallic conduit:
a. Use specifically manufactured or machined threading dies to manufacturer’s specifications to accommodate the PVC jacket. b. Repair damage to PVC coatings with manufacturer supplied touchup compound or PVC Coating Repair Kit for PVC Coated Raceway Systems.

6. GRC:
a. Conduit shall be cut square and reamed before threading.

E. Conduit joints and bends:

1. General:
a. Where conduit is underground, under slabs on grade, exposed to the weather, or in NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X locations, make joints liquidtight.
b. Keep bends and offsets in conduit runs to an absolute minimum. c. Bends shall be symmetrical.
d. The following conduit systems shall use large-radius sweep elbows:
1) Underground conduits.
2) Conduits containing shielded cables.
3) Conduits containing fiber optic cables.
e. Provide large-radius factory-made bends for 1-1/4-inch trade size or larger. f. Make field bends with a radius of not less than the requirements found in the NEC:
1) Minimum bending radius of the cable must be less than the radius of the conduit bend.
2) Make field bends with power bending equipment or manual benders specifically intended for the purpose:
a) Make bends so that the conduit is not damaged and the internal diameter is not effectively reduced.
b) For the serving utilities, make bends to meet their requirements. g. Replace deformed, flattened, or kinked conduit.

Conduits
16130-13 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16130 (DraftFinal)

2. Threaded conduit:
a. Cut threads on rigid metallic conduit with a standard conduit-cutting die that provides a 3/4-inch per foot taper and to a length such that bare metal exposed by the threading operation is completely covered by the couplings or fittings used. In addition, cut the lengths of the thread such that joints become secure and wrench-tight just preceding the point where the conduit ends would butt together in couplings or where conduit ends would butt into the ends or shoulders of other fittings. b. Thoroughly ream conduit after threads have been cut to remove burrs. c. Use bushings or conduit fittings at conduit terminations. d. On exposed conduits, repair scratches and other defects with galvanizing repair stick, Enterprise Galvanizing “Galvabar™,” or CRC “Zinc It.” e. Coat conduit threads with an approved electrically conductive sealant and corrosion inhibitor that is not harmful to the conductor insulation:
1) Apply to the male threads and tighten joints securely. 2) Clean excess sealant from exposed threads after assembly. f. Securely tighten threaded connections.
g. Any exposed threaded surfaces must be cleaned and coated with a galvanizing solution so that exposed surfaces have a galvanized protective coating.

3. PVC:
a. Use approved solvent-weld cement specifically manufactured for the purpose. Spray-type cement is not allowed.
b. Apply heat for bends so that conduit does not distort or discolor. Use a spring mandrel as required to ensure full inside diameter at bends:
1) Utilize a heater specifically for PVC conduit as recommended by the conduit manufacturer.

F. Conduit sealing and drainage:

1. Other than required for hazardous and classified areas:
a. Provide sealing and drainage in vertical drops of long (in excess of 20 feet), exterior, above-grade conduit runs at the points at which the conduit enters buildings, switchgear, control panels, lighting panelboards, and other similar enclosures.
b. Provide seal fittings with drains in vertical drops directly above grade for exterior and above-grade conduit runs that are extended below grade. c. Provide conduit seals with drains in areas of high humidity and rapidly changing temperatures:
1) Where portions of an interior raceway pass through walls, ceilings, or floors that separate adjacent areas having widely different temperatures.
d. Provide conduit seals similar to O-Z/Gedney (Type CSM) on conduits between corrosive and non-corrosive areas.
e. Seal 1 end only of underground conduits at highest point with O-Z/Gedney sealing (non-hazardous) filling, or equal.

2. Install seals with drains at any location along conduit runs where moisture may condense or accumulate. This requirement includes, but is not limited to, the following locations: Control panels, junction boxes, pullboxes, or low points of the conduit.

Conduits
16130-14 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16130 (DraftFinal) G. Hangers and supports:

1. General:
a. Provide appropriate hangers, supports, fasteners, and seismic restraints to suit applications:
1) As specified in Section 16070 - Hangers and Supports. 2) Provide support materials consistent with the type of conduit being installed as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
b. Support conduit at the intervals required by the NEC. c. Perforated strap and plumbers’ tape are not acceptable for conduit supports.

2. Conduit on concrete or masonry:
a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with metallic or plastic expansion anchors and screws or support from preset inserts.
b. Use preset inserts in concrete when possible.
c. Use pipe spacers (clamp backs) in wet locations.

3. Suspended conduit:
a. Use malleable-iron factory-made split-hinged pipe rings with threaded suspension rods sized for the weight to be carried (minimum 3/8-inch diameter), Kindorf, or equal.
b. For grouped conduits, construct racks with threaded rods and tiered angle iron or preformed channel cross members. Clamp each conduit individually to a cross member. Where rods are more than 2-feet long, provide rigid sway bracing.

4. Supports at structural steel members:
a. Use beam clamps.
b. Drilling or welding may be used only as specified or with approval of the Engineer.

5. PVC-coated rigid metal systems:
a. Provide right-angle beam clamps and “U” bolts specially formed and sized to snugly fit the outside diameter of the coated conduit. Provide “U” bolts with PVC-encapsulated nuts that cover the exposed portions of the threads.
b. Securely fasten exposed conduits with Type 316 stainless steel clamps or straps.

H. Expansion or expansion/deflection fittings:

1. General:
a. Align expansion coupling with the conduit run to prevent binding. b. Follow manufacturer’s instructions to set the piston opening. c. Install expansion fittings across concrete expansion joints and at other locations where necessary to compensate for thermal or mechanical expansion and contraction.
d. Furnish fittings of the same material as the conduit system.

2. For metallic conduit, provide expansion or expansion/deflection couplings, as appropriate, where:
a. Install expansion fittings a minimum of every 200 feet in straight conduit runs.

I. Empty conduits:

1. Provide a pull tape in each empty conduit more than 10 feet in length.

Conduits
16130-15 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16130 (DraftFinal)

2. Seal ends of conduits with approved, manufactured conduit seals, caps, or plugs immediately after installation:
a. Keep ends sealed until immediately before pulling conductors.

J. Miscellaneous:

1. Seal roof penetrations for raceways and other items that penetrate the roof in accordance with roofing manufacturer’s instructions and as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Provide electrical unions at all points of union between ends of rigid conduit systems that cannot otherwise be coupled:
a. Running threads and threadless couplings are not allowed.

3. Replace any conduits installed that the Engineer determines do not meet the requirements of this Specification.

4. Provide conduit housekeeping curb around embedded or below-grade conduits exiting or entering the slab, in accordance with the Typical Details.

END OF SECTION

Duct Banks
16133-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16133 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16133

DUCT BANKS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Electrical underground duct banks.

2. Duct bank installation requirements.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. PVC conduit spacers.

2. Detectable underground marking tape.

3. Pull line.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit Site plan drawings of duct banks, including underground profiles indicating underground utilities.

2. Submit cross section of each duct bank with dimensions.

3. For duct bank routings crossing under building footers or foundations alternative to designed routings indicated on the Drawings:
a. Submit Shop Drawings detailing the new building footer crossing locations and plan drawings labeling equipment to be installed on top of the new routing for approval by the Project structural Engineer.

1.04 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sequencing:

1. Before performing any trenching locate existing underground utilities:
a. As specified in Section 02280 - Subsurface Utility Engineering.

B. Scheduling:

1. Schedule a coordination meeting to adjust duct bank configurations and routing for each duct bank section after trenching and exposure of any underground utilities withing the vicinity of the duct bank route. Meeting shall determine the final configuration of the duct bank before installation.

Duct Banks
16133-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16133 (DraftFinal)

1.06 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Duct bank sections indicated on the Drawings are an initial arrangement and may need to be modified due to existing Site conditions, existing underground utilities, and infrastructure.

1. Reorganize duct bank section with approval of the Engineer.

2. Make changes required to accommodate duct bank configuration and routing changes due to field conditions.
a. Where changes in a duct bank configuration extend to a manhole or handhole, coordinate manhole/handhole blockouts and size with the new configuration.

B. Provide location and protection of existing underground utilities, duct bank, trenching, forming, rebar, spacers, conduit, concrete, backfill, and compaction necessary for the complete installation of the duct banks.

C. Provide reinforced concrete duct banks for conduits installed below grade, on the Site, below structures, or in contact with the earth, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Conduit spacers:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Cantex.
b. Osburn Associates, Inc.

B. Detectable underground marking tape:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Blackburn Manufacturing Co.
b. Panduit.

C. Pull line:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Arnco.
b. Greenlee.
c. Osburn Associates, Inc.

D. Duct seal:

1. The following or equal:
a. O-Z/Gedney type DUX.

Duct Banks
16133-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16133 (DraftFinal)

2.03 MATERIALS
A. Provide conduit as specified in Section 16130 - Conduits.

B. Provide reinforcing steel as specified in Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcing:

1. Provide minimum Number 4 reinforcing steel.

C. Concrete:

1. Mix requirements as specified in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2. Provide a red-oxide conduit encasement coloring agent as specified in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Conduit spacers:

1. Recommended by the conduit manufacturer or specified above.

2. Saddle type.

3. Non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-conductive.

4. Interlocking type:
a. Vertical interlocking.
b. Horizontal interlocking.

5. Suitable for concrete encasement.

6. Molded-in rebar holder.

7. Accommodates 2-inch through 6-inch conduit sizes.

8. Relieves the conduit from both horizontal and vertical stresses.

B. Pull line:

1. Minimum 1/4-inch wide, flat design.

2. Polyester.

3. Minimum pulling strength 1,200 pounds.

4. Sequential footage markings.

C. Detectable marking tape:

1. Locatable by a cable or metal detector from above the undisturbed grade.

2. Aluminum core laminated between polyethylene film.

3. 6-inch-wide red tape imprinted with black lettering stating “CAUTION - BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW”, or equivalent.

D. Duct seal:

1. Non-hardening sealing compound.

2. Flexible, can be applied by hand.

3. UL Listed for use with installed conductors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Duct banks:

1. Encased in concrete at least 24 inches below finish grade, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

Duct Banks
16133-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16133 (DraftFinal)

2. Damage minimization:
a. Conduit should not be left exposed in an open trench longer than is necessary.
b. Protect underground duct banks against damage during pouring of concrete or backfilling.

3. Plastic conduit fittings to be joined should be exposed to the same temperature conditions for a reasonable length of time before assembly.

4. Provide No. 4/0 American Wire Gauge bare copper ground wire the entire length of duct bank and bond to the grounding system at each end of the duct bank:
a. Where duct bank terminates at structures with a grounding electrode, bond duct bank ground wire to the grounding electrode.
b. Where duct bank terminates at electrical equipment, bond duct bank ground wire to the equipment ground bus.
c. Where duct bank terminates at structure without either a grounding electrode or electrical equipment, provide ground rod adjacent to structure and bond duct bank ground wire to ground rod.

5. Install underground ducts to be self-draining:
a. Slope duct banks away from buildings to manholes, handholes, or pullboxes.
b. Slope a minimum of 1/4 inch per 10 feet.

6. Install pull line in spare conduits:
a. Provide adequate pull line at both ends of conduits to facilitate conductor pulling.
b. Cap above ground spare conduit risers at each end with screw-on conduit caps.

B. Trenching:

1. Perform as specified in Section 02318 - Trenching.

2. Trench must be uniformly graded with the bottom rock free and covered with select material.

3. Whenever possible, use the walls of the trench as forms for concrete encasement:
a. Forms are required where the soil is not self-supporting.

4. Damage occurring to existing ducts, conduits, cables, and other utilities during duct bank installation shall be remediated to the satisfaction of the Owner.

C. Duct spacing:

1. Separate conduits with manufactured plastic spacers using a minimum space between the outside surfaces of adjacent conduits of 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings:

2. Install spacers to maintain uniform spacing of duct assembly a minimum of 4 inches above the bottom of the trench during concrete pour. Install spacers on 8-foot maximum intervals:
a. Due to some distortion of conduit from heat, and other means, it may be necessary to install extra spacers within the duct bank:
1) Install the intermediate set of spacers within normal required spacing to maintain the proper horizontal clearance:
a) Clearance is required to allow the proper amount of concrete to infiltrate vertically among the duct to ensure proper protection.

Duct Banks
16133-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16133 (DraftFinal)

3. Spacers shall not be located at the center of a bend:
a. Locate spacer in the tangent, free of the coupling on fabricated bends. b. Locate spacers midway between the tangent and the center bend on trench formed sweeps.

D. Terminating:

1. Use bell ends in duct at entrances into cable vaults.

2. Make conduit entrances into cable vaults tangential to walls of cable vault.

3. Form trapezoidal transitions between duct bank and cable vaults as needed in order to ensure adequate cable bending radius for the duct bank-to-vault transition.

4. Install duct seal in all conduits, including spare conduits, at entrance to manholes/handholes. Form by hand to conduit and around cables to develop moisture barrier.

5. New manhole or handhole applications, provide a single opening or “window” per duct bank, sized to accommodate the duct bank envelope.

E. Concrete:

1. Install concrete as specified in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2. Provide tie wires as specified in Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcing to prevent displacement of the conduits during pouring of concrete:
a. Tie wire shall not act as a substitute for spacers.

3. Install minimum 3-inch cover around conduit and rebar.

4. Consolidation of encasement concrete around duct banks shall be by hand puddling. Mechanical vibrators are acceptable for use outside of the rebar cage.

5. Conduit is subject to temperature rise. As concrete cures, allow the free end to expand by pouring the concrete from the center of the run or from one tie in point.

F. Marking tape:

1. Install a detectable marking tape 12 inches above the duct bank the entire length of the duct bank.

G. For conduit installations beneath building slabs:

1. Duct banks shall be continued under building slabs to the final destination of the conduits.
a. Construct separate duct banks as required.
b. Concrete for encasement under building slabs need not be colored red. c. For duct banks crossing under building footers or foundations, install the top of the duct bank a minimum of 6 inches below the footer. d. Where duct banks enter through building walls, foundation walls, stem walls, etc., make connections as indicated on the Drawings. e. Where duct banks terminate with conduit risers entering building walls, install an expansion/deflection fitting or a flat-wise elbow (elbow parallel to building wall) in order to accommodate differential movement between the conduits and structure.

3.02 CLEANING
A. Clean conduits of dirt and debris by use of an appropriately sized steel mandrel no less than 1/2 inch smaller than the inside diameter of the conduit.

Duct Banks
16133-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16133 (DraftFinal)

3.03 PROTECTION
A. Provide shoring and pumping to protect the excavation and safety of workers.

B. Protect excavations with barricades as required by applicable safety regulations.

END OF SECTION
Boxes
16134-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16134 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16134
BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Device boxes.

2. Raceway system boxes.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

1. Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.

B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. A47 - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.

C. Joint Industry Conference (JIC).

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Arcing parts: Circuit breakers, motor controllers, switches, fuses, or any device intended to interrupt current during its operation.

2. Raceway system boxes: Boxes that are used for wire and cable pullboxes, conduit junction boxes, or terminal boxes.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Manufacturer.

2. Materials.

3. Dimensions:
a. Height.
b. Width.
c. Depth.

Boxes
16134-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16134 (DraftFinal) d. Weight.
e. NEMA rating.

4. Conduit entry locations.

5. Catalog cutsheets.

6. Installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Include identification and sizes of pullboxes.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory requirements:

1. Outlet boxes shall comply with applicable standards of:
a. JIC.
b. NEC.
c. NEMA.
d. UL.

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide outlet boxes for wiring devices, security systems, junction, and pullboxes for use in the raceway systems, etc.

B. Provide boxes as indicated on the Drawings or as needed to complete the raceway installation.

C. Size pullboxes in accordance with NEC requirements and to provide sufficient room for any future conduits, components, and cables as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Provide materials and construction suitable for environmental conditions at the location of the box as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

E. For boxes not indicated:

1. Provide types and mountings as required to suit the equipment and that will be consistent with the conduit system and environmental conditions as indicated in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

Boxes
16134-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16134 (DraftFinal)

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. Plastic and/or fiberglass boxes:
a. Carlon.
b. Hoffman.
c. Stahlin.

2. Plastic coated boxes:
a. OCAL.
b. Rob Roy.

3. Cast device boxes:
a. Appleton.
b. Crouse - Hinds.
c. O-Z/Gedney.

4. Formed steel enclosures:
a. Hoffman.
b. Rittal
c. Stahlin.

5. Stainless steel enclosures:
a. Hoffman.
b. Rittal.
c. Stahlin.

2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Cast device boxes:

2. Aluminum (copper free) boxes:
a. High strength copper free 4/10 of 1 percent maximum alloy for use with aluminum rigid conduit.

3. Malleable iron boxes:
a. In accordance with ASTM A47 Grade 32510.

B. Plastic coated cast device boxes:

1. Construction:
a. With internal green ground screw.
b. Furnished with a suitable gasketed cover.
c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted. d. Conduit sizes range from 3/4 inch to 1 inch.
e. Double coated with a nominal 0.002-inch (2 mil) urethane on both the interior and exterior before application of PVC coating. f. With a minimum 0.040-inch (40 mil) PVC coating bonded to exterior. g. With pressure sealing sleeve to protect the connection with conduit.

C. Fiberglass boxes:

1. NEMA Type 4X.

Boxes
16134-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16134 (DraftFinal)

2. Constructed of molded fiberglass reinforced polyester.

3. Integral neoprene gasket on cover attached with an oil-resistant adhesive.

4. Enclosures to have internal pads for mounting optional panels and terminal kits.

5. Covers:
a. Screw cover enclosures:
1) Covers held in place with captive, stainless steel, or Monel® screws. 2) Covers attached to body with internal zinc-plated steel hinges. b. Quick release latches covers:
1) Corrosion resistant fiberglass hinges.
2) Spring loaded fiberglass latches with a Monel® or stainless steel bail attached with Monel® or stainless steel screws.
3) With a Type 316 stainless steel padlock hasp.

6. With external mounting feet.

D. Formed steel enclosures:

1. Steel:
a. NEMA Type 12.
b. Fabricated from 14-gauge steel, minimum.
c. Seams continuously welded ground smooth.
d. Door:
1) Rolled lip around 3 sides.
2) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge and pin.
e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight, dusttight, oiltight seal:
1) Attached with an adhesive.
2) Retained by a retaining strip.
f. Fabricate external removable hardware for clamping the door to the enclosure body from zinc-plated heavy gauge steel:
1) With a hasp and staple for padlocking.
g. Provide large enclosures with door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity. h. No holes or knockouts.
i. Finish:
1) ANSI 61 gray electrostatically applied polyester powder inside and out over cleaned and primed surfaces.
2) White electrostatically applied polyester powder mounting plate. j. Heavy gauge steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted.

2. Stainless steel:
a. NEMA Type 4X:
1) Boxes in locations subject to flooding or temporary submersion:
a) NEMA Type 6.
b. Fabricated from 14-gauge Type 316 stainless steel.
c. Seams continuously welded.
d. Door:
1) Rolled lip around 3 sides.
2) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge and pin.
e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight seal:
1) Attached with an adhesive.
2) Retained by a retaining strip.

Boxes
16134-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16134 (DraftFinal) f. Fabricate external removable hardware for clamping the door to the enclosure body from heavy gauge stainless steel:
1) With a hasp and staple for padlocking.
g. Provide large enclosures with door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity. h. No holes or knockouts.
i. Finish:
1) Brushed.
j. Stainless steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted.

2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners:

1. Electroplated or stainless steel in boxes with wiring devices.

2. Screws, nuts, bolts, and other threaded fasteners:
a. Stainless steel.

B. Provide breather and drain fittings where appropriate.

C. Internal panels:

1. Provide internal panels where required for mounting of terminal strips or other equipment.

2. With plated steel shoulder studs.

3. Steel with white polyester powder finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:

1. Provide outlet box materials to match the conduit system:
a. GRC - Cast ferrous boxes.
b. PCS - PVC coated cast ferrous boxes.

2. Solid type gang boxes:
a. For more than 2 wiring devices.
b. For barriered outlets.

3. Support wall mounted NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X boxes to maintain a minimum of 7/8-inch free air space between the back of the enclosure and the wall:
a. Use machined spacers to maintain air space; built-up washers are not acceptable.
b. Use stainless steel or nylon materials for spacers.

4. Use cast malleable iron boxes when box must support other devices.

5. Boxes serving luminaires or wiring devices:
a. Use as pullboxes wherever possible.

6. In terminal boxes, furnish terminals as indicated on the Drawings with a minimum of 20 percent spare terminals:
a. Furnish wireways for discrete and analog/DC wiring.
b. Separate analog wiring from 120 V discrete or power wiring.

7. For fire-rated construction, provide materials and installation for use in accordance with the listing requirements of the classified construction.

Boxes
16134-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16134 (DraftFinal) B. Outlet boxes:

1. Locate outlet boxes as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Adjust locations so as not to conflict with structural requirements or other trades.

2. Use deep threaded-hub malleable iron boxes:
a. In hazardous areas.
b. Where exposed to the weather.
c. In unheated areas.
d. Where subject to mechanical damage:
1) Defined as exposed boxes less than 10 feet above the floor. e. To act as a pullbox for conductors in a conduit system. f. Accommodate wiring devices.

3. Use deep threaded-hub plastic coated malleable iron boxes in corrosive and NEMA Type 4X area and when the exposed conduit system is PVC coated steel.

4. Outlet boxes may be used as junction boxes wherever possible.

C. Pullboxes and junction boxes:

1. Install pullboxes such that access to them is not restricted.

2. Outlet, switch, and junction boxes where surface mounted in exposed locations:
a. Cast ferrous boxes with mounting lugs, zinc or cadmium plating finish.

3. Outlet, control station, and junction boxes for installation in corrosive locations:
a. Fiberglass reinforced polyester, stainless steel, or plastic-coated steel to match the conduit system.
b. Furnished with mounting lugs.

4. Fire rated construction: Use materials and methods to comply with the listing requirements for the classified construction.

END OF SECTION
Wiring Devices
16140-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16140 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16140

WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Switches.

2. Receptacles.

3. Plates.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Federal Specifications (FS):

1. W-C 596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for.

2. W-S 896/2 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (General Specification).

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).

C. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA):

1. T568A - Eight-position jack pin/pair assignment.

2. T568B - Optional eight-position jack pin/pair assignment.

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. 20 - General Use Snap Switches.

2. 498 - Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.

3. 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. GFCI: Ground fault circuit interrupter.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Catalog cutsheets.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Engraving schedule:
a. Furnish complete engraving schedule for engraved nameplates.

Wiring Devices
16140-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16140 (DraftFinal)

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Wiring devices shall be UL listed and labeled.

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Switches, receptacles, and plates as indicated on the Drawings, wired and operable to form a complete system.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Switches:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Cooper Wiring Devices.
b. Hubbell.
c. Leviton.

B. Receptacles:

1. General purpose:
a. One of the following or equal:
1) Cooper Wiring Devices.
2) Hubbell.
3) Leviton.

C. Plates:

1. General location:
a. One of the following or equal:
1) Cooper Wiring Devices.
2) Legrand.

2. Wet or corrosive areas:
a. One of the following or equal:
1) ABB.
2) Cooper Wiring Devices.
3) Hubbell.
4) Pass and Seymour.

3. In-use covers:
a. One of the following or equal:
1) ABB.
2) Cooper Wiring Devices.

Wiring Devices
16140-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16140 (DraftFinal) 3) Pass and Seymour.
4) TayMac.

2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Switches:

1. General:
a. 120 to 277 VAC.
b. 20-amp.
c. Listed in accordance with UL 20.
d. Designed and constructed in accordance with FS W-S-896/2. e. Back and side wired unless otherwise indicated.
f. Integral grounding terminal.
g. Totally enclosed:
1) Color-coded body with color corresponding to amp rating. h. Provide switches with the operator style and contact arrangement as indicated on the Drawings and as required for proper operation. i. Color:
1) Ivory in finished areas.
2) Brown in all other areas.

2. General purpose switches:
a. Toggle type.

3. Switches for office areas:
a. Rocker type.
b. Rectangular.

4. Switches for use with photocell:
a. Maintained contact.
b. 2 circuit.
c. 3 position:
1) Center off.

B. Receptacles:

1. General purpose receptacles:
a. Single or duplex as indicated on the Drawings.
b. 125 VAC.
c. 20 amp or as indicated on the Drawings.
d. NEMA Type 5-20R configuration for 20 amp receptacles. e. Other NEMA configurations as indicated on the Drawings. f. Listed in accordance with UL 498.
g. Designed and constructed in accordance with FS W-C-596. h. Back and side wired.
i. 1-piece, rivet-less mounting strap.
j. Color:
1) Ivory in finished areas.
2) Brown in all other areas.
3) Orange when powered by a UPS.

2. Ground fault interrupter receptacles (GFCI):
a. 125 VAC.
b. 20 amp.
c. Trip level 4 to 6 mA.
d. Individual and feed through protection.

Wiring Devices
16140-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16140 (DraftFinal) e. UL 943 and UL 498 listed.
f. NEMA Type 5-20R configuration.
g. For damp or wet locations:
1) Weather resistant, in accordance with UL 498.

C. Plates:

1. General location:
a. Type 302 or 304 stainless steel.
b. Brushed satin finish.
c. Minimum thickness: 0.032 inches.
d. Rectangular or square shape.
e. Engraving:
1) Engrave each switch plate with the following:
a) Area served.
b) Panelboard and Circuit.
2) Engrave each receptacle plate with the following:
a) Panelboard and Circuit.
3) Treat engraving to improve visibility.
4) Characters shall be block letter pantograph engraved with a minimum character height of 1/8-inch.
f. Coordinate the number of gangs, number, and type of openings with the specific location.

2. Outdoor and wet areas requiring NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X enclosures:
a. General:
1) UL listed for wet locations.
2) Gasketed.
3) Die cast metal:
a) Match material to box material.
b. Switches:
1) Lever operated:
a) Provide toggle switch.
c. Receptacles:
1) Weatherproof in-use cover:
a) Die cast metal construction with electrostatic powder coating for corrosion resistance.
b) Gasketed.
c) Lockable.
d) UL listed and in accordance with NEC.

3. Corrosive areas:
a. Neoprene.
b. Gasketed.
c. Weatherproof.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting heights:

1. Process and production areas:
a. Switches and receptacles 48 inches from finished floor to top of plate.

Wiring Devices
16140-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16140 (DraftFinal)

2. Offices and finished areas:
a. Switches: 48 inches from finished floor to top of plate. b. Receptacles: 18 inches from finished floor to center of plate.

B. Receptacles:

1. Provide GFCI receptacles as indicated on the Drawings. a. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles in wet or damp areas.

2. Mount receptacles vertically:
a. Ground slot down.

C. Ensure plates make a firm seal with wall for recessed mounted devices:

1. Outside edges of plates parallel with building lines.

END OF SECTION

Low Voltage Wire Connections
16150-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16150 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16150

LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Wire connecting devices.

2. Terminations.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape.

B. CSA International (CSA):

1. C22.2 - No. 197-M1983 (R2208) - PVC Insulating Tape.

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. 486A-B - Standard of Safety for Wire Connectors.

2. 510 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape.

3. 1953 - Outline of Investigation for Power Distribution Blocks.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Catalog cutsheets.

2. Installation instructions.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials shall be UL listed.

1.05 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.06 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

Low Voltage Wire Connections
16150-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16150 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide a complete system of wiring connectors, terminators, fittings, etc., for a complete wiring system suitable for the cables and conductors used.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers for each type of technology are specified with the equipment in this Section.

2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Control connections:

1. Use insulated ring type wire terminators for connections to screw terminals:
a. With chamfered/funneled terminal barrel entry.
b. Deep internal serrations.
c. Long barrel design to reduce electrical resistance and increased insulator-barrel surface area to ensure that the insulator remains in contact with the barrel.
d. Electroplated-tin copper conductor.
e. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
1) ABB, Sta-Kon.

2. For process equipment connections, work from manufacturer’s drawings.

B. Joints, splices, taps, connections, and terminations:

1. 600-volt conductors:
a. Use solderless connectors.
b. Copper pigtail adaptors.
1) For use on select applications as approved by the Engineer. 2) 600 volt, 90 degrees Celsius rated.
3) UL 486A/B listed.
4) Manufacturers: The following or equal:
a) Burndy APY series.
b) ILSCO CPM series.
c. Use only plated copper alloy connectors or lugs:
1) Aluminum connectors or lugs are not acceptable for copper conductors.
d. Under those specific conditions where aluminum conductors have been allowed or are specified then the connectors for aluminum conductors shall be specifically designed for that purpose.
e. For wire Number 10 AWG and smaller, use compression splice caps, with insulating caps:
1) Manufacturers: The following or equal:
a) Buchanan, 2006S or 2011S, with 2007 or 2014 insulating caps. f. For wire Number 8 AWG and larger, use heavy duty copper compression connectors:
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) ABB.
b) Burndy.

Low Voltage Wire Connections
16150-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16150 (DraftFinal) g. Heat shrink tubing:
1) Suitable for indoors, outdoors, overhead, direct burial or submerged applications.
2) Minimum shrink ratio: 4 to 1.
3) Continuous operating temperature: -55 degrees Celsius to 110 degrees Celsius.
4) Internally applied adhesive sealant.
5) Cross-linked polyolefin:
a) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
(1) 3M, ITCSN.
(2) ABB, Shrink-Kon.

C. Insulating tape:

1. General purpose insulating tape:
a. Minimum 7 mil vinyl tape.
b. Suitable for application in an ambient of -18 degrees Celsius (0 degrees Fahrenheit).
c. Operating range up to 105 degrees Celsius (220 degrees Fahrenheit). d. Flame retardant, hot- and cold-weather resistant, UV resistant. e. For use as a primary insulation for wire cable splices up to 600 VAC. f. Meeting and complying with:
1) ASTM D3005 Type I.
2) UL 510.
3) CSA C22.2.
g. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
1) 3M, Scotch Number Super 33+.

2. General purpose color-coding tape:
a. Minimum 7 mil vinyl tape.
b. Suitable for application on PVC and polyethylene jacketed cables. c. For use indoors and outdoors in weather protected enclosures. d. Available with the following colors:
1) Red.
2) Yellow.
3) Blue.
4) Brown.
5) Gray.
6) White.
7) Green.
8) Orange.
9) Violet.
e. For use as phase identification, marking, insulating, and harnessing. f. Meeting and complying with:
1) UL 510.
2) CSA C22.2.
g. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
1) 3M, Scotch Number 35.

Low Voltage Wire Connections
16150-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16150 (DraftFinal) PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Load connections:

1. Connect loads to the circuits as indicated. Color-code branch circuits as specified in Section 16123 - 600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables.

B. Zero to 600-volt systems:

1. Make connections with the proper tool and die as specified by the device manufacturer.

2. Use only tooling and dies manufactured by the device manufacturer.

3. Insulate connections and splices with Scotch 33+ tape and Scotchfill, or pre-molded plastic covers, or heat shrink tubing and caps.

4. Number power and control wires before termination.

C. Motor connections (600 volts and below):

1. Terminate leads and wires with compression type ring lugs.

2. Terminations on motor leads, including leads that are connected together to accommodate the motor voltage, and the machine wires entering the motor terminal box from the power source, shall have ring type compression lugs.

3. Cover bolted connectors with a heat shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin material formed as a single opening boot:
a. In damp and wet locations, use a complete kit containing mastic that shall seal out moisture and contamination.
b. Shrink cap with low heat as recommended by the manufacturer.

4. Wire markers shall be readable after boot installation.

5. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
a. Raychem, MCK.

END OF SECTION
Utility Coordination
16210-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16210 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16210

UTILITY COORDINATION
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Coordination with the utility companies to provide service.

2. Contractor’s responsibilities for connecting to utilities and providing utility service to the facilities.

3. Descriptions of utility services required.

B. Utility contacts:

1. Electric utility:
a. Name: Joey Mckinney.
b. Utility: Roseville Electric Utility.
c. Address: 2090 Hilltop Circle, Roseville, CA 95747.
d. Phone number: (916) 774-5691.
e. E-mail: [email protected].

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Certification:

1. Submit certification that the intended installation has been coordinated with the utility companies.

2. Include a narrative description of the utility’s requirements and points of connection, names and telephone numbers for contacts at the utilities.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials and equipment used in performance of Electrical Work shall be listed or labeled by UL, or other equivalent recognized independent testing laboratory, for the class of service intended.

1.05 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

Utility Coordination
16210-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16210 (DraftFinal)

1.06 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Scheduling:

1. General:
a. Before the start of Site Work, make arrangements for temporary telephone and electrical service as required.

2. Electrical systems:
a. Before bidding, contact the utilities to determine the Work and materials that will be required from the Contractor for inclusion in the bid. b. Coordinate Work with the Engineer to minimize downtime of existing operating equipment and electrical distribution systems and to preclude unsafe operation:
1) Notify Owner 10 days before power interruptions.
2) Coordinate downtime with Owner and local electric utility. c. Before commencing Work, coordinate electric service entrance requirements with local electric utility to ensure that the installation will be complete:
1) Confirm the utility transformer size, electrical characteristics, and location are consistent with the design and service voltage provided by the electric utility.
2) Arrange for utility revenue meter.
3) Coordinate installation of metering CTs and PTs furnished by the electric utility.

3. Before commencing Site Work, coordinate underground conduit installations with other Work to eliminate conflicts and avoid interferences with other underground systems.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Electrical service:

1. Temporary construction power:
a. As specified in Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. b. Provide all Work and materials not provided by the electric utility. c. Pay fees and costs for temporary construction power.

2. Provide all Work and materials for providing the permanent electrical service, including, but not limited to:
a. Work and materials not provided by the electric utility. b. Provide electrical ducts, raceways, conductors, and connections indicated on the Drawings, and all other Work and materials required for a complete electrical service.

B. General:

1. Coordinate and obtain inspections and final installation approval from the serving utilities and authorities having jurisdiction.

Utility Coordination
16210-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16210 (DraftFinal)

2.02 MATERIALS
A. Provide materials in accordance with the applicable requirements of the utilities and as specified in these Specifications.

2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Provide equipment in accordance with the applicable requirements of the utilities and as specified in these Specifications.

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower
16222-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16222 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16222
LOW VOLTAGE MOTORS UP TO 500 HORSEPOWER
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Low voltage motors up to and including 500 horsepower (hp).

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Standards:

1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):
a. 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. b. 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
a. 43 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery.
b. 112 - IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. MG 1 - Motors and Generators.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Submit completed motor data sheets for each motor supplied:

1. As specified in Attachment A - Motor Data Sheet.

2. Manufacturer’s or other data sheets are not acceptable.

C. Product data:

1. Descriptive bulletins.

2. Machine tag and loop number as indicated on the Drawings and in the specification section number of the driven machine.

3. Complete electrical data.

4. Manufacturer’s storage recommendations.

5. Torque, current, and power factor versus speed curves:
a. At 100 percent rated voltage for full voltage started and VFD-driven motors. b. For motors on reduced voltage start at 70, 80, 90, and 100 percent rated voltage.

6. Accessories data:
a. Power factor correction capacitors:
1) Size in KVAR for motors not connected to variable frequency drives.

Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower
16222-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16222 (DraftFinal) b. Motor winding heaters:
1) Voltage.
2) Watts.
c. Winding temperature detectors:
1) Type.
2) Rating.
d. Moisture detectors.

7. Mechanical data:
a. Bearing design and bearing life calculations.
b. Resonant frequencies for VFD-driven motors 50 hp or greater.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. Motor weight.

2. Frame size.

3. Conduit box(es), size(s), and location(s).

4. Outline drawings with dimensions.

5. Installation details for the project seismic criteria.

E. Calculations:

1. Where Site conditions specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria exceed manufacturer’s ratings, provide derating calculations for each motor.

F. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s representative qualifications.

2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
a. With test reference standard identified.

G. Certification:

1. When motors are driven by variable speed drive systems, submit certification that selected motor:
a. Is capable of satisfactory performance under the intended load. b. Meets the requirements of the latest edition of NEMA MG 1 Part 31.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store motors in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.05 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.06 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

1. Provide a 2-year duration special warranty.

Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower
16222-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16222 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install electric motors and accessories as specified in this Section and the Sections specifying driven equipment to provide a complete and operable installation.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide equipment and components that are fully rated for the site elevation and operating environment where the equipment will be installed as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria and as indicated on the Drawings.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. Baldor.

2. General Electric.

3. Reliance.

4. Toshiba.

5. US Motors.

2.04 EQUIPMENT
A. 3-phase induction motors - general:

1. Voltage:
a. Motors 1/2 hp and larger shall be rated 460 V, 3-phase unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
b. Dual voltage motors rated 230/460 V; 3-phase are acceptable provided all leads are brought to the conduit box.

2. Motors driving identical machines shall be identical.

3. Motors greater than 1 hp and up to 500 hp shall meet the NEMA Premium Efficiency percent listed in NEMA MG 1.

4. Horsepower as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Horsepower ratings indicated on the Drawings are based on vendor’s estimates. Provide motors sized for the load of the actual equipment furnished without operating in the service factor.

5. Service factor:
a. 1.15 service factor on sine wave power.
b. 1.0 when driven by VFD.

6. Torque:
a. Provide motors that develop sufficient torque for acceleration to full speed at voltage 10 percent less than motor nameplate rating. b. When started using reduced voltage starters:
1) Provide motors that develop sufficient torque for acceleration to full speed.
c. NEMA Design B except where driven load characteristics require other than normal starting torque:
1) In no case shall starting torque or breakdown torque be less than the values specified in NEMA MG 1.

Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower
16222-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16222 (DraftFinal)

7. Enclosures:
a. As specified in the individual equipment Specifications or in this Section. b. Totally enclosed fan cooled:
1) Cast iron conduit box.
2) Tapped drain holes with Type 304 stainless steel plugs for frames 286 and smaller, and automatic breather and drain devices for frames 324 and larger.
c. Explosion proof:
1) Tapped drain holes with corrosion resistant plugs for frames 286 and smaller and automatic breather and drain devices for frames 324 and larger.
d. Lifting devices: Motors weighing 265 pounds (120 kilograms) or more shall have suitable lifting devices for installation and removal.

8. Manufactured with cast iron frames in accordance with NEMA MG 1 or manufacturer’s standard material for the specified rating.

9. Nameplates:
a. Provide motors with a permanent, stainless steel nameplate indelibly stamped or engraved with:
1) NEMA standard motor data:
a) Indicate compliance with NEMA MG 1 Part 31 for inverter duty motors.
2) AFBMA bearing numbers and lubrication instructions.

10. Hardware:
a. Type 304 stainless steel.

11. Conduit boxes:
a. Cast iron or stamped steel.
b. Split from top to bottom.
c. Provide gaskets at the following interfaces:
1) Frames and conduit boxes.
2) Conduit boxes and box covers.
d. Rotatable through 360 degrees in 90-degree increments:
1) Where available based on the size of the conduit box. e. Exceeding the dimensions defined in NEMA MG 1.
f. Provide grounding lugs inside conduit boxes for motor frame grounding.

12. Motor bearings:
a. Antifriction.
b. Regreasable and initially filled with grease for horizontal motors and vertical motors in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard design. c. Bearings and lubrication suitable for ambient temperature and temperature rise.
d. Suitable for intended application and have a rate for ABMA 9 or 11, L-10 rating life of 60,000 hours or more.
e. Fit bearings with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain, and relief fittings using extension tubes where necessary.
f. Where specified in the equipment Specifications, provide split-sleeve type hydrodynamic radial bearings. Provide a bearing isolator to protect bearings from contaminants.
g. Install a ball valve on the lubrication drain port.

13. Insulation systems:
a. Motors installed in ambient temperatures 40 degrees Celsius or less:
1) Provide Class F insulation.

Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower
16222-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16222 (DraftFinal) 2) Design temperature rise consistent with Class B insulation. 3) Rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius at the altitude where the motor will be installed.
b. Motors installed in ambient temperatures between 40 degrees Celsius and 50 degrees Celsius:
1) Provide Class F insulation.
2) Design temperature rise consistent with Class B insulation. 3) Rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 50 degrees Celsius at the altitude where the motor will be installed.
c. Motors installed in ambient temperatures between 50 degrees Celsius and 65 degrees Celsius:
1) Provide Class H insulation.
2) Design temperature rise consistent with Class F insulation. 3) Rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 65 degrees Celsius at the altitude where the motors will be installed.

14. Motor leads:
a. Insulated leads with non-wicking, non-hydroscopic material. Class F insulation.

15. Noise:
a. Maximum operating noise level in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

B. Vertical motors:

1. Enclosures:
a. As specified in the equipment specifications.

2. Thrust bearings:
a. Selected for combined rotor and driven equipment loads. b. Coordinate with driven equipment supplier for maximum vertical thrust of driven equipment.

3. Anti-reverse ratchet.

C. Motors driven by variable frequency drives:

1. Compatible with the variable frequency drives specified.

2. Inverter duty rated and labeled.

3. Meet the requirements of NEMA MG 1 Part 31.

4. Winding insulation meets the requirements of NEMA MG 1 Part 31.4.4.2.

5. Capable of running continuously at 1/10th of full speed, with no harmful effects or overheating.

6. Shaft grounding ring:
a. Provide a manufacturer-installed shaft grounding ring for each VFD-driven motor.
b. Aluminum frame and internal components.
c. Conductive microfiber brushes.
d. Maintenance free design.
e. Colloidal silver compound installed on shaft under the shaft grounding ring. f. High frequency ground strap.
g. Grounding ring:
1) Installed inside motor housing on drive end (DE).
2) Installed on exterior of motor housing on drive end with written permission from the Engineer.

Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower
16222-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16222 (DraftFinal) h. Refer to the following table for specific requirements based upon the driven motor:

Motor Size <100 hp 100 hp to 500 hp >500 hp
Voltage <600 VAC <600 VAC <600 VAC
AEGIS® Ring SGR SGR PRO
Bearing Insulation No NDE NDE & DE
Colloidal Sliver Recommended Required Required
HF Grounding Straps Required Required Required
Notes:

DE - drive end.

HF - AEGIS® High Frequency Grounding Strap.

NDE - non-drive end.

PRO - AEGIS® PRO Series Shaft Grounding Rings.

SGR - AEGIS® Shaft Grounding Ring Series.
i. AEGIS® bearing protection ring, as manufactured by Electro Static Technology, or equal.

7. Insulated bearings:
a. Provide motor manufacturer’s standard insulated sleeve or ceramic bearings.
b. Motors 100 hp to 500 hp: Provide insulated bearing on non-drive end (NDE) of the motor the end opposite the shaft grounding ring as recommended by the motor manufacturer.
c. Motors larger than 500 hp: Provide insulated bearings on both the DE and NDE, and AEGIS® PRO Series shaft ground ring externally mounted on the DE.

D. Motors installed in corrosive environments:

1. Nameplate indicating conformance to IEEE 841.

2. Stator double dipped in varnish and baked.

3. Stator and rotor coated with corrosion resistant epoxy.

4. Frame, brackets, fan guard and conduit box coated with minimum of 2 coats of epoxy paint.

5. Withstand salt spray tests in accordance with ASTM B117.

E. Single-phase motors:

1. Capacitor start type rated for operation at 115 volts, 60 hertz, unless otherwise specified or as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motors manufactured in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

3. Ball bearings: Sealed.

4. 1/2 hp or less fan motors:
a. Split-phase or shaded pole type when standard for the equipment. b. Open type when suitably protected from moisture, dripping water, and lint accumulation.

5. Wound rotor or commutator type single-phase motors only when their specific characteristics are necessary for application and their use is acceptable to the Engineer.

6. Integral overload protection.

Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower
16222-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16222 (DraftFinal)

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Motor winding heaters:

1. Provide 3-phase motors with belted or cartridge space heaters mounted within the motor enclosure.

2. Space heater rating shall be 120 volts, single-phase, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

3. Power leads for heaters wired into conduit box.

4. Installed within motor enclosure adjacent to core iron.

B. Winding temperature detectors:

1. Provide factory installed winding temperature detector with leads terminating in the conduit box:
a. Where required by the driven equipment Specification or as indicated on the Drawings.
b. RTD type, 2 per phase, 100-ohm platinum.

2. Temperature switches with normally closed contacts as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Bearing temperature detectors:

1. Where required by the driven equipment Specification or as indicated on the Drawings.

2. RTD type and wiring matches the winding RTDs.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Source testing:

1. Motors less than 250 hp:
a. Perform manufacturer’s standard production tests, including, but not limited to:
1) No load current.
2) High potential test.
3) Winding resistance.
b. Furnish copies of standard test reports on prototype or identical units.

2. Motors 250 hp and larger:
a. Perform tests in accordance with IEEE 112 or IEEE 43. b. Tests shall include the following:
1) Winding resistance (cold).
2) Locked rotor test.
3) Temperature rise test.
4) Load test.
5) Breakdown torque test.
6) No-load test.
7) High-potential test.
8) Insulation resistance test.
9) Vibration test in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
10) Speed-torque curve.
11) Shaft voltage.
12) Bearing insulation resistance.
13) Efficiency and power factor versus load test performed at rated speed and 50 percent, 75 percent, 90 percent, and 100 percent of Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower
16222-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16222 (DraftFinal) rated load. Curves from the motor tests shall be submitted for information.
14) Maximum allowable residual unbalance in each correction plane (journal) shall be calculated using the following equation:

U = 4 W/N
where:

U = residual correction plane unbalance, in ounces-inches W = static correction plane journal loading, in pounds
N = maximum specified operating speed, in revolutions
per minute
c. Furnish test reports and Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install motors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install shaft grounding ring on VFD-driven motors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field electrical acceptance testing:

1. As specified in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.

B. Before start-up, perform insulation resistance test on each motor furnished or installed on this project:

1. Windings energized to 1,000 volts DC for 1 minute.

2. Resistance measured at the end of the test, recorded, and submitted to the Engineer for review.

3. Inform the Engineer of any unusual or unacceptable test results.

4. This test is in addition to the acceptance tests in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.

END OF SECTION
Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower
16222-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16222 (DraftFinal)

ATTACHMENT A - MOTOR DATA SHEET

Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower
16222-Attachment A-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16222 (DraftFinal)

MOTOR DATA SHEET

MOTOR/ EQUIPMENT TAG MOTOR NUMBER

SPECIFICATION NUMBER OF DRIVEN MACHINE

MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA
MANUFACTURER MODEL/SERIES MODEL NO.

FRAME ENCLOSURE NEMA DESIGN

HP SERVICE FACTOR RPM

INSULATION CLASS VOLTS FULL LOAD AMPS

AMBIENT TEMP PHASE NO LOAD AMPS

DESIGN TEMP HERTZ LOCK ROTOR AMPS

INRUSH CODE LETTER
100% LOAD 75% LOAD 50% LOAD
GUARANTEED MINIMUM EFFICIENCIES:

GUARANTEED MINIMUM POWER FACTOR:

MAXIMUM SIZE OF POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR: KVAR

ACCESSORIES

MOTOR WINDING HEATER VOLTS WATTS
WINDING THERMAL PROTECTION:

WINDING TEMP SWITCHES (YES/NO)
RTD:

TYPE QUANTITY PER PHASE # OF WIRES

NOMINAL RESISTANCE NOMINAL TEMP COEFFICIENT

RECOMMENDED
ALARM

DEGREES

CELSIUS

RECOMMENDED
TRIP

DEGREES

CELSIUS

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
INVERTER DUTY* (YES/NO) PART WINDING (YES/NO) WYE - DELTA (YES/NO) 2 SPEED, 1 WINDING (YES/NO) 2 SPEED, 2 WINDING (YES/NO) AREA CLASSIFICATION:

CLASS DIVISION GROUP TEMP CODE
* Conforms to NEMA MG 1 Part 31.

Generator Connection Cabinet
16239-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16239 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16239

GENERATOR CONNECTION CABINET
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Generator connection cabinets.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. 1773 - Standard for Termination Boxes.

1.03 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

B. Anchoring and bracing.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Manufacturer of generator connection cabinet.

2. Bill of material.

3. Assembly ratings including:
a. Voltage.
b. Phase.
c. Short-circuit rating.
d. Continuous current amperage rating.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Product technical data.

2. Overall product dimensions: Height, width, depth.

3. Front and side elevation views.

4. Foot/wall print.

5. Line and load connection details.

6. Conduit entry location(s).

Generator Connection Cabinet
16239-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16239 (DraftFinal) D. Delegated Design Submittals:

1. Anchoring and bracing: Provide project-specific calculations based on support conditions and requirements to resist loads specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria:
a. To structures for equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F.
b. For equipment installed outdoors.
c. For wall mounted equipment weighing 125 pounds or more.

E. Installation instructions:

1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place.

2. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions.

F. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum of 5 years.

B. Generator connection cabinet shall be UL 1773 listed and labeled.

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Generator connection cabinets shall be a standard design and manufacture, not a custom-built piece of equipment.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. Berthold Electric.

2. Powertron Standard Series.

2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Ratings:

1. Voltage and amperage: As indicated on the Drawings.

2. Short circuit withstand: 35,000 ASC.

Generator Connection Cabinet
16239-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16239 (DraftFinal)

2.04 COMPONENTS
A. Enclosure:

1. Pad mount.

2. NEMA Type 3R.

3. Lockable latches on front door.

4. Access panel door for field terminated cables held captive by front door.

5. Drip hood.

B. Construction:

1. Bus material: Tin-plated copper.

2. Bus supported with UL recognized component insulators.

3. Permanent bus connection:
a. Long barrel compression lugs.
b. Quantity: As required for the number of conductors indicated on the Drawings.

4. Field (temporary) wiring connections:
a. Cam-Loks:
1) Color coded male 400A.
2) Quantity: 1 connection per 400A.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Cam-Lok snap covers.

1. Color-coded to match Cam-Loks.

2. Spring activated to close when not connected.

3. Thermoplastic covers and bodies.

2.06 FINISHES
A. Electrostatic powder coat.

B. Manufacturer’s standard color.

2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Source Testing:

1. Perform standard factory tests on the generator connection cabinets.

2. Test in accordance with the latest version of NEMA and UL standards.

3. Furnish test reports and Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Anchoring and bracing to structures:

1. Prepare equipment anchor setting template(s) and use to position anchors during construction of supporting structure(s).

2. Install anchors of type and material indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3. Install anchors with embedment indicated on approved anchoring designs.

Generator Connection Cabinet
16239-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16239 (DraftFinal)

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details.

B. General:

1. Mount as indicated on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION
Reduced Harmonic Variable Frequency Drives
16265-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16265 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16265

REDUCED HARMONIC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Reduced harmonic 18 pulse or active front end, variable frequency drives (VFD), 60 to 500 hp for control of standard NEMA Design B squirrel cage induction motors.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. 508A - Standard for Safety for Industrial Control Panels.

2. 61800-5-1 - Standard for Adjustable Speed Electrical Power Drive Systems.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. AFE: Active Front End.

2. IGBT: Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor.

3. VFD: Variable Frequency Drive.

1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

B. Anchoring and bracing.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures:

1. Custom prepared by the VFD manufacturer and specific for the equipment furnished.

B. Product data:

1. Manufacturer of the VFD.

2. Manufacturer of all components of the VFD.

3. Dimensions:
a. Height.
b. Width.
c. Depth.

4. Weight.

Reduced Harmonic Variable Frequency Drives
16265-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16265 (DraftFinal)

5. Nameplate schedule.

6. Bill of material.

7. Ratings:
a. Voltage.
b. Phase.
c. Input current.
d. Output current.
e. Interrupting rating.
f. Momentary current rating.

8. Catalog cutsheets for major components.

9. Surge protection data.

10. Design data:
a. Efficiency and power factor values.
b. Certification that the drive is sized for the full nameplate motor hp and current (at rated RPM) of the driven load at the installed altitude. c. Certification that based upon VFD design, cable length to motor, and motor dielectric insulation level that the VFD will not damage motor insulation due to carrier frequency, reflected wave, dv/dt, or other VFD produced characteristics.
d. Certification that electronic circuits and printed circuit boards are conformably coated.
e. Certification that the VFD will operate with all power sources (including alternate utilities and on-site generation when applicable).

11. List of recommended spare parts.

12. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F, submit the following as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria:
a. Manufacturer’s statement of seismic qualification with substantiating test data.
b. Manufacturer’s special seismic certification with substantiating test data.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Complete plan and elevation drawings showing:
a. All dimensions.
b. Panel, sub-panel and component layout indexed to the bill of material. c. Conduit connections.
d. Required clearance around equipment.

2. Block diagram showing the basic control and protection systems identifying the protection, control, trip and alarm functions, the reference signals and commands and the auxiliary devices.

3. Complete schematic, wiring and interconnection diagrams showing connections to both internal and external devices:
a. Wiring diagrams shall include terminal number and wire numbers.

4. Complete 1-line and 3-line diagrams, including, but not limited to, circuit breakers, motor circuit protectors, contactors, instrument transformers, meters, relays, timers, control devices, and other equipment comprising the complete system:
a. Device electrical ratings shall be clearly indicated on the Drawings.

Reduced Harmonic Variable Frequency Drives
16265-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16265 (DraftFinal) D. Calculations:

1. Harmonic study:
a. Perform a preliminary harmonic analysis:
1) Measure conductor lengths and obtain other information required for the analysis from Drawings.
2) A power system short circuit ratio of 20 shall be used. 3) VFDs shall be assumed to be operating at maximum speed and maximum load.
4) Short circuit current (ISC) utilized for the harmonic analysis calculations is defined as:
a) ISC = 20 * (Sum Total Full Load Amps of all VFDs).

2. Detailed calculations or details of the actual physical testing performed on the VFD to prove the VFD is suitable for the seismic conditions at the Project Site.

E. Delegated Design Submittals:

F. Installation instructions:

1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place.

2. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions.

G. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s representative qualifications.

2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

3. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

4. Test reports.

5. Report listing the setting of VFD adjustable parameters and their values after start-up.

H. Owner Training Submittals:

1. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

I. Certifications:

1. Certification letter from the VFD manufacturer stating that the VFD(s) are capable of operating with new and existing sources (utility sources and on-site generation in possible operating configurations).

2. Certification letter from the VFD manufacturer stating that the VFD(s) are capable of operating with new and existing VFDs in the existing and new distribution system.

Reduced Harmonic Variable Frequency Drives
16265-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16265 (DraftFinal) J. Control descriptions and control logic program:

1. Provide control descriptions describing the full control functionality to be incorporated into the programming of the drive including the following:
a. Functionality in local and remote.
b. Software and hardware interlocks.
c. Control response upon loss and restoration of power.

2. Provide complete register list of all IO available to the plant PCS.

3. Submit the completed control logic program for each and every device supplied.

4. Submit a list of networking address tables.

5. Submit configuration settings in accordance with actual motor and field equipment being supplied.

K. Operation and maintenance manuals:

1. As specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Spare parts list with supplier names and part numbers.

3. Start-up and commissioning instructions and data.

4. Complete bill of material indexed to the drawings identifying the catalog or part numbers, manufacturer, and quantities of components of the VFD system.

5. Operating manuals:
a. Submit operating instructions and a maintenance manual presenting full details for care and maintenance of each model of VFD provided under this Contract.

6. Operating instructions:
a. Written descriptions shall detail the operational functions of controls on the front panel including keypad functions and parameters.

7. Maintenance manual:
a. Furnish maintenance manuals with instructions covering details pertaining to care and maintenance of equipment, as well as identifying all parts. b. Manuals shall include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Adjustment and test instructions covering the steps involved in the initial test, adjustment and start-up procedures.
2) Detailed control instructions that outline the purpose and operation of every control device used in normal operation.
3) Schematic wiring and external diagrams:
a) Furnish drawings in a fully legible reduced 11-inch by 17-inch format.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:

1. Any third-party certification, safety or protection requirements shall be applied to the VFD system as a whole. Certification or protection of system elements or individual components by themselves is not acceptable.

2. UL 61800-5-1 listed and labeled.

3. Systems (packaged VFD panels) shall be UL 508A listed and labeled.

4. Manufactured by the VFD manufacturer at its own facility, which shall have a quality assurance program that is certified in accordance with ISO 9001.

Reduced Harmonic Variable Frequency Drives
16265-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16265 (DraftFinal)

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Ship VFDs to the job site on a dedicated air ride vehicle that will allow the Contractor to utilize on site off-loading equipment:

1. VFDs shall be delivered to the site pre-assembled and wired.

2. Ship each VFD with 2 tamperproof accelerometers that record the maximum shock and vibration experienced by the VFD during shipping and handling.

B. Furnish temporary equipment heaters within the VFD to prevent condensation from forming.

1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.09 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sequencing:

1. Conduct programming and data exchange coordination meeting.

2. Conduct factory acceptance test and submit certified test results for the Engineer’s review.

3. Ship equipment to Project Site after successful completion of factory acceptance test.

4. Assemble equipment in the field.

5. Conduct field acceptance tests including harmonic testing and submit results for the Engineer’s review:
a. Utility power sources and on-site generation shall be installed and operable for field test.

6. Submit manufacturer’s certification that equipment has been properly installed and is fully functional for the Engineer’s review.

7. Conduct Owner Training sessions.

8. Commissioning and process start-up as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

1. Provide a 2-year duration special warranty.

1.11 SYSTEM START-UP
A. VFD manufacturer shall be responsible for start-up of the VFDs in the presence of the equipment suppliers, Contractor, Engineer, and Owner.

1.12 MAINTENANCE
A. Manufacturer shall describe the field service system available to support the proposed VFD system. As a minimum describe:

1. Type of technical support available (e.g., system engineering and technician).

2. Location of field service personnel.

Reduced Harmonic Variable Frequency Drives
16265-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16265 (DraftFinal)

3. Field service daily rates in dollars per hour and dollars per day.

4. Guaranteed response times to service requests.

B. Spare parts:

1. The following spare parts shall be furnished:
a. 1 set of power and control fuses for each VFD.
b. 1 spare fan for each VFD unit.
c. 2 sets of ventilation filters for each VFD unit (if applicable in VFD cabinet louvers).
d. 1 power input module of each sized furnished.
e. 1 power output module of each size furnished.
f. Any special dedicated tools for emergency service and troubleshooting. g. Hardware and software required for configuration, maintenance, troubleshooting and inquiry of drive parameters.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide equipment and components that are fully rated for the site elevation and operating environment where the equipment will be installed as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria, and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Design requirements:

1. Each VFD system shall consist of all components required to meet the performance, protection, safety, testing and certification criteria of this Section.

2. VFD system:
a. Is a fully integrated package.
b. Includes material necessary to interconnect VFD system elements, even if shipped separately.

3. Any modifications to a standard product necessary to meet this Section shall be made only by the VFD manufacturer.

4. Each VFD shall be completely factory pre-wired, assembled and then tested as a complete package by the VFD manufacturer to ensure a properly coordinated, fully integrated drive system.

5. VFD shall be capable of operating standard NEMA Design B motors. It is the responsibility of the VFD manufacturer to ensure that the drive will not damage motor insulation due to high carrier frequency, reflected wave, dv/dt or other drive electrical characteristics:
a. VFD manufacturer shall furnish equipment necessary to mitigate potential damage to motor insulation.
b. Coordinate bearing protection methods with the supplier of the driven equipment.
c. Motors as specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower.

Reduced Harmonic Variable Frequency Drives
16265-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16265 (DraftFinal) C. Performance:

1. Operating envelope:
a. Speed and torque requirements:
1) Provide a variable torque or constant torque VFD as required by the driven load.
2) VFD shall be capable of producing a variable alternating voltage/frequency output to provide continuous operation over the 40 to 110 percent (25 to 66 hertz) speed range.
b. Current requirements:
1) Provide 100 percent of rated output current on a continuous basis. 2) Variable torque VFD:
a) Minimum 110 percent current overload for 1 minute.
3) Constant torque VFD:
a) Minimum 150 percent current overload for 1 minute.

2. Harmonics:
a. VFD shall meet the following distortion limits at 2 percent line voltage unbalance measured at the input terminals of the VFD:
1) Voltage harmonics: Maximum allowable total harmonic distortion, THD, for each VFD shall not exceed 5 percent.
2) Current harmonics: Maximum allowable total harmonic current distortion limit, TDD, for each VFD shall not exceed 5 percent as measured at the input terminals of the VFD system.

3. Efficiency:
a. VFD system minimum efficiency shall be 93 percent at rated kilowatt output of the VFD. VFD system efficiency shall be calculated as follows:

Efficiency (%) = Power (Load) X 100 Power (Supply)
b. Power:
1) Load power is the total 3-phase power measured at the output terminals of the drive system, including the output filter. 2) Supply power is the total power measured at the input terminals of the VFD including phase shifting transformer or active front end components and auxiliary equipment (e.g., controls, fans) for complete system operation.

4. Total power factor:
a. Minimum of 0.96 lagging across the entire speed range. b. Under no operating conditions shall the VFD have a leading power factor.

5. Frequency accuracy:
a. Minimum of within 0.01 percent.

6. Speed regulation:
a. Minimum of within 0.5 percent across the entire speed range.

7. Capable of working with all available power sources (utility and on-site generation) and with new and existing VFDs.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. ABB.

2. Allen-Bradley.

Reduced Harmonic Variable Frequency Drives
16265-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16265 (DraftFinal)

3. Eaton.

4. Schneider-Electric.

2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. General:

1. Sinusoidal pulse width modulated, (PWM), voltage source type drive shall consist of the following:
a. Rectifier section.
b. Direct current link with capacitors.
c. Insulated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT), inverter section. d. Microprocessor based controls.
e. Output filter.

2. Rectifier section:
a. Provide VFDs with either an 18-pulse rectifier section or an active front end. b. 18-pulse rectifier:
1) Integral phase shifting auto-transformer:
a) Converts 3-phase utility power to 3 sets of 3 power circuits with each set phase shifted and powering its own 3-phase bridge rectifier.
2) Minimum 18-pulse diode rectifier section consisting of three 3-phase bridge rectifiers:
a) Specifically designed as a system to share currents between the bridges to within 1 percent.
c. Active front end rectifier:
1) IGBT based converter module:
a) 6 IGBTs minimum.
2) Inductor/capacitor/inductor, LCL, harmonic filter:
a) Low pass filter.
b) Filter shall be disconnected from the line when the VFD is not running or powered off.
c) Installed within same enclosure as VFD.
d. 6-pulse rectifiers with harmonic filters are not allowed.

B. Ratings:

1. Voltage:
a. Input voltage: 480 volts plus or minus 10 percent, 3-phase, 3-wire, 60 hertz.
b. Solidly grounded.

2. Short-circuit rating:
a. 65 kA RMS symmetrical.

C. Operational features:

1. Protective features:
a. Annunciated at the keypad and available via network connection. b. Include the following protective features:
1) Motor overload protection.
2) Instantaneous overcurrent.
3) Instantaneous overvoltage.
4) Undervoltage.
5) Power unit overtemperature.

Reduced Harmonic Variable Frequency Drives
16265-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16265 (DraftFinal) 6) Phase loss.
7) VFD output short circuit.
8) VFD output ground fault.
9) Blown fuse with blown fuse indication.
10) IGBT protection.
11) Cooling fan failure.
12) Component failure.
13) Motor overtemperature protection:
a) Winding and bearing temperature:
(1) From 100 ohm, platinum RTDS.
(2) Quantity as specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower and the driven equipment
specification, or as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Control mode:
a. VFD shall operate in either a constant volts/hertz or sensorless vector mode. Selectable using the programming keypad.

3. Frequency control:
a. Minimum of 3 selectable skip frequencies with adjustable bandwidths. b. Programmable minimum frequency.
c. Programmable maximum frequency.

4. Acceleration/Deceleration:
a. Separately adjustable acceleration and deceleration rates. b. Each rate shall be adjustable from 0.01 to 1,800 seconds.

5. Spinning load:
a. Capable of determining the speed and direction of a spinning load, “catch” the load and accelerate or decelerate it without damage to the load.

6. Programmable loss of signal:
a. Upon loss of reference speed signal the VFD shall be programmable to either stop, maintain current speed, or default to preselected speed.

7. Power interrupt ride through:
a. Capable of continuous operation in the event of a power loss of 5 cycles or less.

8. Hardwired inputs and outputs:
a. Manufacturer’s standard number the following:
1) Analog inputs:
a) Configurable as either 0 to 10 volts or 4 to 20 mA.
2) Analog outputs:
a) Programmable 4 to 20 mA isolated.
3) Discrete inputs:
a) Programmable.
4) Discrete outputs:
a) Programmable.
b) Form C relay contacts.
5) Potentiometer 3-wire input.
b. Provide additional inputs and outputs as required to meet the control functions indicated on the Drawings.

9. Communications:
a. Provide each VFD with a Modbus TCP communications interface module. b. Use of gateways is not acceptable.
c. Control and monitoring of the bypass starter shall be available over the communications network.

Reduced Harmonic Variable Frequency Drives
16265-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16265 (DraftFinal) d. Protocols shall be certified by the governing authority.

10. Real-time clock:
a. Capable of providing time-stamped events.
b. Set locally or via a remote controller.
c. Programmable for day, month, year, local time zones in hours, minutes and seconds.

11. Diagnostics:
a. Minimum of 4 fault conditions in memory on a first in - first out basis. b. Time stamped.
c. Operating frequency, drive status and power mode shall also be stored at the time of the fault.
d. Fault memory shall be maintained in the event of a power outage. e. Fault memory shall be accessible via RS-232, RS-422, RS-485, or USB.

12. Automatic restart:
a. User selectable, automatic restart feature allowing the VFD to restart following a momentary power failure or other VFD fault:
1) Programmable for up to 9 automatic restart attempts with an adjustable time delay between restart attempts.

2.04 COMPONENTS
A. Enclosure:

1. NEMA Type 12.

2. Provide cooling devices required to maintain the VFD within the manufacturer’s specified temperature limits for the Project conditions:
a. Provide cooling device alarm.

B. Power disconnect:

1. Flange mounted thermal magnetic circuit breaker:
a. Lockable in the OFF position.

C. Phase shifting transformer for 18-pulse VFDs:

1. Auto-transformer.

2. Integral part of the VFD assembly and factory mounted and wired within the VFD enclosure.

3. Embedded thermal protection.

4. Rated for rectifier duty.

5. Copper or aluminum windings with 180-degree Celsius insulation.

D. Output filter:

1. 3 percent load reactor.

E. Keypad:

1. Furnished with a keypad for programming and control.

2. Password security to protect drive parameters.

3. Mounted on the door of the VFD.

4. Back-lit LCD with a minimum of 2 lines of a minimum of 16 characters each.

5. Programming and display features language: English.

6. Capable of displaying the following parameters:
a. Speed (percent).
b. Input current (amperes).

Reduced Harmonic Variable Frequency Drives
16265-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16265 (DraftFinal) c. Output current (amperes).
d. Output frequency (hertz).
e. Input voltage.
f. Output voltage.
g. Total 3-phase kilowatt.
h. Kilowatt hour meter.
i. Elapsed run time meter.
j. Revolutions per minute.
k. Direct current bus voltage.

7. In addition to keys required for programming, keypad shall have the following:
a. Automatic/Manual selector.
b. Start pushbutton.
c. Stop pushbutton.
d. Jog pushbutton.
e. Speed increment.
f. Speed decrement.
g. Forward/Reverse selector.
h. RUN indicator.
i. PROGRAM indicator.
j. FAULT indicator.
k. DRIVE READY indicator.
l. Diagnostics.

8. Provide the VFD with the hardwired controls indicated on the Drawings.

F. Control power transformer:

1. Mounted and wired inside the drive enclosure:
a. Primary and secondary fusing.

2. Size transformer to supply power to all VFD controls and options as well as any external devices indicated on the Drawings including the motor winding heater.

G. Bypass starter:

1. Where indicated on the Drawings, the VFD shall be furnished with an integral full voltage non-reversing bypass starter.

2. Provide motor overload protection for bypass operation.

3. Provide mechanically/electrically interlocked contactors for bypass operation.

4. Provide a VFD/Off/Bypass selector switch on the VFD front panel.

H. Line side tuning for AFE VFDs:

1. Provide 2 sets of line side tuning parameters: One for the normal utility supply, another for the alternate (generator) supply.

2. Parameters shall be selectable via the communications network or a digital input from a contact enclosure at the automatic transfer equipment or PCIS.

3. When more than 1 generator source is used, VFD shall be capable of storing multiple generator profiles to use as the alternate supply based on command inputs.

Reduced Harmonic Variable Frequency Drives
16265-12 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16265 (DraftFinal)

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Surge protection:

1. Metal oxide varistors:
a. Provide protection for the VFD against:
1) Line transients: 5,000-volt peak minimum.
2) Line to ground transients: 7,000-volt peak minimum.

B. Conformal coating:

1. Provide conformal coating material applied to electronic circuitry and printed circuit boards to act as protection against moisture, dust, temperature extremes, and chemicals such as H2S and chlorine.

C. Air filters:

1. Mounted on the outside of the VFD enclosure:
a. Replaceable without requiring that the VFD be turned off or the door opened.

2. Located on the front or top of the VFD enclosure:
a. Side or rear mounted air filters are not acceptable.

2.06 FINISHES
A. Enclosure finish shall be manufacturer’s standard gray.

2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Source Testing:

1. Not witnessed.

2. Testing procedures specified are the minimum acceptable requirements.

Manufacturer may perform additional tests at its discretion.

3. Failure of any component during testing requires replacement of the faulted component and a complete retest.

4. Component tests:
a. Preliminary inspection:
1) Verify that components are correct.
2) Verify that connections are properly torqued.
b. Printed circuit boards:
1) Test each printed circuit board in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard testing procedure.
c. Wiring:
1) Control and power wiring continuity verified point-to-point. 2) Hi-pot power and control wiring at manufacturer’s recommended levels.
3) Verify ground bond resistance.
d. Load testing:
1) No load testing in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard factory test procedure.
2) Full load testing:
a) Test each VFD and all control logic with a representative motor or dynamometer load to simulate field operation conditions at 25 percent, 50 percent, and 100 percent full load current.

Reduced Harmonic Variable Frequency Drives
16265-13 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16265 (DraftFinal) b) Tests shall be conducted in a manner in which the inverter (IGBT) section supplies all the output power (kw) of the VFD system. Control strategies using a contactor or other means of bypassing the VFD when operating at the line frequency shall not be permitted.
c) Tests shall be conducted using a minimum output frequency of 60 hertz, and a minimum switching frequency of 2.5 kHz.

5. Submit control description checklist and IO checklist organized by VFD for use during the control logic portion of the testing.

6. Furnish test reports and the Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.

Include the following:
a. Efficiency at rated power output and output frequency of 60 hertz. b. Power factor at 0 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent speed.
c. Harmonics at the input terminals of the VFD at 100 percent speed and 100 percent load:
1) Voltage distortion: Measure individual harmonics up to and including the 50th harmonic and total harmonic distortion.
2) Current distortion: Measure individual harmonics up to and including the 50th harmonic and total demand distortion.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Anchoring and bracing to structures:

1. Prepare equipment anchor setting template(s) and use to position anchors during construction of supporting structure(s).

2. Install anchors of type and material indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3. Install anchors with embedment indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details.

B. General:

1. Furnish cables, conduit, lugs, bolts, and other accessories needed to complete installation of the VFD (free-standing or within motor control center).

2. Assemble and install the VFD in the locations and with the layouts indicated on the Drawings.

3. Perform Work in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and Shop Drawings.

4. Furnish components and equipment as required to complete the installation.

5. Replace any hardware lost or damaged during the installation or handling to provide a complete installation.

6. Install free-standing enclosures on a raised concrete housekeeping pad:
a. Provide structural leveling channels in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations to provide proper alignment of the units. b. Weld and/or bolt the VFD frame to the leveling channels.

Reduced Harmonic Variable Frequency Drives
16265-14 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16265 (DraftFinal)

7. Provide openings in top or bottom of the VFD (free-standing or within motor control center) enclosure for conduit only, no additional openings will be allowed:
a. Improperly cut holes will require that the entire panel be replaced:
1) No hole closers or patches will be allowed.

8. Bundle circuits together and terminate in each unit:
a. Tie with nylon wire ties. As specified in Section 16123 - 600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables.
b. Label wires at each end with wire numbers shown on the approved Control Drawings.
c. Connections to and from the VFD (free-standing or within motor control center) enclosure must be made via terminal blocks.

C. Installation Verification:

1. Furnish Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation Verification.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Field electrical acceptance testing:

1. As specified in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.

C. Provide the services of a VFD manufacturer representative for start-up assistance and training:

1. Inspection and field adjustment:
a. Supervise the equipment installation and confirm controls have been properly installed, aligned, adjusted, and readied for operation. b. Configure AFE drives for new and existing sources (utility sources and on-site generation in possible operating configurations).

2. Start-up field testing:
a. Provide technical direction for testing, checkout, and startup of the VFD equipment in the field.
b. Under no circumstances are any portions of the drive system to be energized without authorization from the manufacturer’s representative. c. Compliance with the following specified parameters shall be verified by the VFD manufacturer:
1) Motor terminal voltage:
a) Make field measurements at the motor connection box. b) Make measurements of the full speed range of the VFD. c) Make measurements with a recording type oscilloscope. 2) Harmonics:
a) Make field measurements at the input terminals of the VFD with and without the VFD in operation.
b) Make measurements with a recording type harmonic analyzer displaying individual and total harmonic currents and voltages:
(1) Record currents and voltages for a minimum of 10 minutes. (2) Analyzers using snapshots are not acceptable.
d. Utility sources and on-site generation shall be operational for start-up field testing.

Reduced Harmonic Variable Frequency Drives
16265-15 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16265 (DraftFinal)

3. Furnish field acceptance test procedures and forms used during the tests:
a. Certification that the actual measured harmonic distortion for both voltage and current is within the specification limits at the installed site. b. Certification that the actual measured peak voltage at the motor terminations is less than 90 percent of the motor insulation dielectric withstand level.

3.04 OWNER TRAINING
A. Perform Owner Training as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Make adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, Engineer, or testing firm.

B. Provide the services of a VFD manufacturer factory technician to make drive parameter and protective device settings:

1. Protective device settings provided by the VFD manufacturer in accordance with the manufacturer of the driven equipment requirements.

2. Provide documentation of VFD settings, including, but not limited to:
a. Minimum speed.
b. Maximum speed.
c. Skip speeds.
d. Current limit.
e. Acceleration time.
f. Deceleration time.
g. Carrier frequency.

C. Programming:

1. Manufacturer/Supplier may contract with the Project programmer for portions of the tasks below.

2. Provide network communication card between the drive to the Owner’s control system as required.

3. Provide control logic as indicated in the control descriptions.

4. Configure network communications with applicable security settings, IP addresses and any other addressing tables required to provide a fully functioning system.

5. Coordinate IP addresses with the Owner.

6. Coordinate data exchange approach for efficient communications to the Owner’s control and maintenance systems. This effort will include a coordination meeting to discuss the data exchange approach including formatting and mapping.

7. Provide witnessed Source Testing to prove out overload control logic as well as interaction with the Owner’s control and maintenance systems at the Supplier’s facility. ICSC/programmer shall attend witnessed testing.

END OF SECTION

Dry-Type Transformers
16272-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16272 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16272

DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Enclosed dry-type transformers:
a. Rated 1 to 1,000 kilovolt-amperes, single and 3-phase. b. Primary voltage 600 volts and below.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

1. 389 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Testing Electronics Transformers and Inductors.

2. C57.96 - IEEE Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers.

B. Underwriters Laboratory (UL):

1. 1561 - Standard for Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers.

C. United States Department of Energy (DOE):

1. 10 CFR Part 431 - Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment.

1.03 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

B. Anchoring and bracing.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Catalog cutsheets.

2. Nameplate data.

3. Dimensions:
a. Height.
b. Width.
c. Depth.

4. Inrush current.

5. Insulation system and temperature constraints.

6. Number and rating of taps.

7. Sound levels.

Dry-Type Transformers
16272-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16272 (DraftFinal)

8. Connection diagrams:
a. Primary.
b. Secondary.

9. BIL rating.

10. Required clearances.

11. Percent impedance.

12. Efficiency.

13. Certification of full capacity capability at the Project elevation and ambient conditions.

14. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F, submit the following as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria:
a. Manufacturer’s statement of seismic qualification with substantiating test data.
b. Manufacturer’s special seismic certification with substantiating test data.

C. Delegated Design Submittals:

D. Installation instructions:

1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place.

2. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions.

E. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

1.05 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.06 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Dry-Type Transformers
16272-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16272 (DraftFinal) B. Provide 3-phase or 1-phase, 60 hertz dry-type with voltage ratings, kilovolt-ampere capacities, and connections as indicated on the Drawings:

1. Transformers shall provide full capacity at the Project elevation and environmental conditions as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria after all derating factors have been applied.

2. Suitable for continuous operation at full rating with normal life expectancy in accordance with IEEE C57.96.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. ABB.

2. Eaton.

3. Jefferson.

4. Schneider Electric.

2.03 MATERIALS
A. Cores:

1. Non-aging, grain-oriented silicon steel.

2. Magnetic flux densities below the saturation point.

B. Windings:

1. High-grade magnet wire.

2. Impregnated assembly with non-hydroscopic, thermo-setting varnish:
a. Cured to reduce hot-spots and seal out moisture.

3. Material electrical grade:
a. Copper.

2.04 EQUIPMENT
A. General:

1. 10 kilovolts BIL for 600-volt class windings.

2. Sound levels, in accordance with IEEE 389 test conditions, not to exceed:

Kilovolt-Amperes Range Audible Sound Level (dB)
1-9 40
10-50 45
51-150 50
151-300 55
301-500 60
501-700 62
701-1,000 64

3. Taps:
a. 15 kilovolt-amperes and less:
1) Two 5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage. b. 25 kilovolt-amperes and larger:
1) Four 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.

Dry-Type Transformers
16272-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16272 (DraftFinal) 2) Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above rated voltage. c. Operated by a tap changer handle or tap jumpers accessible through a panel.

4. Terminals:
a. UL listed for either copper or aluminum conductors.
b. Rated for 75 degrees Celsius.

5. Daily overload capacities, at rated voltage and without reduction in life, in accordance with IEEE C57.96.

B. Transformers less than 15 kilovolt-amperes:

1. Insulation class: 185 degrees Celsius.

2. Temperature rise: 115 degrees Celsius.

C. Energy efficient transformers 15 kilovolt-amperes and larger:

1. Insulation class: 220 degrees Celsius.

2. Temperature rise: 115 degrees Celsius, except as noted below:
a. 150-degree Celsius rise for dry-type transformers located in motor control centers.

3. Efficiency:
a. In accordance with DOE 10 CFR Part 431.

D. Enclosures:

1. Heavy gauge steel:
a. Indoor: NEMA Type 2.

2. Louvers to limit coil temperature rise to the value stated above, and case temperature rise to 50 degrees Celsius.

3. Built-in vibration dampeners to isolate the core and coils from the enclosure:
a. Neoprene vibration pads and sleeves.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Nameplates:

1. Non-corrosive metal or UL listed non-metallic:
a. Stamped, engraved or printed with the following information:
1) Phases.
2) Frequency.
3) Kilovolt-ampere rating.
4) Voltage ratings.
5) Temperature rise.
6) Impedance.
7) Insulation class.
8) BIL rating.
9) Connection diagram.
10) Weight.
11) Manufacturer.
12) Identification “transformer”.
13) Classes of cooling.
14) Tap voltage(s).
15) Vector diagram.

Dry-Type Transformers
16272-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16272 (DraftFinal)

2.06 FINISHES
A. Finish to consist of de-greasing, phosphate cleaning, and an electrodeposited manufacturer’s standard gray enamel rust-inhibiting paint.

2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory tests:

1. Applied voltage test to each winding and from each winding to the core:
a. 600-volt class winding 4.5 kilovolt.

2. Induced voltage test at 2 times normal voltage and 400 hertz for 1,080 cycles.

3. Voltage ratio and polarity.

4. Sound level, performed in a test room with ambient sound level not exceeding 24 dB.

5. Perform tests in accordance with UL 1561.

6. Furnish test reports and Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Anchoring and bracing to structures:

1. Prepare equipment anchor setting template(s) and use to position anchors during construction of supporting structure(s).

2. Install anchors of type and material indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3. Install anchors with embedment indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details.

B. General:

1. Mounted as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Install where not in direct contact with building structure.

3. Install on single layer vibration pad under the entire mounting surface:
a. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
1) Korfund.

4. Make any necessary connections to the enclosure with liquidtight flexible conduit having neoprene gaskets and insulated ground bushings.

5. Ground the enclosure:
a. To an equipment ground conductor in the conduit.
b. To the facility grounding electrode system.

6. Floor mounted transformers:
a. Install transformers on housekeeping pads.
b. Install transformers with adequate space from walls or other enclosures for proper ventilation in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Dry-Type Transformers
16272-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16272 (DraftFinal)

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field electrical acceptance testing:

1. As specified in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Set the transformer taps as required to obtain nominal output voltage on the secondary terminals.

END OF SECTION
Surge Protective Devices
16285-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16285 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16285

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. High-energy surge protective devices.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

1. C62.41.1 - Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1,000 V and less) AC Power Circuits.

2. C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1,000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits.

3. C62.45 - Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1,000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits.

4. C62.62- Standard Test Specifications for Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) for Use on the Load Side of the Service Equipment in Low Voltage (1,000 V and less) AC Power Circuits.

B. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

D. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA):

1. 20 - Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection.

2. 70 - National Electric Code (NEC).

3. 75 - Standard for the Fire Protection of Information Technology Equipment.

4. 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.

E. Underwriters Laboratory (UL):

1. 96A - Standard for Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems.

2. 1283 - Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters.

3. 1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. In: Nominal discharge current.

2. MCOV: Maximum continuous operating voltage.

3. MOV: Metal oxide varistor.

4. SAD: Silicon avalanche diode.

5. SCCR: Short circuit current rating.

Surge Protective Devices
16285-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16285 (DraftFinal)

6. SPD: Surge protective device.

7. VPR: Voltage protection rating.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Furnish complete product data confirming detailed compliance or exception statements to all provisions of this Section.

2. Manufacturer’s catalog cutsheets indicating:
a. Manufacturer and model numbers.
b. Ratings of each SPD, including, but not limited to:
1) Short circuit current rating.
2) Nominal discharge current.
3) Maximum continuous operating voltage.
4) Voltage protection rating.
5) System voltage.
6) System frequency.
7) Surge current capacity.

3. Submit independent test data from a nationally recognized testing laboratory verifying the following:
a. Overcurrent protection.
b. UL 1449.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Electrical and mechanical drawings that detail:
a. Unit dimensions.
b. Weights.
c. Components.
d. Field connection locations.
e. Mounting provisions.
f. Connection details.
g. Wiring diagram.

D. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s representative qualifications.

2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

E. Owner Training Submittals:

1. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

F. Operation and maintenance manuals:

1. As specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Provide the manufacturer’s manual with installation, start-up, and operating instructions for the specified system.

Surge Protective Devices
16285-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16285 (DraftFinal)

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide SPD units that are designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with the following codes and standards:

1. IEEE C62.41.1, C62.41.2, C62.45, C62.62.

2. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIBS PUB 94).

3. NEMA.

4. NFPA 20, 70, 75, and 780.

5. UL 1449 current edition and UL 1283.

B. IEC 801.

C. Provide surge protective devices that are suitable for application in IEEE C62.41.1, C62.41.2 Category A, B, and C3 environments, as tested to IEEE C62.45.

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.07 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sequencing:

1. Coordinate with and provide SPD equipment to the electrical equipment manufacturer before final assembly and factory testing.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

B. Extended warranty:

1. Furnish a manufacturer’s standard parts and labor warranty from date of shipment against any part failure when installed in compliance with the manufacturer’s written instructions, UL listing requirements, and any applicable national, state, or local electrical codes.

2. Warranty shall include:
a. Direct, factory trained employees must be available within 48 hours for assessment of the problem.
b. A 24-hour toll-free 800-number for warranty support.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide surge protection as indicated on the Drawings.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. ABB.

2. Eaton.

Surge Protective Devices
16285-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16285 (DraftFinal)

3. Southern Tier Technologies.

4. Schneider Electric.

2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Provide Type 1 or Type 2 SPD units as required for the locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Electrical requirements:

1. SPD ratings are to be consistent with the nominal system operating voltage, phase, and configuration as indicated on the Drawings.

2. MCOV:
a. For the SPD and all components in the suppression path (including all MOVs, SADs, and selenium cells): Greater than 115 percent of the nominal system operating voltage.

3. Operating frequency:
a. 47 to 63 hertz.

4. SCCR:
a. 65 kAIC minimum, but not less than the equipment it is connected to as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Marked on the SPD in accordance with UL 1449 and the NEC.

5. Nominal discharge current In:
a. 20 kA.

6. Maximum VPR:

Modes 240/120 3W 208Y/120 480Y/277 480 V
L-N, L-G, N-G 700 700 1,200 1,800
L-L 1,200 1,200 2,000 1,800

7. Peak surge current:
a. Service entrance locations:
1) 240 kA per phase minimum.
2) 120 kA per mode minimum.
b. Branch locations:
1) 120 kA per phase, minimum.
2) 60 kA per mode minimum.

C. Protection modes:

1. Provide SPD protection modes as follows:
a. Line to Neutral (L-N) where applicable.
b. Line to Ground (L-G).
c. Neutral to Ground (N-G), where applicable.

D. Environmental requirements:

1. Storage temperature:
a. -40 to 122 degrees Fahrenheit.

2. Operating temperature:
a. 32 to 140 degrees Fahrenheit.

3. Relative humidity:
a. 5 to 95 percent.

Surge Protective Devices
16285-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16285 (DraftFinal)

4. Audible noise:
a. Less than 45 dBa at 5 feet (1.5 m).

5. Operating altitude:
a. Zero to 12,000 feet above sea level.

2.04 COMPONENTS
A. Enclosure:

1. Located in electrical equipment as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Internal connections:

1. Provide low impedance copper plates for intra-unit connections:
a. Attach surge modules using bolted connections to the plates for low impedance connections.

2. Size connections, conductors, and terminals for the specified surge current capacity.

C. Surge diversion modules:

1. MOV:
a. Where multiple MOVs are used in parallel, utilize computer matched MOVs to within 1 volt variance and tested for manufacturer’s defects.

D. Overcurrent protection:

1. Individually fuse components, including suppression, filtering, and monitoring components:
a. Rated to allow maximum specified nominal discharge current capacity. b. Overcurrent protection that limits specified surge currents is not acceptable.

E. Connections:

1. Provide terminals to accommodate wire sizes up to #2 AWG.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Unit status indicators:

1. Provide red and green solid-state indicators, with printed labels, on the front cover to redundantly indicate on-line unit status:
a. The absence of the green light and the presence of the red light indicate that surge protection is reduced and service is needed to restore full operation.
b. Indicates the status of protection on each mode or phase.

B. Dry contacts for remote monitoring:

1. Electrically isolated Form C dry contacts (1 A/125 VAC, or 2 A/24 VDC) for remote monitoring of system integrity, and indication of under voltage, phase and/or power loss.

C. Provide an audible alarm which activates under any fault condition:

1. Alarm On/Off switch to silence the alarm.

2. A visible LED will confirm whether alarm is On or Disabled.

3. Locate both switches and the audible alarm on the unit’s front cover.

Surge Protective Devices
16285-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16285 (DraftFinal) D. Provide transient counter to count transient voltage surges:

1. LCD readout located on the unit’s front cover.

2. Counter to utilize batteries with a 10-year nominal life or non-volatile memory to maintain accurate counts in the event of power loss.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Source Testing:

1. Perform manufacturer’s standard factory test:
a. Perform testing in accordance with UL 1449.

2. Furnish test reports and Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.

B. Permanently affix surge rating to the SPD.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Follow the manufacturer’s recommended installation practices and comply with all applicable codes.

B. Special techniques:

1. Do not subject SPD to insulation resistance testing.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field electrical acceptance testing:

1. As specified in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.

3.03 OWNER TRAINING
A. Perform Owner Training as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

END OF SECTION
Electrical Power Monitoring
16290-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16290 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16290

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Power meters and accessories.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standard Institute (ANSI):

1. C12.20 - Electricity Meters - 0.2 and 0.5 Accuracy Classes.

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

1. C57.13.6 - Standard for High Accuracy Instrument Transformers.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. FS - Full scale.

2. SSM - Solid state multifunction power meter.

3. THD - Total harmonic distortion.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Power meter data, including, but not limited to:
a. Power requirements.
b. Communications protocols.
c. Input/outputs.
d. Dimensions.
e. Measurement functions.
f. Front panel controls.
g. Display characteristics.

2. Accessory data:
a. Test switch dimensions and wiring diagrams.

C. Owner Training Submittals:

1. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

D. Operation and maintenance manuals:

1. As specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Descriptive and technical bulletins and sales aids edited to reflect only the equipment to be provided and covering each of the components in the system.

Electrical Power Monitoring
16290-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16290 (DraftFinal)

3. A maintenance section including instruction leaflets and technical data necessary to setup, change setup and maintain the power meters.

4. Original licensed copies of software and software manuals.

E. Configuration files and reports:

1. Settings, including, but not limited to:
a. Device tag name.
b. IP addresses.
c. Alarm settings.
d. Time synchronization settings.
e. Security settings.

2. Configuration files are to be provided in the selected manufacturer’s native format.

3. Configuration reports are to be submitted in .PDF format, listing each configured parameter setting and description of each parameter.

1.05 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.06 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. ABB.

2. Allen-Bradley.

3. Eaton.

4. Electro Industries/GaugeTech Power Meters.

5. GE Multilin.

6. Schneider Electric.

2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Power meters:

1. Power meter shall include at a minimum:
a. Individual phase currents, within 0.5 percent FS.
b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral voltages, within 0.5 percent FS. c. Watts, VARs, VA, within 1 percent FS.
d. Watt-hours, VAR-hours, VA-hours, within 1 percent FS. e. PF (apparent and displacement), within 2 percent FS. f. Frequency, within 1 percent hertz.
g. Demand:
1) Ampere, within 0.5 percent FS.
2) Watt, VAR, VA, within 1 percent FS.

Electrical Power Monitoring
16290-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16290 (DraftFinal) h. Minimum and maximum values:
1) Volts (L-L), volts (L-N), current, watts, VARS, VA.
2) Power factor:
a) Apparent.
b) Displacement.
c) Frequency.
i. Synch-input kilowatts utility.
j. LCD with LED backlight.

2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Current transformers:

1. Ring type:
a. Suitable for service within low or medium voltage equipment as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Designed to have a mechanical and thermal rating to withstand short-circuit current, stresses, and heating effects equal to the rating of the equipment of the application.

2. Current ratio: As indicated on the Drawings.

3. Rated in accordance with IEEE C57.13.6 with accuracy of the current transformers suitable for relay accuracy class and rated for 200 percent burden for the required connected devices.

4. Identify polarity with standard marking or symbols.

5. Capable of carrying rated primary current continuously without damage.

6. Install secondary wiring from current transformers in a suitable wiring trough, or conduit to proper short-circuiting type terminal blocks for connection to relays, instruments, and other devices.

7. 3 CTs for 3-wire systems. 4CTs for 4-wire systems.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install power meters in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions in the electrical equipment as indicated on the Drawings.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field electrical acceptance testing:

1. As specified in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.

3.03 OWNER TRAINING
A. Perform Owner Training as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

END OF SECTION

Electrical System Studies
16305-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16305 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16305

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Short-circuit fault analysis studies.

2. Protective device coordination study.

3. Arc-flash hazard study.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

1. 1584 - IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Modified: Equipment with load additions or with loads being removed that affect fault current, include new overcurrent protective devices that require settings and device coordination, or require additional/removal/replacement of arc flash labels.

1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

B. Signed and sealed electrical system study reports.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Credentials of the individual(s) performing the study and the individual in responsible charge of the study.

C. General:

1. Format and quantity:
a. 6 bound copies of all final reports.
b. 3 complete sets of electronic files on CD or DVD media, including the electrical system model(s), configuration files, custom libraries, and any Electrical System Studies
16305-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16305 (DraftFinal) other files used to perform the studies and produce the reports. Also provide an electronic version of the bound reports in PDF format.

2. One-line diagrams:
a. The following information shall be included at a minimum:
1) Motor horsepower.
2) Transformer data:
a) kVA.
b) Configuration.
3) Cable data:
a) Insulation.
b) Size.
c) Length.
b. Fully legible at 11-inch by 17-inch size.

D. Initial short-circuit fault analysis:

1. Based on the Contract Documents and electric utility information.

2. Include a description of all operating scenarios.

3. One-line diagrams.

4. Indicate the estimated available short-circuit current at the line side terminals of each piece of equipment covered by the scope of the study. a. Measure conductor lengths from the Drawings. Use of arbitrary short conductor lengths is not allowed.
b. Provide a list of assumptions used in the initial study.

E. Delegated Design final studies and reports:

1. Include the following sections at a minimum:
a. Copies of correspondence and data obtained from the electric utility company.
b. Letter certifying the inspection and verification of existing equipment and incorporation of applicable RFI’s and change orders.
c. Short-circuit fault analysis:
1) Modify the initial short-circuit fault analysis as follows:
a) Utilize the actual equipment provided on the project. b) Utilize conductor lengths based on installation.
c) Update one-line diagrams to show as-built conditions. 2) Descriptions, purpose, basis, assumptions, recommendations, and scope of the study.
3) Normal system connections and those that result in maximum fault conditions.
4) Tabulation of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings compared to maximum calculated short-circuit duties.
5) Fault current calculations for the cases run including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of computer software printouts. d. Protective device coordination study shall include:
1) Descriptions, purpose, basis, assumptions, recommendations, and scope of the study.
2) List requirements used in the selection and setting criteria for any protective devices.
3) TCCs graphically indicating the coordination proposed for the system on log-log graphs:
a) All TCCs shall be in color.

Electrical System Studies
16305-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16305 (DraftFinal) 4) Tabulation of relay, fuse, circuit breaker, and other protective devices in graphical form with a one-line diagram to display area coordination. 5) Where coordination could not be achieved, an explanation shall be included in the report to support the statement along with recommendations to improve coordination. Recommended
equipment modifications or settings shall be in a tabulated form. 6) Protective device settings in a tabulated format.
e. Include in the arc-flash hazard study:
1) Descriptions, purpose, basis, assumptions, recommendations, and scope of the study.
2) Normal system connections and those that result in maximum arc-flash conditions.
3) Arc-flash raw data, calculations, and assumptions.
f. Form and format of arc-flash labels.
1) Label data:
a) Identifying the content of each label.
b) Identifying the location of each label.

F. Submit course outline for Owner Training.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of the entity responsible for electrical system studies:

1. A minimum of 5 years of experience in power system analysis is required for the individual in responsible charge of the studies.

2. Short-circuit fault analysis, protective device coordination, and arc-flash hazard studies shall be performed with the aid of a digital computer program:
a. Point-to-point calculations are not acceptable.

1.07 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. The individual performing the studies shall visit the site and collect necessary field data in order to perform and complete comprehensive electrical system studies.

2. Obtain, for all equipment, the required data for preparation of the study, including, but not limited to:
a. Transformer kilovolt-ampere (kVA), nameplate data, and impedances. b. Generator impedances, kilovolt-ampere (kVA), and voltage. c. Generator decrement curves.
d. Bus withstand ratings.
e. Cable and bus data.
f. Protective device taps, time dials, instantaneous pickups, and time-delay settings.
g. As-built lengths for new wire and cable installations covered by the studies. h. Grounding schemes (solidly grounded or resistive grounded).

3. Obtain the electric utility information on the minimum and maximum available fault current, minimum and maximum utility impedances, utility protective device settings including manufacturer and model number, interrupting ratings, X/R ratios, and model information one level above the point of connection:
a. Utility tolerances and voltage variations.

Electrical System Studies
16305-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16305 (DraftFinal) b. Coordinate with the utility for changes to their protective devices and settings to achieve a coordinated system between the utility and the Owner.

4. Obtain equipment layouts and configurations from the manufacturer’s final Submittal requirements and Project layout drawings as required.

5. Bus and conductor data:
a. Use impedances of the actual installed or specified conductors, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Use cable and bus impedances calculated at 25 degrees Celsius, unless otherwise indicated.
c. Use 600-volt cable reactance based on typical dimensions of actual installed or specified conductors, unless otherwise indicated. d. Use bus withstand values for all equipment having buses.

B. Use medium-voltage cable reactance based on typical dimensions of shielded cables with 133 percent insulation levels, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Certification:

1. Submit written certification signed by the professional engineer conducting the study, equipment supplier, and electrical subcontractor, stating that the data used in the study is correct and captures all RFIs, as-builts, and change orders affecting the study.

D. Meetings:

1. Electrical system study meetings:
a. As specified in Section 01312 - Project Meetings.
b. The individual conducting the electrical system studies leads the meeting. c. Meet with the Owner and Engineer 3 times.
d. First meeting:
1) Discuss the scope of the studies.
2) Confirm electrical system operating modes.
3) Confirm assumptions to be used in the electrical system study with the Owner, including, but not limited to:
a) Maximum protective device fault clearing time.
4) Discuss the Owner’s operational requirements for both normal operation and maintenance.
e. Second meeting:
1) Inform the Owner of the results of the study and impacts on normal operation and maintenance including:
a) Protective device coordination problems and recommended solutions.
b) Explanation of the arc-flash hazard study results and its potential impact on operations.
c) Recommendations for reduction of arc-flash category levels including reduction of protective device settings or changes in operational practices.
f. Final meeting:
1) Prior to substantial completion.
2) Discuss changes to the studies based on the previous meeting. 3) Discuss with the Owner how changes to the electrical system may change the arc-flash hazard category.

Electrical System Studies
16305-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16305 (DraftFinal) E. Sequencing:

1. Below is an outline of the typical work sequence. Proposed changes to the work sequence may be reviewed and approved by the Engineer. a. First system study meeting.
b. Submit the initial short-circuit fault analysis study before submittal of any electrical equipment.
1) Only the initial short-circuit results will be reviewed. c. Site visit to gather data on the existing facility systems for all studies:
1) Make multiple trips as required to obtain data for the short-circuit fault analysis, protection device coordination, and arc flash hazard studies.
d. Submit the preliminary short-circuit fault analysis, protective device coordination, and arc-flash hazard studies after the approval of all electrical equipment.
e. Second system study meeting for preliminary results. f. Update the model with changes to the electrical system made during start-up and commissioning.
g. Final system study meeting.
h. Submit the final electrical system studies.
i. Label equipment with approved arc-flash labels.
j. Owner Training.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. General study requirements:

1. Scope:
a. Short-circuit fault analysis, protective device coordination, and arc-flash hazard studies shall include all equipment in the power distribution system, including, but not limited to:
1) Utility equipment (utility transformer and primary protective device). 2) Available utility fault contribution current.
3) All electrical equipment including:
a) Dry-type transformers.
b) 240- and 208-volt panelboards.
4) Motors.
5) Vendor control panels.
6) HVAC equipment.
b. Study scenarios:
1) Include all possible electrical system configurations.

2. Motors:
a. Each motor shall be individually modeled:
1) Grouping of motors for fault contribution current is not acceptable.

Electrical System Studies
16305-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16305 (DraftFinal) b. Motors with variable frequency drives (VFDs) may be assumed to have no contribution to fault current, unless VFDs are equipped with bypass contactors.
1) If VFDs are equipped with bypass contactors, perform the fault current and arc flash study assuming the of bypass contactor is in the closed position.

3. Use the equipment, bus, and device designations as indicated on the Drawings for all studies.

B. Short-circuit fault analysis study additional requirements:

1. Calculate 3-phase bolted fault, line-to-line fault, line-to-ground fault, double line-to-ground fault, short-circuit 1/2 cycle momentary symmetrical and asymmetrical RMS, 1-1/2 to 4 cycle interrupting symmetrical RMS, and 30-cycle steady-state short-circuit current values at each piece of equipment in the distribution system.

2. Evaluate bus bracing, short-circuit ratings, fuse interrupting capacity and circuit-breaker-adjusted interrupting capacities against the fault currents, and calculate X/R values:
a. Identify and document all devices and equipment as either inadequate or acceptable.

3. Calculate line-to-ground and double line-to-ground momentary short-circuit values at buses having ground-fault devices.

4. Provide calculation methods, assumptions, one-line diagrams, and source impedance data, including utility X/R ratios, typical values, recommendations, and areas of concern.

C. Protective device coordination study additional requirements:

1. Furnish protective device settings for functions indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to:
a. Current.

2. Provide log-log form time-current curves (TCCs) graphically indicating the coordination proposed for the system:
a. Include with each TCC a complete title and one-line diagram with legend identifying the specific portion of the system covered by the particular TCC:
1) Typical TCCs for identical portions of the system, such as motor circuits, are acceptable as allowed by the Engineer.
b. Include a detailed description of each protective device identifying its type, function, manufacturer, and time-current characteristics:
1) These details can be included on the TCC.
c. Include a detailed description of each protective device tap, time dial, pickup, instantaneous, and time delay settings:
1) These details can be included on the TCC.

3. TCCs shall include all equipment in the power distribution system where required to demonstrate coordination. Include utility relay and fuse characteristics, medium-voltage equipment protective relay and fuse characteristics, low-voltage equipment circuit breaker trip device characteristics, transformer characteristics, motor and generator characteristics, and characteristics of other system load protective devices:
a. Include devices down to the largest branch circuit and largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor control center, main breaker in branch panelboards, and fused disconnect switches.

Electrical System Studies
16305-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16305 (DraftFinal) b. Provide ground fault TCCs with adjustable settings for ground fault protective devices.
c. Include manufacturing tolerances and damage bands in plotted fuse and circuit breaker characteristics.
d. On the TCCs, show transformer full load currents, transformer magnetizing inrush, ANSI transformer withstand parameters, and transformer damage curves.
e. Cable damage curves.
f. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting the maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed based on the short-circuit fault analysis study.
g. Coordinate time interval medium-voltage relay characteristics with upstream and downstream devices to avoid nuisance tripping.

4. Suggest modifications or additions to equipment rating or settings in a tabulated form.

D. Arc-flash hazard study additional requirements:

1. Include the calculated arc-flash boundary and incident energy (calories/square centimeter) at each piece of equipment in the distribution system:
a. Perform study with 15 percent arcing fault variation in accordance with IEEE 1584.
b. Perform arc-flash calculations at minimum and maximum utility fault contributions.
c. Perform arc-flash calculations for both the line side and load side of the switchgear, switchboard, motor control center, and panelboard main breakers.
d. Perform arc-flash calculations for short-circuit scenarios with all motors on for 3 to 5 cycles and with all motors off.

2. Provide executive summary of the study results:
a. Provide summary based upon worst case results.

3. Provide a detailed written discussion and explanation of the tabulated outputs:
a. Include all scenarios.

4. Provide alternative device settings to allow the Owner to select the desired functionality of the system:
a. Minimize the arc-flash energy by selective trip and time settings for equipment maintenance purposes.
b. Identify the arc-flash energy based upon the criteria of maintaining coordination and selectivity of the protective devices.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Electrical system study software: The following, no equal:

1. SKM Systems Analysis, Powertools.

2.03 COMPONENTS
A. Arc-flash hazard labels:

1. Dimensions:
a. Minimum 5 inches by 3.5 inches.

2. Materials:
a. Polyester with polyvinyl polymer over-laminate.

Electrical System Studies
16305-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16305 (DraftFinal) b. Self-adhesive.
c. Resistant to:
1) UV.
2) Chemicals and common cleaning solvents.
3) Scuffing.
4) Wide temperature changes.

3. Contents:
a. Short-circuit bus identification.
b. Calculated incident energy (calories/square centimeter) range:
1) Based on worst-case study results.
c. Arc-flash protection boundary.
d. Shock hazard boundary:
1) Contractor may provide separate labels for indication of the shock hazard boundary.
e. Fed from:
1) Identify the tag number of the upstream equipment providing power.

4. Color scheme:
a. For locations above 40 calories/square centimeter:
1) White label with red “DANGER” strip across the top.
2) Black lettering.
b. For locations below 40 calories/square centimeter:
1) White label with orange “WARNING” strip across the top. 2) Black lettering.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. After review and acceptance of the arc-flash hazard study by the Engineer, install arc-flash hazard labels:

1. At all locations required by NFPA, ANSI, or IEEE standards.

2. At a minimum, in the following locations:
a. Front of each main or incoming service compartment.
b. Front of each low-voltage switchgear section.
c. Front of each medium-voltage circuit breaker door.
d. Front of each accessible auxiliary or conductor compartment. e. Each accessible rear or side vertical section.
f. Each motor control center vertical section.
g. Each panelboard covered by the study.
h. Each control panel, individual starter or VFD, or other equipment covered by the scope of the study.

3.02 OWNER TRAINING:

A. Including, but not limited to:

1. Introduction and basics of NFPA 70E: 1 hour 1 session.

2. Detailed review of the electrical system study: 1 hour 1 session.

Electrical System Studies
16305-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16305 (DraftFinal)

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Individual performing the arc-flash hazard study shall direct the installation of the arc-flash hazard labels:

1. Remove and replace any improperly applied labels.

2. Repair the equipment finish damaged by removal of any label.

3. Install labels level or plumb across the entire dimension of the label.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. After review and acceptance of the draft arc-flash hazard study and protective device coordination study by the Engineer, adjust protective device settings in accordance with final study prior to equipment energization.

1. Devices that require power for configuration may be set during energization, but before any subfed loads are energized.

2. Ensure that settings for upstream equipment are set prior to energizing downstream devices. Provide documentation that protective devices are set in accordance with the study recommendation.

END OF SECTION

Disconnect Switches
16411-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16411 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16411

DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Knife blade fusible and non-fusible disconnect switches.

2. Switch-rated plugs and receptacles.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).

2. KS 1-2001 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).

B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

1. 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Safety switches and disconnect switches are to be considered synonymous.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Manufacturer.

2. Manufacturer’s specifications and description.

3. Ratings:
a. Voltage.
b. Current.
c. Horsepower.
d. Short circuit rating.

4. Fused or non-fused.

5. NEMA enclosure type.

6. Dimensions:
a. Height.
b. Width.
c. Depth.

7. Weight.

8. Cross-referenced to the disconnect schedule indicated on the Drawings.

Disconnect Switches
16411-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16411 (DraftFinal) C. Shop Drawings:

1. Manufacturer’s installation instructions:
a. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance, Regulatory Requirements below.
b. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and operation of product.

2. For each switch, indicate nameplate inscription, including voltage, circuit, fuse size (if applicable), and equipment served.

D. Installation instructions:

1. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory requirements:

1. NEMA Type KS 1- Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Switches (600 V Maximum).

2. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.

B. Disconnect switches shall be UL listed and labeled.

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.07 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sequencing:

1. Conduct the initial fault current study as specified in Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies and submit results for the Engineer’s review.

2. After successful review of the initial fault current study, submit complete equipment Submittal.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide knife blade disconnect switches and switch-rated plugs and receptacles as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Contract Documents.

B. Provide equipment with the number of poles, voltage, current, short circuit, and horsepower ratings as required by the load and the power system.

Disconnect Switches
16411-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16411 (DraftFinal)

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Knife-blade disconnect switches:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. ABB.
b. Appleton.
c. Crouse-Hinds.
d. Eaton.
e. Schneider Electric.
f. Siemens.

2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Knife-blade style switch disconnects:

1. Switch mechanism:
a. Quick-make, quick-break heavy-duty operating mechanisms:
1) Provisions for padlocking the switch in the Off position. 2) A minimum of 90-degree handle travel position between Off and On positions:
a) Provide handle position indicators to identify the handle position. 3) Full cover interlock to prevent opening of the switch door in the On position and to prevent closing the switch mechanism with the door open:
a) With an externally operated override.

2. Switch interior:
a. Switch blades visible when the switch is Off and the cover is open. b. Lugs:
1) Front accessible.
2) Removable.
3) UL listed for 60/75-degree Celsius copper conductors. c. Current carrying parts completely plated to resist corrosion. d. Removable arc suppressors to facilitate easy access to line side lugs. e. Furnish equipment ground kits for every switch.

3. Fused switches:
a. Furnish with fuses as indicated on the Drawings:
1) Provide fuses as specified in Section 16494 - Low Voltage Fuses. b. UL approved for field conversion from standard Class H fuse spacing to Class J fuse spacing:
1) Ratings 100 amps through 600 amps at 240 volts.
2) Ratings 30 amps through 600 amps at 600 volts.
3) Provide spring reinforced and plated fuse clips.

4. Ratings:
a. UL horsepower rated for AC or DC with the rating not less than the load served.
b. Current:
1) 30 to 1,200 amps.
c. Voltage:
1) 250 volts AC, DC.
2) 600 volts (30 A to 200 A, 600 volts DC).
d. Poles:
1) 2, 3, 4, and 6 poles.

Disconnect Switches
16411-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16411 (DraftFinal) e. UL listed short circuit ratings:
1) 10,000 RMS symmetrical amps when used with or protected by Class H or K fuses (30 to 600 amps).
2) 200,000 RMS symmetrical amps when used with or protected by Class R or J fuses (30 to 600 amps employing appropriate fuse rejection).
3) 200,000 RMS symmetrical amps when used with or protected by Class L fuses (800 to 1,200 amperes amps).

B. Where not indicated on the Drawings, provide switches with the NEMA ratings specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical for the installed location.

C. Size, fusing and number poles as indicated on the Drawings or as required:

1. Provide solid neutral where indicated on the Drawings.

2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Disconnect switches to have provisions for a field installable “B” type electrical interlock for position indication as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Disconnect switches to have provisions for a field installed insulated groundable neutral kit as indicated on the Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Anchoring and bracing to structures:

1. Prepare equipment anchor setting template(s) and use to position anchors during construction of supporting structure(s).

2. Install anchors of type and material indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3. Install anchors with embedment indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details.

B. General:

1. Use Myers hubs or bolt-on hubs for conduit penetrations on NEMA Type 12, Type 4, and Type 4X enclosures.

2. Provide mounting brackets, stands, supports and hardware as required:
a. Match finish and materials for brackets, stands, and hardware with the switch installed.
b. Provide adequate supporting pillar(s) for disconnect switches in accordance with the approved seismic calculations, and locate aboveground or above decks, where there is no structural wall or surface for box.

Disconnect Switches
16411-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16411 (DraftFinal)

3. When possible, mount switches rigidly to exposed building structure or equipment structural members:
a. For NEMA Type 4 and Type 4X locations, maintain a minimum of 7/8 inch air space between the enclosure and supporting surface. b. When mounting on preformed channel, position channel vertically so that water may freely run behind the enclosure.

4. Provide a nameplate for each disconnect switch:
a. As specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Field electrical acceptance testing:

1. As specified in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.

END OF SECTION

Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers
16412-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16412 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16412

LOW VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Low voltage molded case circuit breakers.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures.

1.03 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

B. Anchoring and bracing.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Catalog cutsheets.

2. Manufacturer’s time-current curves for molded case circuit breakers furnished.

C. Delegated Design Submittals:

D. Owner Training Submittals:

1. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Low voltage molded case circuit breakers shall be UL listed and labeled.

Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers
16412-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16412 (DraftFinal)

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Molded case thermal magnetic, solid-state, or motor circuit protector type circuit breakers as indicated on the Drawings and connected to form a completed system.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. ABB.

2. Eaton.

3. Schneider Electric.

2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. General:

1. In accordance with UL 489.

2. Operating mechanism:
a. Quick-make, quick-break, non-welding silver alloy contacts. b. Common Trip, Open and Close for multi-pole breakers such that all poles open and close simultaneously.
c. Mechanically trip free from the handle.
d. Trip indicating handle - automatically assumes a position midway between the manual ON and OFF positions to clearly indicate the circuit breaker has tripped.
e. Lockable in the “OFF” position.

3. Arc extinction:
a. In arc chutes.

4. Voltage and current ratings:
a. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Minimum frame size 100A.

5. Interrupting ratings:
a. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Modify as required to meet requirements of the short circuit fault analysis as specified in Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies. c. Not less than the rating of the assembly (panelboard, switchboard, motor control center, etc.).

Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers
16412-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16412 (DraftFinal) B. Motor circuit protectors:

1. Instantaneous only circuit breaker as part of a listed combination motor controller.

2. Each pole continuously adjustable in a linear scale with “LO” and “HI” settings factory calibrated.

2.04 COMPONENTS
A. Terminals:

1. Line and load terminals suitable for the conductor type, size, and number of conductors indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with UL 489.

B. Case:

1. Molded polyester glass reinforced.

2. Ratings clearly marked.

C. Trip units:

1. Provide thermal magnetic or solid-state trip units as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Thermal magnetic:
a. Instantaneous short circuit protection.
b. Inverse time delay overload.
c. Ambient or enclosure compensated by means of a bimetallic element.

3. Solid state:
a. With the following settings as indicated on the Drawings:
1) Adjustable long time current setting.
2) Adjustable long time delay.
3) Adjustable short time pickup.
4) Adjustable short time delay.
5) Adjustable instantaneous pickup.
6) Adjustable ground fault pickup as for breakers rated1000 amps and higher.
7) Adjustable ground fault delay as for breakers rated 1000 amps and higher.
b. Energy reducing maintenance switch on breakers 1,200 amps and above and on additional breakers as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Provide ground fault trip devices as indicated on the Drawings.

E. Molded case circuit breakers for use in panelboards:

1. Bolt-on type:
a. Plug-in type breakers are not acceptable.

2. Ground fault trip devices as indicated on the Drawings.

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test breakers in accordance with:

1. UL 489.

2. Manufacturer’s standard testing procedures.

Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers
16412-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16412 (DraftFinal) PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Anchoring and bracing to structures:

1. Prepare equipment anchor setting template(s) and use to position anchors during construction of supporting structure(s).

2. Install anchors of type and material indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3. Install anchors with embedment indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install breakers to correspond to the accepted Shop Drawings.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field electrical acceptance testing:

1. As specified in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.

3.04 OWNER TRAINING
A. Perform Owner Training as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust trip settings in accordance with Protective Device Coordination Study as accepted by the Engineer and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Adjust motor circuit protectors in accordance with NEC and the manufacturer’s recommendation based on the nameplate values of the installed motor.

END OF SECTION
Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers
16413-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16413 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16413

LOW VOLTAGE INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Low voltage insulated case circuit breakers.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Catalog cutsheets.

2. Manufacturer’s time-current curves for all trip devices furnished.

C. Owner Training Submittals:

1. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Insulated case circuit breakers shall be UL listed and labeled.

1.05 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.06 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Insulated case circuit breakers as indicated on the Drawings and connect to form a completed system:

1. Used to open and close a circuit, and to open a circuit automatically on a predetermined overload or overcurrent, without damage to itself when properly applied within its ratings.

Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers
16413-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16413 (DraftFinal)

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following, or equal:

1. ABB.

2. Eaton.

3. Schneider Electric.

2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Operating mechanism:

1. Manual or electric as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Manual operation:
1) Circuit breaker closing spring is energized by no more than 6 operations of the constant-force charging handle.
2) Pushing the “CLOSE (ON)” button will close the breaker’s contacts and pushing the “OPEN (OFF)” button will open the breaker’s contacts.
3) Opening springs are automatically charged when the breaker is closed.
b. Quick-make, quick-break, non-welding silver alloy contacts. c. Common trip, open and close for multi-pole breakers such that all poles open and close simultaneously.
d. Mechanically trip free from the handle.
e. Trip indicating handles - automatically assumes a position midway between the manual ON and OFF positions to clearly indicate the circuit breaker has tripped.
f. Lockable in the “OFF” position.

B. Arc extinction:

1. In arc chutes.

C. Voltage and current ratings:

1. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Interrupting ratings:

1. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Modify as required to meet requirements of the Contractor’s Short Circuit Fault Analysis as specified in Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies.

2. Matching the rating of the assembly.

E. Circuit breaker mounting shall be as indicated on the Drawings and consist of one of the following configurations:

1. Draw out type capable of being racked to the disconnect position with the door closed:
a. Interlocks shall be provided to prevent connecting or disconnecting the circuit breaker unless the breaker is in the open position. b. Breaker shall be prevented from being closed during any racking operation.
c. A test position shall be provided to permit operating the breaker while it is disconnected from the power circuit.

Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers
16413-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16413 (DraftFinal) d. Equipped with interlocks to discharge stored energy spring before the circuit breaker is withdrawn from the cell.

2. Plug-in (stationary) type capable of being removed with the main bus power off.

3. Individually mounted in a separate enclosure.

2.04 COMPONENTS
A. Terminals:

1. Line and load terminals suitable for the conductor type, size, and number of conductors indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with UL 489.

B. Case:

1. Molded polyester glass reinforced.

2. Double level of insulation between primary current-carrying parts and operating personnel.

3. Ratings clearly marked.

4. Open contact indication.

5. Closed contact indication.

6. Charging spring charged indication.

7. Charging spring discharged indication.

8. Open pushbutton.

9. Close pushbutton.

10. Retractable charging handle.

C. Trip units:

1. Microprocessor based with positive action flux-shifting trip device and a solid state type with the following functions:
a. Adjustable ampere setting:
1) To determine the value of current that the breaker will carry indefinitely.
b. Adjustable long time delay:
1) Varies the time it will take the breakers to trip under sustained overload.
c. Adjustable short time pickup:
1) Controls the level of high current the breaker will carry for short periods.
d. Adjustable short time delay:
1) Controls the length of time the breaker will carry a high current without tripping.
e. Adjustable instantaneous pickup:
1) Controls level at which immediate tripping of breaker occurs. f. Adjustable ground fault pickup:
1) Controls the level at which the breaker will trip under a ground fault condition.
g. Adjustable ground fault delay:
1) Controls the time that a ground fault can exist without tripping the breaker.
h. Long time pickup indicator:
1) Provides a visual indication that the breaker is experiencing an overload condition.

Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers
16413-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16413 (DraftFinal) i. Energy reducing maintenance switch:
1) Allows for input of alternative trip settings for arc flash hazard reduction during maintenance procedures.
2) Enabled by the following:
a) Hardwired input.
b) Trip unit controls.
c) Trip unit network.
3) Status:
a) Contact for remote indication.
b) Indication on trip unit.
c) Status communicated over trip unit network.

D. Fault indicators:

1. Powered from a lithium battery.

2. LED indicators for:
a. Overcurrent fault trip on long-time feature.
b. Overcurrent fault trip on short-time feature.
c. Short circuit fault trip on the instantaneous feature. d. Ground fault trip.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide circuit breakers with the following accessories as indicated on the Drawings and required for proper operation of the system:

1. Electrical operator (field convertible by adding a plug-in motor operator):
a. Circuit breaker closing spring is energized by an electric motor-driven charging mechanism.
b. Control voltage:
1) 120 VAC.

2. Remote close solenoid.

3. Shunt trip device.

4. Key interlock device.

5. Anti-pump provision to prevent closing or reclosing operations when used with a normally closed contact in the “close” circuit.

6. Terminal blocks.

7. Operations counter.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test breakers in accordance with:

1. UL 489.

2. Manufacturer’s standard testing procedures.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install breakers to correspond to the accepted Shop Drawings.

Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers
16413-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16413 (DraftFinal)

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Field electrical acceptance testing:

1. As specified in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.

3.03 OWNER TRAINING
A. Perform Owner Training as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust trip settings in accordance with the Protective Device Coordination Study as accepted by the Engineer and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION

Motor Starters
16422-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16422 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16422

MOTOR STARTERS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Motor starters and contactors.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations:

1. FVNR: Full voltage non-reversing.

2. FVR: Full voltage reversing.

3. PWS: Part winding start.

4. RVAT: Reduced voltage auto transformer.

5. RVSS: Reduced voltage solid state.

6. TS1W: 2 speed 1 winding (consequent pole).

7. TS2W: 2 speed 2 winding.

B. Standards:

1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

2. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC):
a. 801-1 - Electromagnetic Compatibility for Industrial-Process Measurement and Control Equipment - Part 1: General Information.
b. 947-4 - Low-Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear.

3. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA):
a. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum). b. ICS 2-230 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600 V.

4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a. 508 - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.
b. 508A - Standard for Industrial Control Panels.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Overload relay class: A classification of an overload relay time current characteristic by means of a number which designates the maximum time in seconds at which it will operate when carrying a current equal to 600 percent of its current rating.

Motor Starters
16422-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16422 (DraftFinal)

1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

B. Anchoring and bracing.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures:

1. Submit motor starter data with equipment Submittal.

B. Product data:

1. Manufacturer.

2. Catalog cutsheets.

3. Technical information.

4. Complete nameplate schedule.

5. Complete bill of material.

6. List of recommended spare parts.

7. Confirmation that the overload relay class for each starter meets the requirements of the equipment and motor supplier.

8. Electrical ratings:
a. Phase.
b. Wire.
c. Voltage.
d. Ampacity.
e. Horsepower.

9. Furnish circuit breaker submittals as specified in Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Elementary and schematic diagrams:
a. Provide 1 diagram for every starter and contactor.
b. Indicate wire numbers for control wires on the diagrams:
1) Wire numbering as specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
c. Indicate interfaces with other equipment on the Drawings.

D. Delegated Design Submittals:

E. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s representative qualifications.

2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

3. Test reports.

Motor Starters
16422-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16422 (DraftFinal) F. Owner Training Submittals:

1. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

G. Operation and maintenance manuals:

1. As specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Submit complete operating and maintenance instructions presenting full details for care and maintenance of equipment furnished or installed under this Section, including, but not limited to:
a. Electrical ratings:
1) Phase.
2) Wire.
3) Voltage.
4) Ampacity.
b. Complete bill of material.
c. Manufacturer’s operating and maintenance instructions starter and/or contactor component parts, including:
1) Protective devices (fuses, breakers, overload relays, heater elements, etc.).
2) Pilot devices.
d. Complete renewal parts list.
e. As-built drawings:
1) Furnish as-built drawings for each starter and contactor indicating final:
a) Wire numbers.
b) Interfaces with other equipment.
2) 11-inch by 17-inch format.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory requirements:

1. Starters and components shall be UL listed and labeled:
a. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment.
b. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels.

2. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and System Controllers; Contactors and Overload Relays Rated: 600 Volts.

3. Combination starters shall be UL listed and labeled.

1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.08 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sequencing:

1. Conduct the initial fault current study as specified in Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies and submit results for the Engineer’s review.

2. After successful review of the initial fault current study, as specified in Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies, submit complete equipment Submittal.

3. Conduct factory acceptance test.

Motor Starters
16422-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16422 (DraftFinal)

4. Ship equipment to the Project Site after successful completion of factory acceptance test.

5. Assemble equipment in the field.

6. Submit Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation Verification.

7. Conduct field acceptance test and submit results for the Engineer’s review.

8. Conduct Owner Training sessions.

9. Commissioning and process start-up as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Spare parts:

1. Provide the following spare parts, suitably packaged and labeled with the corresponding equipment number:
a. 1 spare fuse of each size and type per starter.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Starters for motor control centers, individual enclosed starters, or control panels.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide equipment and components that are fully rated for the Site elevation and operating environment where the equipment will be installed as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria and as indicated on the Drawings.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. NEMA starters and contactors:
a. ABB.
b. Allen-Bradley.
c. Eaton.
d. Schneider Electric.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. General:

1. Provide combination type starters with motor circuit protector or thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and control power transformer with ratings as indicated on the Drawings.

2. NEMA size, design, and rated:
a. NEMA Size 1 minimum.

Motor Starters
16422-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16422 (DraftFinal)

3. Coordinate motor circuit protector, thermal magnetic circuit breaker, or fusible disconnect, and overload trip ratings with nameplate horsepower and current ratings of the installed motor.
a. If motors provided are different in horsepower rating than those specified or indicated on the Drawings, provide starters coordinated to the actual motors furnished.

4. Provide starters NEMA Size 2 and larger with arc quenchers on load breaking contacts.

5. Mount extended overload reset buttons to be accessible for operation without opening starter enclosure door.

B. Full voltage starters (FVNR, FVR, TS1W, TS2W):

1. Across-the-line full voltage magnetic starters.

2. Rated for 600 volts.

3. Electrical characteristics as indicated on the Drawings.

4. Provide positive, quick-make, quick-break mechanisms, padlockable enclosure doors.

5. Furnish starter with solid state electronic overload relays.

6. Double-break silver alloy contacts.

7. Reversing starters provided with both mechanical and electrical interlocks to prevent line shorts and energizing both contactors simultaneously.

8. Provide 2-speed, 2-winding motor starters consisting of two 3-pole contactors and 2 sets of overload relays assembled together:
a. Provided with contactors that are both mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent energizing both contactors simultaneously.

2.05 COMPONENTS
A. Molded case circuit breakers:

1. Circuit breaker type and ratings as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Provide as specified in Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

B. Contactors:

1. NEMA size as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Electrically held:
a. For lighting loads designed to withstand the initial inrush currents of ballast and lamp loads.

3. Factory adjusted and chatter free.

4. Auxiliary contacts:
a. Contact ratings in accordance with NEMA A600 rating:
1) Auxiliary contacts rated 10 amps at 600 volts.
b. Provide contacts indicated on the Drawings and any additional contacts required for proper operation.
c. Provide at least 1 normally open and 1 normally closed spare auxiliary contact.

5. Constructed in accordance with the following standards:
a. UL 508.

Motor Starters
16422-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16422 (DraftFinal) b. IEC 947-4:
1) Type 1 coordination when protected by a circuit breaker. 2) Type 2 coordination when protected by a suitable UL listed fuse. c. IEC 801-1 parts 2 through 6.

C. Overloads:

1. Solid state electronic:
a. Selectable Class 10, 20, 30 protection.
b. Ambient insensitive:
1) Operating temperature: -20 to 70 degrees Celsius.
c. Thermal memory.
d. Protective functions:
1) Motor overcurrent.
2) Phase unbalance (adjustable).
3) Phase loss.
4) Ground fault protection.
e. Self-powered.
f. Provide current transformers for metering of motor current. g. Visible trip indicator.
h. Push-to-trip test.
i. Isolated normally open alarm contact.
j. Normally closed trip contact.
k. Manual reset.

D. Control power transformer:

1. Furnish integral control power transformer capacity to power:
a. Motor controls: Motor and starter accessories indicated on the Drawings or specified.

2. Primary and secondary fusing as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Fusing sized by the manufacturer for the rating of the transformer furnished.

3. Control power transformer secondary voltage:
a. As indicated on the Drawings.

2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Lugs and terminals:

1. For external connections of No. 6 AWG and larger.

2. UL listed for either copper or aluminum conductors.

B. Surge protective devices:

1. Furnish surge protection devices across the coil of each starter, contactor, and relay.

C. Pilot devices:

1. Provide pilot lights, switches, elapsed time meters, and other devices as specified or as indicated on the Drawings.

2. As specified in Section 17710 - Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components.

D. Nameplates and wire markers:

1. As specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

Motor Starters
16422-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16422 (DraftFinal) E. Conformal coating:

2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Source Testing:

1. Not witnessed.

2. Furnish test reports and Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Anchoring and bracing to structures:

1. Prepare equipment anchor setting template(s) and use to position anchors during construction of supporting structure(s).

2. Install anchors of type and material indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3. Install anchors with embedment indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details.

B. Starters in motor control centers:

1. As specified in Section 16444 - Low Voltage Motor Control Centers.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field electrical acceptance testing:

1. As specified in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.

3.04 OWNER TRAINING
A. Perform Owner Training as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Make adjustments as necessary and as recommended by the manufacturer, Engineer, or testing firm.

B. Set overloads and motor circuit protectors based on the nameplate values of the installed motor.

END OF SECTION

Individually-Mounted Circuit Breaker Switchboards
16442-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16442 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16442

INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Free standing, dead-front type metal-enclosed, low voltage switchboards with individually mounted circuit protective devices.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Electric Utility Service Requirements Committee (EUSERC).

B. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):

1. 9001 - Quality Management Systems - Requirements.

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).

2. PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70 - National Electrical Code.

2. 70E® - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace®.

E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. 891 - Switchboards.

1.03 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

B. Anchoring and bracing.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Manufacturer of switchboard.

2. Manufacturer of component parts of switchboard.

3. Dimensions:
a. Width.
b. Length.
c. Height.
d. Weight.

4. Nameplate schedule.

5. Bill of material.

Individually-Mounted Circuit Breaker Switchboards
16442-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16442 (DraftFinal)

6. Ratings:
a. Voltage.
b. Phase.
c. Current.
d. Interrupting rating (circuit breakers and fuses).

7. List of recommended spare parts.

8. Certification that the utility metering compartment meets the requirements of the serving electrical utility.

9. Name of dealer’s repair facility and parts stocking agreement with the factory:
a. Agreement shall outline in detail the manufacturer’s parts stocking requirements and the method by which the manufacturer’s representative verifies that the stock is at an acceptable level.
b. Agreement should also outline the method by which the manufacturer’s representative determines that the service personnel meet factory standards.
c. A toll-free or local phone number with 24/7 emergency monitoring/call back is required.

10. Furnish circuit breaker Submittals as specified in:
a. Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers. b. Section 16413 - Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers.

11. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F, submit the following as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria:
a. Manufacturer’s statement of seismic qualification with substantiating test data.
b. Manufacturer’s special seismic certification with substantiating test data.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Complete, detailed, and scaled switchboard layout:
a. Front panel.
b. Sub-panels.
c. Interior panels.
d. Top and bottom conduit windows.

2. Complete electrical wiring diagrams:
a. Point-to-point connections.
b. Internal compartment-to-compartment interconnection wiring diagrams. c. Wiring identification and terminal numbers.

3. Complete 3-line diagrams for each switchboard lineup. a. These Drawings shall indicate devices comprising the switchboard assembly, including, but not limited to, circuit breakers, control power and instrument transformers, meters, and control devices.
b. Clearly indicate electrical ratings of devices on Drawings.

4. Complete interface and connection diagrams for metering system.

5. Complete bill of material list and equipment datasheets identifying appropriate information specific to the switchboard being supplied.

6. Nameplate schedule.

7. Interfaces to other equipment.

Individually-Mounted Circuit Breaker Switchboards
16442-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16442 (DraftFinal) D. Delegated Design Submittals:

E. Installation instructions:

1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place.

2. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions.

F. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s representative qualifications.

2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

3. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

4. Test reports.

G. Owner Training Submittals:

1. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

H. Operation and maintenance manuals:

1. As specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Operating instructions:
a. Printed and framed instruction chart suitable for wall hanging. b. Detail the operational functions custom controls which have been placed on the front of the switchboard.

3. Maintenance manual:
a. Furnish maintenance manuals with instructions for maintenance of equipment and data identifying all parts.
b. Include information needed to maintain the switchboard, including, but not limited to, the following:
1) Instructions for testing, adjustment, and start-up.
2) Detailed control instructions which outline the purpose and operation of every control device used in normal operation.
3) Schematic and wiring diagrams:
a) Showing internal and external connections.
b) Furnished in a reduced 11-inch by 17-inch fully legible format.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Switchboard and components shall be UL listed and labeled.

B. The switchboard shall be UL labeled and listed Suitable for Service Entrance.

C. Equipment shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the following standards and requirements:

1. NEMA PB 2.

2. UL 891.

Individually-Mounted Circuit Breaker Switchboards
16442-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16442 (DraftFinal) D. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Ship switchboards to the site in dedicated air ride vans that will allow the Contractor to utilize onsite off-loading equipment.

B. Furnish temporary equipment heaters within the switchboard to prevent condensation from forming.

1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.08 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sequencing:

1. Conduct the initial fault current study as specified in Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies and submit results for the Engineer’s review.

2. After successful review of the initial fault current study, submit complete equipment Submittal.

3. Conduct factory acceptance test and submit certified test results for the Engineer’s review.

4. Ship equipment to the Project Site after successful completion of the factory acceptance test.

5. Assemble equipment in the field.

6. Conduct final fault current and coordination study.

7. Conduct field acceptance test and submit results for the Engineer’s review.

8. Submit manufacturer’s certification that the equipment has been properly installed and is fully functional for the Engineer’s review.

9. Conduct Owner Training sessions.

10. Commissioning as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Factory assembled, wired, and tested switchboards, with major components being products of a single manufacturer, including circuit breakers, and other equipment specified in this Section and indicated on the Drawings.

Individually-Mounted Circuit Breaker Switchboards
16442-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16442 (DraftFinal) B. Non-conditioned spaces:

1. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain the equipment temperature within a band of 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the minimum operating temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below maximum operating temperature.

C. Outdoor installations:

1. Provide conditioning equipment incorporated into the equipment to maintain the enclosures within the equipment manufacturer’s specified operating ranges.

D. Provide complete and functional switchboards with required controls.

E. Furnish and install devices or accessories not described in this Section but necessary for the proper installation and operation of the equipment.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. ABB.

2. Eaton.

3. Schneider Electric.

2.04 EQUIPMENT
A. Voltage ratings:

1. Voltage level and configuration: As indicated on the Drawings.

2. Frequency: 60 hertz.

3. Insulation level:
a. Twice the rated voltage plus 1,000 volts.

B. Bus:

1. General:
a. Tin-plated copper.
b. Bus cross-section in accordance with UL heat rise requirements. c. Current density of 1,000 amps per square inch.
d. Mounted on supports of high-impact, non-tracking insulators. e. Phase A-B-C bus arrangement:
1) Top-to-bottom, left-to-right, front-to-back throughout the switchboard. f. Symmetrical short circuit current bracing of as indicated on the Drawings. g. Continuous current rating as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Horizontal bus:
a. Provisions for future connections to additional switchboard sections.

3. Ground bus:
a. Sized in accordance with UL 891.

C. Space for future devices:

1. Provide spaces as indicated on the Drawings.

2. As specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Requirements for Electrical.

Individually-Mounted Circuit Breaker Switchboards
16442-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16442 (DraftFinal) D. Utility metering compartment:

1. When indicated on the Drawings, furnish an integral utility current and voltage transformer cabinet for utility company metering.

2. EUSERC compliant.

3. Instrument transformer mounting, connections and metering sequence shall conform to electric utility requirements.

4. Dimensions, ratings, spacings, and standards shall conform with the requirements of the electric utility.

5. Service entrance cables to enter the utility metering compartment as indicated on the Drawings.

E. Enclosure:

1. General:
a. Self-supporting structures bolted together to form the required line-up. b. All sections rear aligned.
c. Dead-front.
d. Conduit entry:
1) Open bottom.
2) Removable top cover.

2. Frame:
a. Die-formed 12-gauge steel.

3. Covers:
a. Bolt-on.
b. Code gauge steel.
c. Removable front covers:
1) Held in place by captive screws.

4. Rating:
a. NEMA Type 1.

2.05 COMPONENTS
A. Circuit breakers:

1. As specified in Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Section 16413 - Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers.

2. Individually mounted with line and load bus connections.

3. Main circuit breakers shall be 100 percent rated, fixed mounted insulated case breaker with frame and trip ratings as indicated on the Drawings. a. Breaker with rating of 1,000 amps or more shall be provided with ground fault shunt trip.

4. Individually fixed mounted feeder devices shall be insulated case circuit breaker with ratings as indicated on the Drawings.

5. Have a minimum interrupting rating equal to the bus rating or as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Wiring:

1. Provide necessary internal wiring, fuse blocks, and terminal blocks as required.

Number wires at each end and indicate wire numbers on Shop Drawings.

Individually-Mounted Circuit Breaker Switchboards
16442-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16442 (DraftFinal)

2. Control wiring within the equipment shall utilize type SIS switchboard wire with at least 26 strands. Minimum wire size shall be No. 14 for control circuits and No. 12 for voltage and current transformer circuits.

3. Wires shall be numbered and labeled as specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Surge protective devices:

1. As specified in Section 16285 - Surge Protective Devices.

B. Nameplates:

1. As specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

2. Furnish an individual nameplate for each breaker and/or switch identifying the load served.

3. Furnish an individual nameplate for each vertical section identifying the vertical section:
a. Mounted and centered on the top horizontal wireway for each vertical section.

4. Furnish an individual nameplate for each cubicle:
a. 1 nameplate to identify cubicle designation.
b. 1 nameplate to identify load served.

5. Manufacturer’s labels:
a. Each vertical section shall have a label identifying:
1) Serial number.
2) Shop order number.
3) Bus rating.
4) Vertical section reference number.
5) Date of manufacture.

C. Warning signs:

1. Voltage:
a. Provide a minimum of 2 warning signs on the front of the switchboard lineup and 2 on the back.
b. Red laminated plastic engraved with white letters approximately 1/2-inch high.
c. Signs shall read:
1) “WARNING-HIGH VOLTAGE-KEEP OUT”.

2. Arc flash:
a. Provide 1 warning sign for each switchboard compartment. b. Signs shall have read a minimum of:
1) “DANGER ELECTRIC ARC FLASH HAZARD.”
2) Signs shall meet the requirements of NFPA 70E and NEC Article 110.16.

D. Lugs:

1. For external connections of No. 6 AWG or larger, plated or otherwise suitable for copper or aluminum and UL listed for copper or aluminum.

Individually-Mounted Circuit Breaker Switchboards
16442-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16442 (DraftFinal)

2. Shall be of the compression type in design requiring a hydraulic press and die for installation as manufactured by:
a. Burndy.
b. T&B.

E. Key interlocks:

1. Provide key interlocks as indicated on the Drawings.

2.07 FINISHES
A. Chemically clean steel surfaces before painting.

B. Exterior color manufacturer’s standard gray over phosphate-type rust inhibitor.

2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Source Testing:

1. Not witnessed.

2. Test in accordance with manufacturer’s standard testing procedures.

3. Furnish test reports and Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Anchoring and bracing to structures:

1. Prepare equipment anchor setting template(s) and use to position anchors during construction of supporting structure(s).

2. Install anchors of type and material indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3. Install anchors with embedment indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details.

B. General:

1. Furnish cables, conduit, lugs, bolts, and other accessories needed to complete the installation of the switchboard.

2. Physically assemble and install the switchboard in the location and layout indicated on the Drawings.

3. Make bus splice connections.

4. Perform Work in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and Shop Drawings.

5. Furnish components and equipment as required to complete the installation.

6. Replace hardware lost or damaged during the installation or handling to provide a complete installation.

7. Install the switchboard on a raised concrete housekeeping pad:
a. Provide structural leveling channels in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations to provide proper alignment of the units.

Individually-Mounted Circuit Breaker Switchboards
16442-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16442 (DraftFinal) b. Weld and/or bolt the switchgear frame to the leveling channels.

8. Provide openings in top or bottom of the enclosure for conduit only, no additional openings will be allowed:
a. Improperly cut holes will require that the entire panel be replaced:
1) No hole closers or patches will be allowed.

C. Installation Verification:

1. Furnish Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation Verification.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Field electrical acceptance testing:

1. As specified in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.

C. Provide the services of a qualified manufacturer’s representative to:

1. Inspect, verify, and certify that the mechanical installation meets the manufacturer’s requirements.

2. Make control connections across the shipping splits.

3. Install and align circuit breakers.

4. Make bus splice connections.

5. Make control connections across shipping splits.

6. Ensure that items furnished are in proper operating condition:
a. Technician must be completely knowledgeable in the operation, maintenance, and start-up of the electrical system.

3.04 OWNER TRAINING
A. Perform Owner Training as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Make adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, Engineer, or testing firm.

END OF SECTION

Low Voltage Motor Control Centers
16444-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16444 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16444

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Low voltage motor control centers.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).

2. ICS 18-2001 - Motor Control Centers.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. 845 - Motor Control Centers.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. SELV: Safety extra-low voltage.

1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

B. Anchoring and bracing.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Manufacturer of motor control center.

2. Manufacturer of motor control center parts.

3. Nameplate schedule.

4. Bill of material.

5. Enclosure:
a. NEMA rating.
b. Finish color.

6. Ratings:
a. Voltage.
b. Phase.

Low Voltage Motor Control Centers
16444-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16444 (DraftFinal) c. Current:
1) Horizontal bus ampacity.
2) Vertical bus ampacity.
3) Ground bus ampacity.
d. Short circuit withstand rating.
e. Protective device interrupting rating.

7. List of recommended spare parts.

8. Catalog cutsheets:
a. Submit complete manufacturer’s catalog information:
1) Clearly indicate the features of the equipment including any options necessary to meet the required functionality.

9. Furnish component Submittals as specified in the appropriate Section.

10. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F, submit the following as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria:
a. Manufacturer’s statement of seismic qualification with substantiating test data.
b. Manufacturer’s special seismic certification with substantiating test data.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Layout drawings:
a. Provide fully dimensioned and to scale layout drawings which include:
1) Dimensions:
a) Overall length.
b) Overall width.
c) Overall height.
d) Overall weight and weight of individual shipping splits.

2. Interfaces to other equipment.

3. Shipping splits.

4. Allowable top and bottom conduit windows.

5. Complete component and unit layout drawings, including control, networking, and metering components.

6. Indicate lug sizes, type, and manufacturer based on the cable size specified in the Contract Documents and as indicated on the Drawings.

7. Elementary schematics:
a. Provide 1 custom schematic diagram for each compartment:
1) Include remote devices.
2) Show wire numbers on the schematics:
a) Provide wire numbering as specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

8. External connection diagram showing the wiring to the external controls and devices associated with the motor control center.

9. One-line diagrams:
a. Provide complete one-line diagrams for each motor control center, including, but not limited to: Protective devices, starters, drives, metering, and other equipment.
b. Indicate electrical ratings of the equipment shown on the one-line diagrams.

Low Voltage Motor Control Centers
16444-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16444 (DraftFinal) D. Delegated Design Submittals:

E. Installation instructions:

1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place.

2. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions.

F. Quality Control Submittals:

1. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning, including the following:
a. Manufacturer’s representative qualifications.
b. Certificates:
1) Requirements as specified in this Section.
c. Test Plans:
1) Test requirements as specified in this Section.
d. Test Reports.
e. Manufacturer’s representatives field notes and data. f. Owner Training.

G. Operation and maintenance manuals:

1. Provide complete operating and maintenance instructions presenting full details for care and maintenance of all types of equipment furnished and/or installed under this Section. Include the following:
a. Electrical ratings:
1) Phase.
2) Wire.
3) Voltage.
4) Ampacity.
5) Bus bracing and protective device interrupting ratings. b. Manufacturer’s operating and maintenance instructions for the motor control center and component parts, including:
1) Starters.
2) Overload relays and heater elements.
3) Variable frequency drives.
4) Protective devices, including, but not limited to, fuses, circuit breakers and protective relays.
5) Pilot devices.
c. Complete renewal parts list.

H. Test forms and reports:

1. Submit complete factory acceptance test procedures and forms used during the test.

Low Voltage Motor Control Centers
16444-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16444 (DraftFinal) I. Record documents:

1. Elementary schematics:
a. Furnish as-built elementary schematics indicating final:
1) Wire numbers.
2) Interfaces with other equipment.
b. Provide 1 custom schematic diagram for each compartment:
1) Include remote devices.
2) Show wire numbers on the schematics.
c. Layout drawings: Provide complete dimensioned component and unit layout drawings.

2. Record documents shall reflect modifications made during the submittal review process and during construction.

J. Calculations:

1. Detailed calculations or details of the actual physical testing performed on the motor control center to prove the motor control center is suitable for the seismic requirements at the Project Site.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All portions of the motor control center, vertical bays, and components shall be UL listed and labeled.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Ship the motor control center and associated equipment to the job site on a dedicated air ride vehicle that will allow the Contractor to utilize onsite off-loading equipment.

B. Furnish temporary equipment heaters within the motor control center to prevent condensation from forming.

1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.09 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sequencing:

1. Conduct the initial fault current study as specified in Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies and submit results for Engineer’s review.

2. After successful review of the initial fault current study, as specified in Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies, submit complete equipment submittal.

3. Conduct factory acceptance test.

4. Submit manufacturer’s test results.

5. Ship equipment to the Project Site after successful completion of factory acceptance test.

6. Assemble equipment in the field.

7. Conduct field acceptance test and submit results for Engineer’s review.

8. Submit manufacturer’s certification that the equipment has been properly installed and is fully functional for Engineer’s review.

Low Voltage Motor Control Centers
16444-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16444 (DraftFinal)

9. Conduct Owner’s training sessions.

10. Commissioning and process start-up as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

1. Provide a 2-year duration special warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Factory assembled, factory wired and factory tested motor control centers:

1. Motor control centers and major components to be products of a single manufacturer.

B. Outdoor installations:

1. Provide conditioning equipment incorporated into the equipment to maintain the enclosures within the equipment manufacturer’s specified operating ranges.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following, or equal:

1. ABB.

2. Allen-Bradley.

3. Eaton.

4. Schneider Electric.

2.04 EQUIPMENT
A. General:

1. Furnish motor control centers as specified in the Contract Documents and indicated on the Drawings.

2. Arrange the equipped sections to form continuous motor control center lineups as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Identify any deviations from the Drawings in writing and submit for approval.

3. Provide wire markers at each end of every wire as specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

4. Provide complete and functional motor control centers.

5. Provide devices or accessories not specified in this Section but necessary for the proper installation and operation of the equipment.

Low Voltage Motor Control Centers
16444-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16444 (DraftFinal) B. Design and construct motor control center to operate at the voltage level and configuration indicated on the Drawings.

C. Bus system:

1. Material:
a. Tin-plated copper.
b. Short-circuit rating:
1) As indicated on the Drawings.
c. Bus bar supports:
1) High impact strength, non-tracking glass-polyester material that is impervious to moisture and gases.

2. Horizontal power bus:
a. Current-carrying capacity as indicated on the Drawings. b. Mounting:
1) Mount horizontal bus bars edgewise, one above the other, and fully isolated from wireways and units.
c. Temperature rise:
1) In accordance with UL 845.
2) De-rate the temperature rating of the bus for the specified conditions of ambient temperature and altitude as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

3. Vertical power bus:
a. Current-carrying capacity of not less than 600 amps. b. Mounting:
1) Enclose the vertical bus in a polyester-glass cover with small openings to permit unit stabs to mate with the bus:
a) Provide a shutter mechanism to cover the stab openings when plug-in units are removed.
2) Provide top and bottom bus covers for insulation and isolation of the ends of the bus.
c. Isolated from the unit compartments by a full height barrier.

4. Ground bus:
a. Horizontal ground bus:
1) Current-carrying capacity:
a) 300 amps when the horizontal bus is 2,000 amps or less. b) 600 amps when the horizontal bus is greater than 2,000 amps. 2) Mounting:
a) Full width, firmly secured to each vertical section structure:
(1) Located in the top or bottom wireway.
b) Pre-drilled and furnished with lugs for connection to equipment ground wires:
(1) Furnish a minimum of 10 lugs per vertical section of MCC. b. Vertical ground bus:
1) Mounting:
a) Furnish in each vertical section.
b) Bolted to the horizontal ground bus.
c) Install parallel to the vertical power bus.
d) Mount vertical ground bus such that plug-in units engage the ground bus before any connection to the power bus is made.

Upon removal of plug-in units, ground stabs are disconnected Low Voltage Motor Control Centers
16444-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16444 (DraftFinal) from the ground bus after the power stabs have been
disconnected.

5. Bus splice bars:
a. Provided to join the bus at the splits.
b. Connected to each horizontal bus bar with a minimum of 2 bolts. c. Employ conical or spring washers at connections, designed to maintain constant pressure against the splice joint.
d. Same ampacity rating as the horizontal bus.

6. Provide bus system configured for back-to-back MCCs, where required.

D. Enclosures:

1. Each motor control center shall consist of 1 or more vertical sections bolted together:
a. Freestanding.
b. Totally enclosed.
c. Dead-front assembly.
d. Designed for modification and/or addition of future vertical sections. e. Form each vertical section of heavy gauge steel.
f. Designed for back-to-back arrangement installation, where required and/or as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Enclosure rating:
a. Indoor:
1) NEMA Type 1 gasketed.

3. Standard section dimensions:
a. Nominal height: 90 inches.
b. Nominal depth: 20 inches.
c. Vertical section width as indicated on the Drawings.

4. Wireways:
a. Provide each vertical section with a horizontal wireway at the top and bottom of the section:
1) Arranged to provide a full-width metal enclosed wiring trough across the entire motor control center assembly.
b. Provide each vertical section with a full-height vertical wireway. c. Completely isolated from the vertical and horizontal bus bars. d. Provide a removable, hinged door.

5. Shipping splits:
a. No more than 3 vertical sections and not more than 60 inches in width. b. Solid bussing between vertical sections in a shipping split is not acceptable.

6. Lifting angles:
a. Furnish each vertical section and/or shipping split with a removable lifting angle mounted to the top of the enclosure:
1) Extending the entire width of the shipping split.

7. Mounting channels:
a. Mount each vertical section and/or shipping split on an external 1.5-inch by 3-inch mounting channel.

E. Units:

1. A plug-in unit consists of:
a. Assembly.
b. Support pan.
c. Door assembly.

Low Voltage Motor Control Centers
16444-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16444 (DraftFinal)

2. Completely enclosed and isolated from adjacent units, buses, and wireways, except for conductor entries into the unit, by a metal enclosure.

3. Supported and guided by a removable unit support pan:
a. Re-arrangement of units and the removal of a unit so that a new and possibly larger unit can be added without the removal of an in-service unit to gain access to the unit support pan.

4. Held in place by screws or other positive locking means after insertion.

5. Provide a test position with the unit supported in the structure but disengaged from the bus.

6. Integral plug-in ground stab.

7. Stabs:
a. Free floating.
b. Self-aligning.
c. Backed by spring steel clips to ensure high pressure contacts. d. Electrolytically tin-plated copper.

8. Handle:
a. Provide a flange mounted handle mechanism to operate each disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
b. Door mounted operators or operator handles are not acceptable. c. Engaged with the disconnect device at all times as an integral part of the unit independent of the door position.
d. Lockable in the “OFF” position with up to 3 padlocks. e. Mechanically interlocked so that the door cannot be opened with the handle in the “ON” position:
1) Provide a means for qualified personnel to defeat this interlock. f. Interlocked so the unit cannot be inserted or withdrawn with the handle in the “ON” position.
g. Lockable in the “ON” position:
1) This shall not prevent the circuit breaker from operating and opening the contacts in the event of a fault condition.
h. Color-coded to indicate position.
i. Located so the center of the grip when it is in its highest position is not more than 6 feet 7 inches above the finished floor, including the height of the housekeeping pad and mounting channels.

9. Space for future devices:
a. Provide spaces as indicated on the Drawings.
b. As specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Requirements for Electrical.

2.05 COMPONENTS
A. Provide components contained within the motor control center as specified in:

1. Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

2. Section 16123 - 600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables.

3. Section 16150 - Low Voltage Wire Connections.

4. Section 16290 - Electrical Power Monitoring.

5. Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

6. Section 16422 - Motor Starters.

7. Section 17710 - Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components.

Low Voltage Motor Control Centers
16444-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16444 (DraftFinal)

2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Wiring:

1. Wire the motor control center in accordance with the following NEMA Class and Type as defined by NEMA ICS 18-2001:
a. NEMA Class II-S:
1) Furnish wiring diagrams for individual units consisting of drawings that identify electrical devices, electrical connections, and indicate terminal numbering designations.
2) Furnish individual unit diagrams with each unit and include interwiring between units, i.e., electrical interlocking, etc., as specifically specified in the Contract Documents.
3) Provide custom drawings with unique terminal numbering designations in lieu of standard manufacturer drawings. b. NEMA Type B wiring:
1) Control wiring:
a) Type B-T pull-apart terminal blocks.
2) Power wiring:
a) Type B-T for Size 1 starters.
b) Type B-T or B-D for Size 2 and 3 starters.
c) Type B for Size 4 and larger starters and feeder units.

B. Lugs and terminals:

1. For external connections of No. 6 AWG wire or larger:
a. UL listed for copper or aluminum conductors.

2. Compression type, requiring a hydraulic press and die for installation.

3. Provide additional terminal blocks as needed for control conductors passing through the MCC.

4. Provide 30 percent spare control block terminals.

C. Nameplates:

1. Provide nameplates as specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems:
a. Identifying the motor control center designation as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Furnish individual nameplates for each unit indicated on the Drawings:
a. 1 nameplate to identify the unit designation.
b. 1 nameplate to identify the load served.
c. Furnish space units with blank nameplates.

3. Manufacturer’s labels:
a. Furnish each vertical section with a label identifying:
1) Serial number.
2) Bus rating.
3) Vertical section reference number.
4) Date of manufacture.
5) Catalog number of section.

2.07 FINISHES
A. Finish metal surfaces and structural parts with phosphatizing, or equal, treatment before painting.

Low Voltage Motor Control Centers
16444-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16444 (DraftFinal) B. Finish interior surfaces including bus support angles, control unit back plates, and top and bottom barrier plates with baked white enamel.

C. Finish exterior of enclosure with manufacturer’s standard gray.

1. Finish NEMA Type 3R exterior cabinets with ultraviolet resistant enamel paint that is UL recognized for outdoor use.

2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Source Testing (Factory Acceptance Tests):

1. Not witnessed.

2. Test the complete motor control center at the manufacturer’s establishment.

Completely assemble, wire, and test the motor control center:
a. Detailed inspections before and after assembly to ensure correctness of design and workmanship.

3. Provide groups of wires leaving the shipping-assembled equipment with terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips.

4. Furnish test reports and Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Anchoring and bracing to structures:

1. Prepare equipment anchor setting template(s) and use to position anchors during construction of supporting structure(s).

2. Install anchors of type and material indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3. Install anchors with embedment indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details.

B. General:

1. Furnish cables, conduit, lugs, bolts, and other accessories necessary to completely install the motor control center for the line, load, and control connections.

2. Assemble and install the motor control center in the locations and with the layouts as indicated on the Drawings.

3. Make bus splice connections.

4. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction and Shop Drawings.

5. Furnish components and equipment necessary to complete the installation.

6. Replace hardware, lost or damaged during installation or handling, in order to provide a complete installation.

Low Voltage Motor Control Centers
16444-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16444 (DraftFinal)

7. Install the MCC on a raised concrete housekeeping pad:
a. Provide structural leveling channels in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations to provide proper alignment of the units:
1) Remove the manufacturer’s supplied mounting channels as required by the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
b. Weld and/or bolt the motor control center frame to leveling channels.

C. Provide openings in the top or bottom of the motor control center for conduit only:

1. No additional openings will be accepted:
a. Miscut holes will require that the entire vertical section or removable panel be replaced.
b. No hole closers or patches will be accepted.

D. Bundle circuits together and terminate in each unit:

1. Tie with nylon wire ties as specified in Section 16123 - 600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables.

2. Label wires at each end with wire markers as specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems as shown on the approved elementary schematics.

E. Installation Verification:

1. Furnish Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation Verification.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide the services of a manufacturer’s representative to:

1. Inspect, verify, and certify that the motor control center installation meets the manufacturer’s requirements.

B. Functional Testing:

1. As specified in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.

3.04 OWNER TRAINING
A. Owner Training:

1. Perform Owner Training as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Make adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, Engineer, or testing firm.

END OF SECTION

Panelboards
16445-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16445 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16445

PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Panelboards serving feeder circuits and branch circuits.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. 67 - Standard for Panelboards.

1.03 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

B. Anchoring and bracing.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Manufacturer of panelboard.

2. Bill of material.

3. Assembly ratings including:
a. Voltage.
b. Phase.
c. Continuous current.
d. Short circuit interrupting rating.

4. NEMA enclosure type.

5. Cable terminal sizes based upon actual feeder and sub-feeder conductors used.

6. Furnish circuit breaker Submittals as specified in Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

7. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F, submit the following as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria:
a. Manufacturer’s statement of seismic qualification with substantiating test data.
b. Manufacturer’s special seismic certification with substantiating test data.

Panelboards
16445-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16445 (DraftFinal) C. Shop Drawings:

1. Overall panelboard dimensions, interior panel dimensions, and wiring gutter dimensions:
a. Height.
b. Length.
c. Width.

2. Weight.

3. Anchoring locations.

4. Breaker layout drawing with dimensions:
a. Location of the main, branches, solid neutral, and ground.

5. Conduit entry/exit locations:
a. Identify conduit entry/exit locations and restrictions.

6. Individual panel schedules identifying breaker locations, ratings, and nameplate designations within the panelboard, for every panelboard.

D. Calculations:

1. Detailed calculations or details of the actual physical testing performed on the panelboard to prove the panelboard is suitable for the seismic requirements at the Project Site.

E. Delegated Design Submittals:

F. Installation instructions:

1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place.

2. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions.

G. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

2. Test reports.

H. Operations and maintenance manual:

1. As specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Provide a complete manual for the operation and maintenance of the panelboard, circuit breakers, devices, and accessories:
a. Including, but not limited to:
1) Instruction narratives and bulletins.
2) Renewal parts lists.
3) Time-current curves for all devices.

Panelboards
16445-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16445 (DraftFinal)

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Where indicated as service entrance equipment, panelboards shall be UL listed and labeled “Suitable for Service Entrance.”

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Circuit breaker panelboards as indicated in the panelboard schedules, one-lines, and where indicated on the Drawings:

1. Service voltage and configuration as indicated on the panel schedules.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. ABB.

2. Eaton.

3. Schneider Electric.

B. Circuit breakers:

1. Same manufacturer as the panelboard.

2.04 EQUIPMENT
A. Provide panelboards with:

1. Molded-case circuit breakers with trip ratings as shown on the panel schedules.

2. Spares and spaces for future circuit breakers in panels as shown on the panel schedules.
a. Space for future devices as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Requirements for Electrical.

B. Short circuit rating:

1. Provide as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Testing method in accordance with UL 67.

Panelboards
16445-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16445 (DraftFinal)

3. Mark each panelboard with its maximum short circuit rating at the supply voltage.

4. Panelboards shall be fully rated.

2.05 COMPONENTS
A. Enclosure:

1. NEMA enclosure type as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Where not indicated on the Drawings, as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical for the installed location.

2. Minimum width: 20 inches.

3. Gutter space in accordance with the NEC:
a. Minimum of 4 inches.

4. Dead-front, no live parts when the panelboard is in service.

5. Enclose entire panelboard bus assembly in a corrosion resistant galvanized steel cabinet.

6. 4-piece front to provide ease of wiring access.

7. Lockable, hinged door over the protective devices with a flush, cylinder tumbler-type lock with catch and door pull:
a. Minimum 2 keys per panelboard.
b. Key all panelboard locks alike.

8. Circuit directory frame and card on the inside of the door.

9. Door-in-door construction consists of a one-piece front with 2 doors:
a. Smaller door provides access to device handles and rating labels and shall be lockable.
b. Larger door provides access to conductors and wiring terminals.

10. Interior design such that replacement of circuit breakers does not require disturbing adjacent units or removal of the main bus connectors.

11. Outdoor locations: Provide NEMA Type 4X enclosures with a NEMA Type 4X stainless steel outer enclosure (with a hinged door) and a NEMA Type 1 interior panelboard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Bus:

1. General:
a. Tin-plated copper.

2. Phase bus:
a. Full size and height without reduction.
b. Dimensions and temperature rise in accordance with UL 67:
1) Limit current density to less than 1,000 amps per square inch. c. Insulate current carrying parts from ground and phase-to-phase with a high dielectric strength insulator.

3. Ground bus:
a. Copper, solidly bonded.

4. Neutral bus:
a. Provide where indicated on the Drawings.
b. 100 percent rated.
c. Provide lugs for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection.

5. Provide insulation barriers over the vertical bus behind the dead front shield to provide increased safety during field service.

Panelboards
16445-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16445 (DraftFinal) C. Lugs:

1. UL listed for copper and aluminum wire:
a. Rated for 75-degree Celsius terminations.
b. Provide bolted or compression main lug terminations as required for the incoming cable size.

D. Circuit breakers: As specified in Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers and as indicated on the Drawings:

1. Provide with bolt-on connections:
a. Plug-in circuit breakers are not allowed.

2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Surge protective devices:

1. Furnish panelboards with surge protective devices as indicated on the Drawings.

2. As specified in Section 16285 - Surge Protective Devices.

B. Nameplates:

1. As specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

2. Install on outside of door.

3. Indicating:
a. Panel designation.
b. Voltage.
c. Number of phases and configuration.

C. Circuit identification labels:

1. Provide index cards behind heavy clear plastic in cardholders on the inside of the doors.

2. Type all information on the cards using designations in the panel schedules.

3. Laminated on both sides.

D. Pad locking mechanism:

1. Provide a pad locking attachment to allow circuit breakers to be locked in the off position.

2. At a minimum, provide 1 mechanism per panelboard:
a. Provide multiple mechanisms if required to accommodate all circuit breaker frame sizes in the panelboard.

2.07 FINISHES
A. Finish stand-alone panelboards with a primer, rust-resistant phosphate undercoat, and 2 coats of oven-baked enamel with manufacturer’s standard gray.

B. Finish panelboards mounted in motor control centers to match the motor control center finish and color.

2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Source Testing:

1. Perform standard factory tests on the panelboards.

Panelboards
16445-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16445 (DraftFinal)

2. Test in accordance with NEMA and UL standards.

3. Furnish test reports and Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Anchoring and bracing to structures:

1. Prepare equipment anchor setting template(s) and use to position anchors during construction of supporting structure(s).

2. Install anchors of type and material indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3. Install anchors with embedment indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details.

B. General:

1. Mounted as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Mount rigidly to structural members with exposed surfaces plumb and level to within 1/32 inch.

3. Perform Work in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and Shop Drawings.

4. Provide brackets, hangers, supports, and hardware for mounting as required.

5. In NEMA Type 4 and NEMA Type 4X locations, mount panelboards on 7/8-inch deep stainless steel preformed channel, with channel running vertically from top to bottom of panelboard:
a. Use only stainless steel mounting hardware.

6. Mount panelboard so that top operating handle is not more than 6 feet-7 inches above the operating floor.

C. Provide typewritten schedule in each panelboard.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Field electrical acceptance testing:

1. As specified in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.

END OF SECTION
Low Voltage Fuses
16494-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16494 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16494

LOW VOLTAGE FUSES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Fuses: 600-volt class and lower.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Catalog cut sheets.

2. Complete fuse schedule.

3. Manufacturer original 11-inch by 17-inch, time current curves for all fuses furnished.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Include drawings of spare fuse cabinets.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Low voltage fuses shall be UL listed and labeled.

1.05 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.06 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

1.07 MAINTENANCE
A. Spare parts:

1. Provide 3 spare fuses for each size and type used or supplied under any Section of the Contract Documents.

2. Provide spare fuse cabinet(s):
a. Metal cabinet with hinged door and shelves or fuse holders. b. Gray enamel finish.
c. Mount near equipment and label “Spare Fuses” on face of cabinet.

Low Voltage Fuses
16494-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16494 (DraftFinal) d. Suitable pocket inside door of each cabinet with typewritten spare fuse inventory in clear plastic protective insert.
e. Provide as many cabinets as required to hold entire spare fuse inventory.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Fuses for overcurrent protection and/or current limiting applications as indicated on the Drawings.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. Bussmann.

2. Ferraz Shawmut.

3. Littelfuse.

2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. General:

1. Provide durable, readily visible label inside each fuse enclosure, clearly indicating the correct type, size, and ratings of replacement fuse:
a. Label shall not cover or interfere with the equipment manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Affix a label indicating recommended torque for fuse mounting bolts or studs to the inside of fuse access doors.

3. To ensure selective coordination of protective devices:
a. Provide fuses for new facilities by the same manufacturer. b. Provide fuses for renovations of the same manufacturer as existing fuses.

4. Provide fuses rated for the voltage and available short circuit current at which they are applied.

B. Fuses for services, switchboard mains, feeders, and branch circuits:

1. 600 amperes and less:
a. Provide UL listed RK1 dual-element, time-delay fuses with ampere ratings as indicated on the Drawings, except as may be modified by the Contract Documents.

C. Fuses for motor branch circuits:

1. Ampere ratings shall not exceed the motor controller manufacturer’s recommended values:
a. If the manufacturer does not have such standards, provide fuses as specified in this Section.

2. Provide Class RK1 fuses or fuses as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in the Contract Documents, rated in accordance with the fuse manufacturer’s recommendations for backup running protection of motor circuits containing overload relays.

3. Determine fuse ratings for overload protection of motor branch circuits by actual full-load currents of motors provided.

Low Voltage Fuses
16494-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16494 (DraftFinal)

4. Fuses in motor control centers may be time-delay Class J or Class CC fuses, if MCC manufacturer’s standard designs use these fuse types:
a. Time-delay Class J fuse ratings shall not exceed 150 percent of motor full load current except as permitted.
b. Follow the fuse manufacturer’s recommendations for Class CC fuses. c. A motor having starting duty or other special characteristics requiring larger fuses than specified above may have branch circuit fuse ratings increased as necessary to meet the motor’s requirements, but no larger than maximum permitted by the NEC.
1) Increased requirements for an individual motor shall not be cause for increasing size of all fuses.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:

1. Properly aligned, electrically and mechanically secure.

2. Evenly torque mounting bolts and nuts to ASTM recommendations for type and diameter of mounting bolts or studs provided.

3. Paralleling of fuses is not permitted.

4. Install fuses so that the fuse nameplate and rating are easily readable in the equipment.

B. Replace fuses, on all phases, for any fuses that opened during start-up and testing.

C. After completion of testing, deliver spare fuses in quantities specified:

1. New, in manufacturer’s original packaging, and stored in a clean, dry location.

D. Install spare fuse cabinets where instructed by the Owner.

END OF SECTION

Lighting: LED Luminaires
16510-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16510 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16510
LIGHTING: LED LUMINAIRES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. LED luminaires, drivers, poles, and accessories.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES):

1. LM-79 - Approved Method: Optical and Electrical Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products.

2. LM-80 - Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED Packages, Arrays and Modules.

3. RP-7 - Recommended Practice for Lighting Industrial Facilities.

4. TM-21 - Projecting Long Term Lumen, Photon, and Radiant Flux Maintenance of LED Light Sources.

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

1. C62.41 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic Drivers and Discharge Ballasts.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. 1598 - Luminaires.

2. 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use In Lighting Products.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. CCT (correlated color temperature) - Scientific scale to describe how “warm” or how “cool” the light source is, measured in Kelvin. The lower the Kelvin temperature, the warmer the light feels, or appears.

2. CRI (color rendering index) - A quantitative measure of the ability of a light source to reveal the colors of various objects faithfully in comparison with an ideal or natural light source.

3. Driver - Device that manages power and controls the current flow from AC to DC for an LED lighting product.

Lighting: LED Luminaires
16510-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16510 (DraftFinal)

4. Efficacy - Lumen output of a light source per unit of power supplied to that source (lumens per watt).

5. EMI (electromagnetic interference) - Electrical interference (noise) generated by electrical and electronic devices.

6. FC (foot candles) - Measure of light level on a surface being illuminated.

7. L70 - Extrapolated life in hours of the luminaire when the luminous output depreciates 30 percent from initial values.

8. LED (light emitting diode) - A solid-state semiconductor device that produces light when electrical current flows through it.

9. LED light source - See LED luminaire.

10. LED luminaire - A complete lighting unit consisting of LED-based light emitting elements and a matched driver together with parts to distribute light, to position and protect the light emitting elements, and to connect the unit to a branch circuit.

11. Lumen - International (SI) unit of luminous flux or quantity of light. The amount of light that is spread over a square foot of surface by 1 candle power when all parts of the surface are exactly 1 foot from the light source.

12. Lumen ambient temperature multiplier - LED light source relative lumen output when compared to a standard ambient temperature.

13. Lumen maintenance factor - How well an LED light source is able to retain its intensity when compared to new.

14. Luminaire - Lighting unit.

15. THD (total harmonic distortion) - Combined effect of harmonic Distortion on the AC waveform produced by a driver or other device.

1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

B. Anchoring and bracing for light poles.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. LED luminaires:
a. Catalog literature for each luminaire specified, cross-referenced to the luminaire type on the Luminaire Schedule, in the Drawings. b. Provide for each luminaire type:
1) Materials.
2) Type of diffuser.
3) Hardware.
4) Gasketing.
5) Reflector.
6) Chassis.
7) Finish and color.
8) Driver type and protection.
9) LED luminaire:
a) Initial lumen output at 40 degrees Celsius ambient.
b) Correlated color temperature.

Lighting: LED Luminaires
16510-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16510 (DraftFinal) c) Lumen maintenance factors.
d) Lumen ambient temperature multipliers.
e) Drive current.
f) Efficacy.
10) Picture of luminaire.
11) IES optical distributions.
12) Dimensioned drawings:
a) Effective projected area rating for pole mounted luminaires. 13) Weight.
14) Photometric data:
a) Coefficient of utilization tables based on the IES zonal cavity system by an approved testing laboratory.
b) Luminaire dirt depreciation factor.
c) Candlepower distribution curves.
d) Average luminaire brightness.
e) Lumen output charts.
15) Furnish support method for interior luminaires weighing more than 30 pounds and all wall-mounted luminaires:
a) Support methods shall be based on seismic requirements at the Project Site as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria. c. Luminaire substitutions:
1) Provide complete literature for each luminaire substitution:
2) Submittals for substituted luminaires shall be sufficient for competent comparison of the proposed luminaire to the originally specified luminaire:
a) Photometric data:
(1) IES file in standard IES format.
(2) Coefficient of utilization tables based on the IES zonal cavity system by an approved testing laboratory.
(3) Candlepower distribution curves.
(4) Average luminaire brightness.
(5) Lumen output charts.
(6) Power requirements in watts and volt-amperes.
b) Calculations:
(1) Provide software generated calculations showing
illuminance levels in footcandles and power usage in watts per square foot for each of the areas in which substitutions are proposed:
(a) Use surface reflectance values in accordance with
IES RP-7.
(b) Use manufacturer projected lumen maintenance factor for minimum of 60,000 hours to perform all calculations. c) Specification sheets:
(1) If lacking sufficient detail to indicate compliance with Contract Documents, standard specification sheets will not be accepted. This includes, but is not limited to, luminaire type designation, manufacturer’s complete catalog number, voltage, LED type, CCT, CRI, specific driver information, system efficacy, L70 life rating, and any modifications necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract
Documents.

Lighting: LED Luminaires
16510-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16510 (DraftFinal) 3) Substitutions for specified luminaires will be evaluated upon quality of construction, light distribution, energy use, appearance, and maintenance.
4) Substitutions shall comply with all applicable building and energy codes.

2. Driver: Provide for each driver type:
a. Catalog number.
b. Type of driver.
c. Output wattage.
d. Input voltage.
e. Operating voltage range.
f. Maximum input power.
g. Efficiency.
h. Operating line current.
i. Power factor.
j. Operating temperature range.
k. Current output range in ambient temperatures of 30 to 55 degrees Celsius. l. Surge suppression data.

3. Photocell:
a. Provide for each photocell type:
1) Switching capacity.
2) Life expectancy when used on LED sources.
3) Means of adjusting the lighting pickup level.
4) Enclosure type.
5) Mounting method.

4. Luminaire poles:
a. Submit complete data for each pole type including, but not limited to:
1) Material.
2) Finish and color.
3) Handholes.
4) Anchoring.
5) Luminaire attachment methods and fittings.
6) Pole height.
7) Pole dimensions.
8) Bolt hole circle layout and hardware.
9) Accessories.
10) Provide the EPA wind load rating.
11) Installation instructions for rigging, moving and setting into place.

C. Delegated Design Submittals:

1. Project-specific calculations with anchoring and bracing details based on support conditions and requirements to resist loads specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

D. Record documents:

1. Update the Luminaire Schedule in the Drawings to reflect the acceptable substitutions, after the substitution has been reviewed and accepted by the Engineer.

Lighting: LED Luminaires
16510-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16510 (DraftFinal)

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaires shall be UL listed and labeled.

1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.08 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Scheduling:

1. Exterior and outdoor lighting system operation shall be demonstrated during the hours of darkness.

2. Lighting demonstration shall occur within 2 weeks before substantial completion.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

B. LED luminaire:

1. 5-year warranty from the date of installation including material, workmanship, photometrics, driver, and LED modules.

1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish 1 complete spare LED luminaire, with driver, of each type used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Individual luminaire types are indicated on the Drawings and on the Luminaire Schedule.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide luminaires and accessories for all lighting systems, complete and operable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. Luminaires:

1. The following or equal:
a. As noted on the Luminaire Schedule.

B. Drivers:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. eldoLED.
b. Philips Advance.
c. Thomas Research.

Lighting: LED Luminaires
16510-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16510 (DraftFinal) C. Photo-electric cells:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Cooper.
b. Hubbell-Killark.
c. Intermatic.
d. Tork.

D. Substitutions:

1. Lighting design and luminaire selection has been based upon the photometric data of the identified luminaire. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure and prove to the Engineer at time of Submittal the substitutions meet the quality and photometric requirements of the original design.

2.04 EQUIPMENT
A. LED luminaires:

1. General:
a. Pre-wired with leads of 18-AWG, minimum, for connection to building circuits.
b. Provide the luminaires furnished as indicated on the Luminaire Schedule in the Drawings:
1) Specifications noted in this Section are an addition or supplement to the Luminaire Schedule.
c. Individual LEDs connected such that a catastrophic loss or the failure of 1 LED will not result in the loss of the entire luminaire.

2. Minimum ambient temperature range of 0 degrees Celsius to 40 degrees Celsius.

3. Minimum rated life:
a. Office areas: 70,000 hours when operated at 25 degrees Celsius. b. Process areas: 100,000 hours when operated at 40 degrees Celsius. c. Hazardous areas: 100,000 hours when operated at 40 degrees Celsius.

4. Minimum efficacy of 70 lumens/watt.
a. Hazardous areas: Minimum 60 lumens/watt.

5. Minimum Color Rendering Index of 70.

6. Tested according to IES LM-79 and LM-80.

7. Lumen maintenance projection in accordance with IES TM-21.

8. RoHS compliant.

9. Integral driver.

10. Suitable for dry, damp, or wet locations as indicated on the Drawings or on the Luminaire Schedule.
a. Wet or damp locations: UL 1598 listed.

11. Designed as a complete LED assembly. Retrofit LED lamps in luminaires not designed specifically for LED light sources shall not be used.

12. Exterior/outdoor luminaires:
a. Luminaires in combination with their mounting pole and bracket shall be capable of withstanding:
1) Wind levels at the Project Site without damage.
2) Seismic levels at the Project Site.
b. Corrosion-resistant hardware and hinged doors or lens retainer. c. Luminaires furnished with integral photoelectrical control shall be of the luminaire manufacturer’s standard design.

Lighting: LED Luminaires
16510-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16510 (DraftFinal) d. California Energy Code Light Pollution Reduction Compliance:
1) Provide exterior luminaires with cutoff photometrics. a) Luminaire design shall allow no more than 0.01 horizontal footcandles to escape beyond the site boundary.
2) Provide exterior luminaires with photocells to automatically control exterior lighting dusk to dawn to turn off or lower the lighting levels during inactive periods. Reference the Drawings for specific luminaires to be controlled.

B. Photo-electric cells:

1. Weatherproof.

2. In Class I Division 2 locations:
a. Rated for used in Class I Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D locations. b. Factory sealed.

3. Photoelectric cells for control of multiple luminaires:
a. Self-contained.
b. Provided with time-delay features.
c. Sized to meet switching capacity of the circuit:
1) Based on luminaire VA as indicated on the Drawings.

4. Photoelectric cell for control of a single luminaire:
a. Integral to the luminaire.

C. Luminaire control:

1. Lighting control relays or contactors as specified in Section 16422 - Motor Starters.

D. Drivers:

1. Dimmable, with dimming signal protocol of 0-10 VDC or DALI.

2. Input power source:
a. As indicated on the Drawings.

3. Drive current:
a. As indicated in the Luminaire Schedule.

4. Power factor: Greater than 0.90.

5. Efficiency: Greater than 80 percent.

6. Total harmonic distortion (THD) of the input current less than 20 percent.

7. Rated life of 60,000 hours in an LED luminaire operated at an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius.

8. Minimum operating temperature of 0 degrees Celsius.

9. Sound rating: Class A+ or quieter.

10. UL listed Class 2 Outdoor in accordance with UL 8750.

11. In accordance with IEEE C62.41 Category A for transient protection.

12. Driver must limit inrush current:
a. Meet or exceed NEMA 410 driver inrush standard:
1) 230 amps per 10 amp load with a maximum of 106 amps
squared-seconds at 120 V.
2) 430 amps per 10 amp load with a maximum of 370 amps
squared-seconds at 277 V.

Lighting: LED Luminaires
16510-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16510 (DraftFinal)

2.05 COMPONENTS
A. Luminaire poles:

1. As indicated on the Luminaire Schedule.

2. Anchor bolts:
a. Use anchor bolts, bolts, or welded studs for anchors for resisting seismic and wind forces.
1) Standard hex bolt head.
2) Do not use anchor bolts fabricated from rod stock with an L- or J-shape.
b. Complete with leveling shims.

3. Anchor base:
a. Fabricated from the same type of material as the pole shaft. b. Base plate to telescope the pole shaft.
c. Welded top and bottom along the entire perimeter.
d. With slotted bolt holes on the bolt circles as submitted.

4. Pole shaft:
a. As indicated on the Luminaire Schedule.

5. Handhole:
a. Reinforced handhole located approximately 18 inches above the base. b. Complete with cover fabricated from the same material as the pole shaft and stainless steel attachment screws.
c. With an integral ground connection nut, 1/2 inch by 13 inch UNC welded to the pole for connection to the grounding system.

6. Shroud:
a. Fabricated from the same type of material as the pole shaft. b. 1-piece formed channel section that shall conform to the pole shaft taper. c. Secured by a locking device with provisions for a padlock to prevent accidental lowering.

7. Fastening hardware:
a. Stainless steel.

8. Finish:
a. As indicated on the Luminaire Schedule.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Anchoring and bracing to structures:

1. Prepare equipment anchor setting template(s) and use to position anchors during construction of supporting structure(s).

2. Install anchors of type and material indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3. Install anchors with embedment indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details.

Lighting: LED Luminaires
16510-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16510 (DraftFinal) B. Special techniques:

1. Support luminaires from structural elements capable of carrying the total weight.

2. Install luminaires plumb and square with building and wall intersections:
a. Suspend pendant-mounted luminaries that are mounted from sloping ceilings with ball hangers, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. b. Install luminaires in machinery rooms after machines have been installed, so as to ensure no conflict with machinery, piping, or ductwork.

3. In all cases, coordinate luminaire locations with work of other trades to prevent obstruction of light from the fixtures:
a. Locate bottom of luminaire approximately at the bottom of ductwork, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.

4. Support luminaires weighing more than 25 pounds independently of the outlet box and the conduit.

5. Provide ceiling or pendent mounted luminaires with a safety chain connecting the lens, driver, and other components to the building structure.

6. Provide recessed luminaires with auxiliary safety supports attached directly to the building structure:
a. Safety supports shall consist of number 12 AWG soft drawn galvanized wires.

7. Provide luminaires equipped with battery backup with an additional unswitched conductor from the power source circuit designated on the Drawing. Wall switches shall be wired to switch luminaires on and off, while maintaining power to the backup batteries.

C. Luminaire poles:

1. Set poles on anchor bolts and secured with double nuts on each bolt.

2. Dry-pack the pole base, after the luminaire and pole has been leveled and plumbed.

3. Bond metal poles to the plant grounding system, utilizing a ground lug connection within the pole:
a. Route ground conductor through pier and pole base sleeve using Schedule 40 PVC conduit.

3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Aim and verify exterior and outdoor luminaires alignment, during dark evening hours, as directed by the Owner or the Engineer.

3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean lenses, diffusers, and reflectors.

B. Refinish luminaires’ trim, poles, and support brackets, where finish has been damaged.

C. Clean LED luminaires (new and old), used during construction for construction lighting, before substantial completion.

Lighting: LED Luminaires
16510-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16510 (DraftFinal)

3.05 SCHEDULES
A. Refer to the Luminaire Schedule in the Drawings.

END OF SECTION
Fire Alarm Systems
16710-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16710 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16710

FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Design and installation of fire alarm systems.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Regulations:

1. As specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.

B. Standards:

1. Federal Communications Commission (FCC).

2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 1 - Fire Code.
b. 70 - National Electrical Code.
c. 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code.
d. 75 - Standard for the Protection of Information Technology Equipment. e. 90A - Standard for the installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation systems.
f. 1221 - Standard for the Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Emergency Services Communications Systems.

3. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET).

4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a. 864/1730 - Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems.

1.03 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

B. Fire alarm system design.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Delegated Design Submittals:

1. Product data for fire alarm system components and materials.

2. Shop Drawings:
a. Furnish all Shop Drawings required to obtain approval of the fire alarm system by the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ).

3. Calculations.

Fire Alarm Systems
16710-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16710 (DraftFinal) C. Installation instructions:

1. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions.

D. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Designer and installer qualifications.

2. Manufacturer’s representative qualifications.

3. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

4. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Functional Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

E. Owner Training Submittals:

1. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

F. Operation and maintenance manuals:

1. As specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer qualifications:

1. NICET Level II Fire Alarm System Technician.

2. Installation to be supervised by NICET Level III Technician.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2, and the manufacturer’s instructions.

1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.08 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sequencing:

1. Furnish Submittals to the local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), for review and approval of the proposed system.
a. Pay all plan check, permit, and inspection fees.
b. Submit AHJ’s approval to the Engineer.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of fire alarm system for 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.

Fire Alarm Systems
16710-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16710 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Design, furnish, and install fire alarm systems in the following locations:

1. Campus Oaks Pump Station.

2. Misty Woods Pump Station.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. Edwards Signaling Solutions.

2. Honeywell.

3. Siemens Fire Safety Solutions.

2.03 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide a complete, non-coded, microprocessor-based fire alarm system with initiating devices, notification appliances, controls, and supervisory devices.

B. HVAC shutdown:

1. Shutdown all HVAC equipment serving an area in the event of an alarm.

2. Related HVAC equipment as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Alarms from the fire alarm system shall be routed to:

1. PLC.

2.04 EQUIPMENT
A. All fire alarm system equipment and materials shall be UL listed.

B. Fire alarm equipment shall be rated for the installed location as indicated on the Drawings.

2.05 COMPONENTS
A. Conduit:

1. Use the conduit type for the installed location as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

2. Provide conduit as specified in Section 16130 - Conduits.

B. Boxes:

1. Provide boxes as specified in Section 16134 - Boxes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install system components and associated devices in accordance with applicable NFPA Standards and manufacturer’s recommendations.

Fire Alarm Systems
16710-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16710 (DraftFinal) B. Smoke detectors shall not be installed until after construction cleanup on all trades is complete and final in accordance with NFPA 70, NFPA 72, NFPA 75, NFPA 90A, FCC, and other codes applicable to the individual installation location.

C. Locate the fire alarm control panel as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Wiring:

1. Conduit and wiring systems:
a. Size, provide, and install necessary conduits and wiring systems necessary to meet the requirements of the approved fire alarm system design. b. Installed in accordance with the NEC, state, and local codes.

E. Installation Verification:

1. Furnish Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation Verification.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to:

1. Supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pre-testing, testing, and adjustment of the system.

2. Verify proper installation, correct deficiencies, and be present at the jobsite during final inspection by the Engineer.

B. Functional testing:

1. Witnessed.

2. Notify the Engineer and the AHJ in writing a minimum of 2 weeks before the scheduled day for the field acceptance tests.

3. Furnish the services of a field service engineer, and any special tools, equipment, and labor to perform the tests.

4. Each device and control function shall be individually witness tested and recorded:
a. Acceptance tests shall be witnessed by and signed off by the Engineer, the FASS’s field engineer, the installing Subcontractor, and a representative of the AHJ.

5. Furnish test reports and the Manufacturer’s Certificate of Functional Compliance.

3.03 OWNER TRAINING
A. Perform Owner Training as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

END OF SECTION
Security
16752-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16752 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16752

SECURITY
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Access system hardware:
a. Cameras.
b. Card readers.
c. Card reader panel.
d. Non-contact magnetic door switch.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

1.03 TERMINOLOGY (NOT USED)

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Refer to Contract drawings. The security system will comprise of card readers, cameras, video recorders, and an access controller. The access controller and video recorders will be connected to the Owner’s information network via Ethernet TCP/IP at the project site and be available to City personnel via access from SCADA workstations and other authorized computers. The Contractor will provide and install the material listed in this Section per engineer and manufacturer’s direction. After installation, the Owner will configure the security components and interface them with the SCADA system and other Owner systems. The contractor will not need to provide separate workstations for the security system. The Owner has specified the exact material they’d like for the security system. All card readers, door hardware, and cameras, will be tested after configuration to ensure operability.

The Contractor will work with the engineer and owner to conduct and complete testing. Testing of the security system components shall be part of the site acceptance testing procedure.

1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED)

1.06 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.

Security
16752-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16752 (DraftFinal) B. Product data.

1. Model numbers of all components furnished on the job.

2. Manufacturer's catalog data sheets for all components.

3. Input power requirements for all components.

4. Warranty information.

C. Shop Drawings.

1. Complete engineered drawings indicating:
a. Layout, wiring diagrams, and dimensions.
b. Point-to-point wiring diagrams for all devices.
c. Termination details for all devices.
d. Single-line system architecture drawings representing the entire system.

D. Calculations.

E. Schedules.

F. Delegated Design Submittals:

1. Provide project-specific calculations based on support conditions and requirements to resist loads specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria. a. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F.
b. For equipment installed outdoors.
c. For wall mounted equipment weighing 125 pounds or more.

G. Installation instructions:

1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place.

2. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions.

H. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s representative qualifications.

2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

3. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation Verification as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

4. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Functional Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

I. Owner Training Topics and Details Submittals:

1. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning and 3.05 Owner Training.

J. Operation and maintenance manuals:

1. As specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Complete documentation shall be provided with the system.

3. The documentation shall completely describe all operations, each program, data sets, and the hardware and peripherals.
a. All updates, addendum, and adjustments to the documentation shall be provided at no additional charge, in the same quantities as originally required.

Security
16752-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16752 (DraftFinal) b. System administrator manual:
1) Overview and step-by-step guide and instructions detailing all system administrator responsibility and authority.
c. User manual:
1) Step by step guide and instructions detailing all system user functions and responsibilities.

4. Photo imaging user’s manual:
a. Step-by-step guide and instructions detailing all image capture, badge creation, cardholder modification and all Photo Imaging user functions and responsibilities.

5. Alarm monitoring manual:
a. Step-by-step guide and instructions detailing all alarm monitoring system user functions and responsibilities.

6. Technical maintenance manual:
a. Shall be a comprehensive and detailed document providing all maintenance action, system testing schedules, troubleshooting flowcharts, functional system layout, and block diagrams and schematic diagrams of all system wiring.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. SMS supplier/installer qualifications:

1. Company specializing in the integration of ACS, IDS, closed circuit television (CCTV), networked digital video management systems (NDVMS), and design and installation of cabling and fiber infrastructures with a minimum of 5 years documented experience in successful completion of a minimum of 3 projects similar in scope and cost.

2. Minimum of 2 factory-trained and certified technicians on staff for the duration of the Project and the warranty period.

B. Permits and inspections:

1. Material and workmanship will conform to all applicable legal and code requirements, and as specified in the Contract Documents.

2. Perform all tests required to demonstrate conformance with the Contract Documents.

C. Job conditions:

1. The installation is to be supervised on a regular basis by a person designated by the Contractor. This person will be authorized and will be competent to be in charge of the Project.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 01601 - Product Requirements, Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical, and the manufacturer’s instructions.

1.10 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

Security
16752-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16752 (DraftFinal)

1.11 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds and Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

1.12 SYSTEM START-UP
A. After installation is complete and signed off and the required material in configured then conduct tests to provide the operability of the material and that the required information is shared with SCADA and other authorized systems. The acceptance test and performance demonstration plan shall be developed and documented by the Contractor.

1. These requirements shall apply to all system components and software, including, but not limited to:
a. All system computers.
b. Field controllers.
c. Card reader devices.
d. PIN pads.
e. Photo imaging system peripherals.
f. CCTV cameras and equipment.
g. Interface capability.

2. Operational scenarios shall be developed and used by the Contractor to simulate the actual use of the system in the normal environment of the facility.

3. Perform the tests and document the results under the supervision and witnessing of the Engineer and Owner.

B. The Engineer upon Owner approval reserves the right to modify the Contractor's plan or develop new operational test and evaluation procedures to effectively document system operations.

1.13 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED)
PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL (NOT USED)

2.02 MATERIAL
A. If any of the material listed below is obsolete or no longer available, consult the Engineer for a possible replacement.

B. Cameras:

1. Axis Communications (No equal).
a. Part number Q3536-LVE (No equal).

C. Card readers:

1. HID Signo Reader 40 Black (No equal).
a. Part number 40NKS-0000044C (No equal).

Security
16752-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16752 (DraftFinal) D. Card reader panel:

1. Software House (No equal).
a. Part number GSTAR004-POE (No equal).

E. Non-contact magnetic door switch:

1. Edwards Signaling (No equal).
a. Part number 151-6Z-12K (No equal).

F. Video recorder:

1. Razberi (No equal).
a. SSIQ8-R2-8S (No equal).

2.03 FIELD HARDWARE POWER SUPPLIES
A. Power supplies for field hardware shall be compatible with the SMS equipment installed.

1. Power supplies shall be regulated, linear and isolated versions for the field controllers and other equipment and shall be UL listed for specific application.

2. Each version shall be available in UPS with battery backup models only.

3. All power supplies shall be housed in tampered, locked enclosures.

2.04 DOOR SECURITY HARDWARE
A. Ancillary door hardware shall meet the following minimum specifications:

1. A surface-mounted magnetic switch shall be used for roof hatch alarms (NIC).

2. A wide gap overhead door contact shall be used for overhead loading dock doors.
a. A low profile in rugged aluminum housing shall mount directly to the floor. b. Connection to the alarm circuit junction box shall be armored cable to protect the wiring.
c. The magnet shall also be protected by a rugged aluminum housing mounted on the bottom of the overhead door.
d. Both the switch and the magnet assembly shall be weatherproofed and resistant to shock with multiple layers of protection.

3. All exterior doors shall be provided with a latch position indicating switch (monitor strike) which shall be internal to the door and concealed from view.

4. An electro-mechanical lockset shall be used for specific doors, with an access control CR.

5. The strikes shall operate on 24 VDC signal.
a. A double signal switch shall be provided for the purpose of indicating the status condition of the latch but when not energized, and to activate a local alarm.
b. The types of electric door latch shall be as follows:
1) Fail secure:
a) At the loss of electric energy, these locks shall lock. b) At restoration of electrical energy, these locks shall return to open.
c) The door shall be opened with a key.
2) Fail safe:
a) At the loss of electric energy, these locks shall open.

Security
16752-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16752 (DraftFinal) b) At the restoration of electric energy, the locks shall automatically lock.
c) The door shall be unlocked and opened with a key.

6. All card reader controlled doors will include card reader, door contact, and request to exit (REX). The REX shall be integrated into the lever/lockset.

B. Related hardware:

1. Magnetic door switches, door strikes, door strike indicators, panic hardware, door closures, etc., to complete the system. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary hardware, and for the complete operation of all related hardware.

C. Input power requirements:

1. Major components of the AC/IDS-Add-On, such as ACUs, shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 hertz, single phase input power.

2. Monitoring alarm devices and access control devices, such as door strikes, latches, etc., shall be powered by 24 VDC (2 wire-ungrounded), class 1 power limited circuits. Appropriate sized transformers, rectifiers or power supplies shall be provided for monitoring alarm devices by the Contractor, which shall receive its electricity from the building. Appropriate power supplies shall be provided for access control devices which shall receive their electricity from the building.

D. Spare parts:

1. A recommended spare parts list shall be provided, including part price and quantity of each item and for the lot.

E. Door types:

1. Door types for the Project have been grouped as follows:

Type Configuration Strike Type Exit Control Operation Local Alarm A Double Lockset PIR/REX switch Fail-Secure No
B Single Lockset PIR/REX switch Fail-Secure No
C Single Lockset Hinge Switch Fail-Secure No
D Double Crashbar Microswitch Fail-Secure No
E Double Auto opener PIR/REX switch Fail-Secure No
F Single Strike PIR-REX switch Fail-Secure No
G Single Crashbar Microswitch Fail-Safe Yes

2. Secured door type "A" (double doors to the facility):
a. Opening either door of secured door type "A" shall cause a change in state of the magnetic switch (MS) or the monitor strike (MST) and an alarm condition shall be generated by the AC/IDS. Either the MS or the MST or both devices shall cause an alarm condition to be generated by the AC/IDS. Only 1 device shall be required to generate an alarm condition.

Security
16752-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16752 (DraftFinal) b. Entry through a secured door type "A" shall require the use of an authorized access card.
1) The access card shall be presented to the CR and the AC/IDS shall verify that the individual is authorized for the particular access point at that particular time of day and day of the week.
2) If the individual is authorized the AC/IDS shall grant access by momentarily energizing the electro-mechanical lockset and shunting the alarm condition that shall be generated by the MS and MST when the door is opened.
3) The alarm condition shunt shall only be effective for a programmable maximum time period to prevent the door from being propped open after a valid access.
4) If the door remains open for the programmable maximum time period after a valid access, the AC/IDS shall generate an alarm condition and a local alarm.
c. Exit through a secured door type "A" shall be similar to the entry procedure, except that the change of state of an IR motion detector shall be used in place of the CR. In an emergency the exit shall Fail-Open but shall cause the AC/IDS to generate an alarm condition.

3. Secured door type "B" (single door to the facility):
a. Opening the door of secured door type "B" shall cause a change in state of the magnetic switch (MS) or the monitor strike (MST) and an alarm condition shall be generated by the AC/IDS. Either the MS or the MST or both the devices shall cause an alarm condition to be generated by the AC/IDS. Only 1 device shall be required to generate an alarm condition and a local alarm.
b. Entry through a secured door type "B" shall require the use of an authorized access card.
1) The access card shall be presented to the CR and the AC/IDS shall verify that the individual is authorized for the particular access point at that particular time of day and day of the week.
2) If the individual is authorized the AC/IDS shall grant access by momentarily energizing the electro-mechanical lockset and shunting the alarm condition that shall be generated by the MS and MST when the door is opened.
3) The alarm condition shunt shall only be effective for a programmable maximum time period to prevent the door from being propped open after a valid access.
4) If the door remains open for the programmable maximum time period after a valid access, the AC/IDS shall generate an alarm condition and a local alarm.
c. Exit through a secured door type "B" shall be similar to the entry procedure, except that the change of state of a hinge-mounted-switch shall be used in place of the CR. In an emergency the exit shall Fail-Closed and shall cause the AC/IDS to generate an alarm condition.

4. Secured door type "C" (single door to facility):
a. Opening the door of secured door type "C" shall cause a change in the state MS or the MST and an alarm condition shall be generated by the AC/IDS. The door type shall not have a local audible alarm.

Security
16752-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16752 (DraftFinal) b. Entry through a secured door type "C" shall require the use of an authorized access card.
1) The access card shall be presented to the CR and the AC/IDS shall verify that the individual is authorized for the particular access point at that particular time of day and day of the week.
2) If the individual is authorized the AC/IDS shall grant access by momentarily energizing the electro-mechanical lockset and shunting the alarm condition that shall be generated by the MS and the MST when the door is opened.
3) The alarm condition shunt shall only be effective for a programmable maximum time period to prevent the door from being propped open after a valid access.
4) If the door remains open for the programmable maximum time period after a valid access, the AC/IDS shall generate an alarm condition (no local alarm).
c. Exit through a secured door type "C" shall be similar to the entry procedure, except that the change of state of a hinge-mounted or lockset internal switch shall be used in place of the CR. In an emergency exit the exit shall Fail-Closed and shall cause the AC/IDS to generate an alarm condition.

5. Secured door type "D" (double door interior to the facility):
a. Opening the door of secured door type "D" shall cause a change in state of the MS or the MST and an alarm condition shall be generated by the AC/IDS. The door type shall not have a local audible alarm. b. Entry through a secured door type "D" shall require the use of an authorized access card.
1) The access card shall be presented to the CR and the AC/IDS shall verify that the individual is authorized for the particular access point at that particular time of day and day of the week.
2) If the individual is authorized the AC/IDS shall grant access by momentarily energizing the latch retraction solenoid and shunting the alarm condition that shall be generated by the MS and MST when the door is opened.
c. The alarm condition shunt shall only be effective for a programmable maximum time period to prevent the door from being propped open after valid access. If the door remains open for the programmable maximum time period after a valid access, the AC/IDS shall generate an alarm condition (no local alarm).
d. Exit through a secured door type "D" shall be similar to the entry procedure, except that the change of state of a crash-bar mounted micro-switch shall be used in place of the CR. In an emergency exit the exit shall Fail-Closed and shall cause the AC/IDS to generate an alarm condition.

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED)
Security
16752-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16752 (DraftFinal)

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Perform a layout check to ensure that adequate access is available for construction, installation, and maintenance of equipment and devices furnished. The Contractor shall consult the Owner and Engineer in the design of the monitoring workstation area.

B. Anchoring and bracing to structures:

1. Prepare equipment anchor setting template(s) and use to position anchors during construction of supporting structure(s).

2. Install anchors of type and material indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3. Install anchors with embedment indicated on approved anchoring designs.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Although expected locations are indicated on the Drawings, all equipment locations, shall be field verified with the Engineer.

B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details.

1. Installation of the security system material shall include the appropriate material and shall be performed by a factory-trained and certified contractor.

The installation shall be completed per this Section and Project Drawings as required by the Owner. The installation shall include the following:
a. Site planning of field hardware.

C. Furnish Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation Verification.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform acceptance tests to show system is properly installed and that it meets the Specifications and applicable codes. The acceptance tests will include demonstration of the integration to the existing head end, and the capability to be monitored and controlled form other workstations on the Enterprise.

B. Performance specification requirements:

1. Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.

2. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for a specific application.

3. All equipment shall be installed per applicable UL listing for that device or component.

C. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of product in the applications indicated. Anchor products securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other work.

D. Site Acceptance Testing:

1. Witnessed, in-person.
a. Number of Owner and Engineer representatives in person: 1.

Security
16752-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16752 (DraftFinal)

2. Testing requirements:
a. Card Readers are fully functionable and operate as intended. b. Door hardware and power is fully functional and operate as intended. c. Exit buttons are fully functional and operate as intended. d. Cameras are fully functional and operate as intended. e. Required data is shared with the SCADA and other systems as intended.

3. Furnish test reports and the Manufacturer’s Certificate of Functional Compliance.

3.05 OWNER TRAINING
A. Perform Owner Training as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

1. Number of sessions:
a. Operations: 4, each 2 hour duration.
b. Maintenance: 4, each 2 hour duration.

3.06 ADJUSTING (NOT USED)

3.07 CLEANING
A. As specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

3.08 PROTECTION
A. As specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

3.09 SCHEDULES (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION
Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) SECTION 16950

FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL...............................................................................................................2

1.01 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................2

1.02 REFERENCES ...........................................................................................................2

1.03 TERMINOLOGY .........................................................................................................3

1.04 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................3

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................4

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS.............................................................................4

1.07 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................4

1.08 WARRANTY ...............................................................................................................5 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED).......................................................................................5 PART 3 EXECUTION............................................................................................................5

3.01 PREPARATION..........................................................................................................5

3.02 INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................................6

3.03 COMMISSIONING......................................................................................................6

3.04 CLEANING ...............................................................................................................28 Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Responsibilities for testing the electrical installation.

2. Adjusting and calibration.

3. Acceptance tests.

B. Copyright information:

1. Some portions of this Section are copyrighted by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association, Inc. (NETA). See NETA publication ATS for details.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Project references:

1. Specification sections for the electrical equipment being tested.

2. Electrical equipment Shop Drawings.

B. Standards:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

2. ASTM International (ASTM).

3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
a. 43 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery.
b. 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System.
c. 95 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Insulation Testing of AC Electric Machinery (2,300 V and Above) With High Direct Voltage. d. 450 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications. e. 1106 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Installation, Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Nickel-Cadmium Batteries for Stationary Applications.
f. 1188 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Valve-Regulated Lead-Acid (VRLA) Batteries for Stationary Applications.
g. C57.13 - IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers. h. C57.13.1 - IEEE Guide for Field Testing of Relaying Current Transformers. i. C57.13.3 - IEEE Guide for Grounding of Instrument Transformer Secondary Circuits and Cases.
j. C57.104 - IEEE Guide for the Interpretation of Gases Generated in Oil-Immersed Transformers.

4. Insulated Cable Engineer’s Association (ICEA).

5. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA). a. ATS- Standard for Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems.

6. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).

7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. MG1 - Motors and Generators.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal)

8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).
b. 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems.

9. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Testing laboratory: Organization performing the acceptance tests.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Copper Ethernet test form:

1. Cable test reports:
a. Submit 3 copies of test reports showing the results of all tests specified in this Section:
1) Test type.
2) Test location.
3) Test date.
4) Cable number.
5) Cable length.
6) Certification that the cable meets or exceeds the specified standard. b. Furnish hard copy and electronic copy for all traces.

C. Manufacturers’ testing procedures:

1. Submit manufacturers’ recommended testing procedures and acceptable test results for review by the Engineer prior to beginning testing.

D. Test report:

1. Include the following:
a. Summary of Project.
b. Description of equipment tested.
c. Description of tests performed.
d. Test results.
e. Conclusions and recommendations.
f. Completed test forms.
g. List of test equipment used and calibration dates.
h. LAN cable test reports.

E. Test data records:

1. Include the following:
a. Identification of the testing organization.
b. Equipment identification.
c. Nameplate data.
d. Humidity, temperature and or other conditions that may affect the results of the tests and or calibrations.
e. Dates of inspections, tests, maintenance and or calibrations.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) f. Indication of the inspections, tests, maintenance, and or calibrations to be performed and recorded.
g. Expected results when calibrations are to be performed. h. Indication of as-found and as-left results as applicable. i. Indication of test results outside specified tolerances.

F. Testing laboratory qualifications:

1. Submit a complete resume and statement of qualifications from the proposed testing laboratory detailing their experiences in performing the tests specified:
a. This statement will be used to determine whether the laboratory is acceptable, and shall include:
1) Corporate history and references.
2) Resume of individual performing test.
3) Equipment list and test calibration data.

G. Division of responsibilities:

1. Submit a list identifying who is responsible for performing each portion of the testing.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing laboratory qualifications:

1. May be qualified testing personnel from the electrical subcontractor’s staff or an independent testing company.

2. NETA certification required.

3. Selection of the testing laboratory and testing personnel is subject to approval by the Engineer based on testing experience and certifications of the individuals and testing capabilities of the organization.

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.07 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. General requirements:

1. Testing of electrical equipment installed under this Contract in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and as specified in this Section.

2. Conduct tests in the presence of the Engineer or the Engineer’s representative:
a. Engineer will witness visual, mechanical, and electrical tests, and inspections.

3. Testing and inspections shall verify that the equipment is operational within the tolerances required and expected by the manufacturer, and these Specifications.

B. Responsibilities:

1. Contractor responsibilities:
a. Ensure that resources are made available for testing and that testing requirements are met.

2. Electrical subcontractor responsibilities:
a. Perform routine tests during installation.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) b. Demonstrate operation of electrical equipment.
c. Commission the electrical installation.
d. Provide the necessary services during testing, and provide these services to the testing laboratory, Contractor, and other subcontractors, including, but not limited to:
1) Providing electrical power as required.
2) Operating of electrical equipment in conjunction with testing of other equipment.
3) Activating and shutting down electrical circuits.
4) Making and recording electrical measurements.
5) Replacing blown fuses.
6) Installing temporary jumpers.

3. Testing laboratory responsibilities:
a. Perform acceptance tests specified in this Section.
b. Provide required equipment, materials, labor, and technical support during acceptance tests.

C. Sequencing:

1. Prior to testing:
a. At least 30 days before commencement of the acceptance tests, submit the manufacturer’s complete field testing procedures to the Engineer and to the testing laboratory, complete with expected test results and tolerances for equipment to be tested.

2. Perform testing in the following sequence:
a. Perform routine tests as the equipment is installed including:
1) Insulation-resistance tests.
2) Continuity tests.
3) Rotational tests.
b. Adjusting and preliminary calibration.
c. Acceptance tests.
d. Demonstration.
e. Commissioning and plant start-up.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Test instrument calibration:

1. Utilize a testing laboratory with a calibration program which maintains applicable test instrumentation within rated accuracy.
a. Calibrating standard shall be of better accuracy than that of the equipment tested.

2. Accuracy shall be traceable to the NIST in an unbroken chain.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal)

3. Calibrate instruments in accordance with the following frequency schedule:
a. Field instruments: 6 months maximum.
b. Laboratory instruments: 12 months maximum.
c. Leased specialty equipment where the accuracy is guaranteed by the lessor (such as Doble): 12 months maximum.

4. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on test equipment.

5. Maintain an up-to-date instrument calibration record for each test instrument:
a. Records shall show the date and results of each calibration or test.

6. Maintain an up-to-date instrument calibration instruction and procedure for each test instrument.

B. Requirements prior to testing:

1. Do not begin testing until the following conditions have been met:
a. Instruments required are available and in proper operating condition. b. Required dispensable materials such as solvents, rags, and brushes are available.
c. Equipment handling devices such as cranes, vehicles, chain falls, and other lifting equipment are available or scheduled.
d. Instruction books, calibration curves, or other printed material to cover the electrical devices are available.
e. Datasheets to record test results are available.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Test decal:

1. Testing laboratory shall affix a test decal on the exterior of equipment or equipment enclosure of protective devices after performing electrical tests.

2. Color coded to communicate the condition of maintenance of the protective.

Color scheme for condition of maintenance of overcurrent protective devices shall be:
a. White: Electrically and mechanically acceptable.
b. Yellow: Minor deficiency not affecting fault detection and operation, but minor electrical or mechanical condition exists.

3. Shall include the following information at a minimum:
a. Testing organization.
b. Project identifier.
c. Test date.
d. Technician identifier.

3.03 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

B. Functional Testing:

1. Also called Field Acceptance Testing.

C. Panelboards:

1. Cleaning:
a. Visually inspect panelboard for evidence of discoloration, abnormal dust accumulation, metal shards, or any other indication of overheating, wear, or other abnormal conditions prior to cleaning.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) b. Clean cabinet with a brush, vacuum cleaner, or clean, dry, lint-free rags to remove any accumulation of dust, dirt, or other foreign matter. Do not use liquids, solvents, or detergents when cleaning panelboards or components.
c. Avoid blowing dust into panelboards. Do not use a blower or compressed air.
d. Clean supports, terminals, and other major insulating surfaces with clean, dry, lint-free rags or soft bristled brushes.
e. Remove dust, soot, grease, moisture, and foreign material from surface of circuit breakers.

2. General:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. b. Check panelboard circuit schedule for accuracy.
c. Verify appropriate anchorage, required area clearances, and correct alignment.
d. Inspect overall general condition for physical damage. 1) Check for broken studs and loose or damaged wires, connector, terminations, etc.
2) Check bolts, nuts, washer, and pins for tightness.
3) Tighten or use manufacturer’s replacement parts as required. e. Inspect cabinets for signs of rust, corrosion, or deteriorating paint. Inspect cabinets for evidence of localized heat damage to the paint. Investigate sources of heat. Repair painted surfaces.
f. Check that covers are in place and fastened. Plug any open unused knockouts.
g. Inspect panelboard for moisture. Seal off any cracks or openings which have allowed moisture to enter the cabinet. Inspect component devices.

Replace any components that show evidence of damage from moisture. h. Look for any recent changes in sprinklers or other plumbing that might expose indoor panelboards to a source of liquids. Eliminate sources of water, moisture, or liquids, or provide adequate barriers to protect panelboards from sources of water, moisture, or liquids. i. Inspect panelboards and internal components for evidence of overheating, arc spatter, sooty deposits, and tracking.
1) Investigate and correct sources of arcing or overheating. 2) Consult the panelboard manufacturer for recommendations. j. Verify that fuse and/or circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to record drawings, if available, as well as to the circuit breakers’ address for microprocessor communications packages, if equipped.
k. Set adjustable circuit breakers in accordance with engineering coordination study.

3. Terminations, connections, and lugs:
a. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:
1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections:
(1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables.
b. Inspect terminations, connection, and lugs for alignment, physical damage, burns, corrosion, discoloration, flaking, heat damage, arcing, pitting, melting, deterioration, carbonization, cracks, chips, breaks, partial discharge, or moisture. Investigate and eliminate sources of any damage. c. Follow manufacturer recommendations for cleaning, repairing, and replacing damaged parts.
d. Replace overheated connections. Tighten connections to proper torque levels as specified above.

4. Conductors and raceways:
a. Inspect supply conductors and terminations for overheating, discoloration, and oxidation. Investigate and correct any deficiencies. b. Ensure the conductors are protected within their ampacities. c. Visually check panelboard, cables, and raceways for proper bonding and grounding. Correct improper bonding and grounding.
d. Inspect conductors for discoloration, arcing, pitting, melting, flaking of insulation and/or metal parts. Repair or replace damaged components in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
e. Inspect for frayed or broken wires. Replace or repair damaged components in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. f. Inspect for frayed or broken wires. Replace or repair conductors as necessary.
g. Inspect conduits for moisture. Seal conduits which are a source of moisture and provide means to drain moisture away from the panelboard.

5. Circuit breakers:
a. Perform visual and mechanical inspection as specified in this Section. b. Operate several times in order to exercise the mechanisms and the contacts, and to ensure smooth operation. Do not oil or grease parts of molded case circuit breakers.
c. Visually check for evidence of overheating and thermal damage.

Investigate and eliminate sources of overheating.
d. Check for visual defects, chipping, cracks, breaks, burns, and deterioration. Replace damaged circuit breakers.
e. Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, and antipump function.
f. Inspect interchangeable trip-unit circuit breakers for tightness of trip units. g. Check terminals and connections for tightness as specified above. h. Breakers rated 100 A and higher:
1) Perform electrical tests as specified in this Section.

D. Switchgear and switchboard:

1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding and required area clearances. d. Verify the unit is clean and shipping bracing, loose parts, and documentation shipped inside cubicles have been removed.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) e. Verify that circuit breaker/fuse sizes and types correspond to the approved Submittals and the coordination study as well as to the circuit breakers address for microprocessor-communication packages. f. Verify that current and voltage transformer ratios correspond to those indicated on the Drawings.
g. Verify that wiring connections are tight and that wiring is secure to prevent damage during routine operation of moving parts.
h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:
1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables.
i. Verify operation and sequencing of interlocking systems:
1) Attempt closure on locked-open devices.
2) Attempt to open locked-closed devices.
3) Make/attempt key-exchanges in all positions.
j. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces.
k. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.
l. Verify correct barrier and shutter installation and operation. m. Exercise active components.
n. Inspect mechanical indicating devices for correct operation. o. Verify that filters are in place and/or vents are clear. p. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of instrument transformers as specified in this Section.
q. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of surge arresters as specified in this Section.
r. Control power transformers:
1) Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, tightness of connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition.
2) Verify that primary and secondary fuse/circuit breaker ratings match the Submittal Drawings.
3) Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting contacts grounding contacts, and interlocks.

2. Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute.
1) Perform test in accordance with NETA ATS tables.
c. Perform electrical tests on instrument transformers as specified in this Section.
d. Perform ground-resistance tests:
1) Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main grounding system and major electrical equipment frames, system neutral and derived neutral points.
e. Test metering devices as specified in this Section.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) f. Perform current injection tests on the entire current circuit of each switchgear or switchboard:
1) Perform current tests by secondary injection with magnitudes such that a minimum current of 1.0 ampere flows in the secondary circuit:
a) Verify the correct magnitude of current at each device in the circuit.
g. Perform system function tests.
h. Verify operation of space heaters.
i. Perform electrical tests of surge arresters as specified in this Section.

3. Test values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
c. Insulation-resistance values of bus insulation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
2) Investigate insulation values less than the allowable minimum. 3) Do not proceed with dielectric withstand voltage tests until insulation-resistance values are above minimum values.
d. If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the dielectric withstand test, the test specimen is considered to have passed the test.
e. Instrument transformer test values shall be as specified in this Section. f. Meter test values shall be as specified in this Section. g. Investigate grounding system point-to-point resistance values that exceed

0.5 ohm.
h. Results of system function tests shall match the Drawings and Specifications.
i. Heaters shall be operational.
j. Phasing checks shall prove the switchgear or switchboard phasing is correct and in accordance with the system design.
k. Results of electrical tests on surge arresters shall be as specified in this Section.

E. Dry type transformers:

1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
d. Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets have been removed.
e. Inspect equipment for cleanliness.
f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:
1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables.
g. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified.

2. Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground:
1) Apply voltage in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data. a) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
c. Calculate dielectric absorption ration or polarization index. d. Verify correct secondary voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral after energization and before loading.

3. Test values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
c. Tap connections are left as found unless otherwise specified. d. Minimum insulation-resistance values of transformer insulation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
2) Investigate insulation values less than the allowable minimum. e. Dielectric absorption ratio or polarization index shall not be less than 1.0. f. Turns-ratio results should not deviate more than 1/2 percent from either the adjacent coils or calculated ratio.
g. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral secondary voltages shall be in agreement with nameplate data.

F. Low voltage cables, 600 volt maximum:

1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare cable data with the Drawings and Specifications. b. Inspect exposed sections of cable for physical damage and correct connection as indicated on the Drawings.
c. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance by one of the following methods:
1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables.
d. Inspect compression applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-12 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) e. Inspect for correct identification and arrangement.
f. Inspect cable jacket insulation and condition.

2. Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform insulation resistance test on each conductor sized #8 AWG or larger with respect to ground and adjacent conductors:
1) Applied potential shall be 500 volts DC for 300-volt rated cable and 1,000 volts DC for 600-volt rated cable.
2) Test duration shall be 1 minute.
c. Perform continuity tests on power and control conductors to ensure correct cable connection.
d. Verify uniform resistance of parallel conductors.

Roseville City CouncilApril 16, 2025

Roseville City Council
April 16, 2025